soil boring log


[PDF]soil boring log - Rackcdn.com10ba4283a7fbcc3461c6-31fb5188b09660555a4c2fcc1bea63d9.r13.cf1.rackcdn.com/...

2 downloads 193 Views 3MB Size

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

File No.511/14284.CAK

State of Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget Facilities and Business Services Administration

DCSPEC Bidding and Contract Document Minor Projects

File No. 511/14284.CAK Index No. 21000 Department of Military and Veterans Affairs CGTC Simulation Building 2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI Bids & Construction August 15, 2014

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

File No.511/14284.CAK

DTMB-0401D (R 11/13)

BID SUMMARY DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET SUBMIT BID TO: Linda Feldpausch FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION DIVISION P.O. Box 30026 Lansing, Michigan 48909

OVERNIGHT MAIL TO: Linda Feldpausch FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION DIVISION General Office Building, 3B 7150 Harris Drive Dimondale, Michigan 48821

FILE NUMBER

INDEX NUMBER

DEPARTMENT/AGENCY

511/14284.CAK

21000

Department of Military and Veterans Affairs

CONTRACT TIME(S) April 17, 2015 (duration or deadline)

PROJECT NAME CGTC Simulation Support Building

BID OPENING DATE

September 10, 2014

LOCATION Camp Grayling Grayling, MI FOR AN EXAMINATION OF THE SITE CONTACT:

at 2:00 pm Local Time

Eric Campbell, (989) 344-6799

SEE SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AND SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PROVIDED WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS. BID: WE PROPOSE TO FURNISH, PERFORM AND COMPLETE THE ENTIRE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IN CONSIDERATION OF THE BID PRICE (S) STATED BELOW.

FIRM NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS

TELEPHONE NUMBER and E-MAIL ADDRESS FEDERAL I.D. NUMBER



Qualified Disabled Veteran BIDDER'S SIGNATURE AND TITLE

(protected information required for processing payments)

DATE

WITNESS' SIGNATURE

DATE

By signing this bid above, bidder certifies their enclosed Qualified Disabled Veteran and Michigan-Based Business Certifications.

BASE BID FROM BID SCHEDULE (Include specified Allowances): ____________________________________________________________________________Dollars $____________________ (use words)

(in figures)

Alternate1: (Add/Subtract) ______________________________________________________ Dollars $ ____________________ (use words) (in figures) Alternate 2: (Add/Subtract) ______________________________________________________Dollars $ ____________________ (in figures) (use words) Alternate 3: (Add/Subtract) ______________________________________________________Dollars $ ____________________ (in figures) (use words)  Builders Risk Insurance is NOT provided if marked. A PERFORMANCE BOND AND A PAYMENT BOND ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL BIDS OVER $50,000.00. EACH BID MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A FIVE (5) PERCENT BID GUARANTEE. BIDDERS ARE ALSO CAUTIONED TO FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH ALL OF THE OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT.

Project Scope of Work: General Construction including site, building, mechanical, electrical, plumbing The Bidder must figure its Base Bid on the specified, or Addendum-approved, materials and equipment only. No “or equal” or substitution proposals will be permitted after Bid opening, except as provided in the General Conditions. Addenda: Bidder acknowledges receipt of Addenda: ________

No. ___ dated: ________, No. ___ dated: ________ No. ___ dated:

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

FIRM NAME

File No.511/14284.CAK

TELEPHONE NUMBER and E-MAIL ADDRESS

BID SCHEDULE Base Bid Schedule - The Bidder will complete the Work and accept as full payment, for the Work items listed, the following Unit Prices and/or Item Bid Prices, as applicable: Base Bid Item No.

Bid Quantity

Description (Bidder to write price in words)

Unit Price

Item Bid Price

Base Bid (Sum of Item Bid Prices for all Base Bid Items):

__________________________________________________________________ Dollars $__________________________ (use words) (in figures) Schedule of Alternates - The Bidder will complete (or deduct from the Contract) the parts of the Work designated by the Alternates that follow and accept in full payment (or allow in full credit) for those parts of the Work the following Item Bid Prices: Alternate Item No.

Bid Quantity

Description (Bidder to write price in words)

Unit Price

Item Bid Price

The Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that the separate prices bid on this “Schedule of Alternates,” where they are applicable and deemed acceptable by the Owner, will be used if incorporated into the Contract when the Owner issues the Notice of Award.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

File No.511/14284.CAK

R 2/13

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET Facilities and Business Services Administration Design & Construction Division

Qualified Disabled Veteran (QDV) Business Representation ‘Qualified Disabled Veteran,’ means a business entity that is 51% or more owned by one or more veterans with a serviceconnected disability. ‘Qualified Disabled,’ means a business entity that is 51% or more owned by one or more with a service-connected disability. The vendor represents that it IS _____, a qualified disabled veteran. The contractor represents and warrants that the company meets the above (when checked) and has attached supporting documentation per the following: Each bid requesting the Qualified Disabled Veterans (QDV) preference, in accordance with Public Act 22 of 2010, MCL 18.1241.3 shall include a DD214 Proof of Service and Discharge, a Veterans Administration rating decision letter, proof of disability (if the disability is not indicated on the DD214), and appropriate legal documents setting forth the 51% natural persons QDV ownership. Fraudulent Certification as a Qualified Disabled Veteran may result in debarment under MCL 18.264.

Certification of a Michigan Based Business (Information Required Prior to Contract Award for Application of State Reciprocity Provisions)

To qualify as a Michigan Based Business: Vendor must have, during the 12 months immediately preceding this bid deadline: or If the business is newly established, for the period the business has been in existence, it has: (check all that apply):

  

Filed a Michigan single business tax return showing a portion or all of the income tax base allocated or apportioned to the State of Michigan pursuant to the Michigan Single Business Tax Act, 1975 PA 228, MCL 208.1 – 208.145; or Filed a Michigan income tax return showing income generated in or attributed to the State of Michigan; or Withheld Michigan income tax from compensation paid to the bidder’s owners and remitted the tax to the Department of Treasury; or

I certify that I have personal knowledge of such filing or withholding, that it was more than a nominal filing for the purpose of gaining the status of a Michigan business, and that it indicates a significant business presence in the state, considering the size of the business and the nature of its activities. I authorize the Michigan Department of Treasury to verify that the business has or has not met the criteria for a Michigan business indicated above and to disclose the verifying information to the procuring agency. Bidder shall also indicate one of the following:

 Bidder qualifies as a Michigan business (provide zip code: ________________)  Bidder does not qualify as a Michigan business (provide name of State: _____________).  Principal place of business is outside the State of Michigan, however service/commodity provided by a location within the State of Michigan (provide zip code: (___________). Fraudulent Certification as a Michigan business is prohibited by MCL 18.1268 § 268. A BUSINESS THAT PURPOSELY OR WILLFULLY SUBMITS A FALSE CERTIFICATION THAT IT IS A MICHIGAN BUSINESS OR FALSELY INDICATES THE STATE IN WHICH IT HAS ITS PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS IS GUILTY OF A FELONY, PUNISHABLE BY A FINE OF NOT LESS THAN $25,000 and subject to debarment under MCL 18.264.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

File No.511/14284.CAK

BID BOND BID SUBMITTED ON the _______ day of ________________, 20____.

Bid Security is in the form of: a Bid Bond _______ Bid Bond form has been duly executed _______; or A Bank Certified or Cashier's check ___ or Money Order ___ is attached to this page ____ If the Bidder is an Individual: Name of Individual:

_________________________________________________________

Name & Title of Person Authorized to sign:

___________________________________________

Signature:

_________________________________________________________ (If not the Individual, Attach Power of Attorney) Date

Doing Business as:

_________________________________________________________

Business Address:

_________________________________________________________

County of registration

_________________________

Telephone:

_________________________

FAX: ______________________

If the Bidder is a Partnership: By:

_________________________________________________________ (True Name of the Partnership) _________________________________________________________ Partner Authorized to Sign Date

Signature:

_________________________________________________________ (Attach evidence of Authority to sign) Date

Business Address:

_________________________________________________________

County of registration

_________________________

Telephone:

_________________________

FAX _______________________

If the Bidder is a Corporation: By:

_________________________________________________________ (Legal Corporation Name)

Name & Title of Authorized Officer: __________________________________________________ Signature:

_________________________________________________________ (Attach evidence of Authority to sign) Date

Name & Title of Officer Attesting:

__________________________________________________

Signature:

_________________________________________________________ Date

Business Address:

_________________________________________________________

Telephone:

_________________________

(State of Incorporation):

_________________________________________________________

FAX _______________________

If The Bidder is A Joint Venture: JOINT VENTURE SIGNATURES MUST BE AS PROVIDED IN INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. EACH JOINT VENTURER SIGNING THE BID MUST SIGN IN THE MANNER INDICATED FOR AN INDIVIDUAL, A PARTNERSHIP OR A CORPORATION. IF MORE THAN TWO JOINT VENTURERS OF THE SAME TYPE ARE INCLUDED, USE ADDITIONAL PAGES. JOINT VENTURE STATE OF INCORPORATION ___________________ OR COUNTY OF REGISTRATION _____________________

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

File No.511/14284.CAK

POST-BID SUBMITTALS The PSC will request this submittal after bid opening. Complete and submit these items within two business days after the request. BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE MODIFICATION RATING (EMR) ____________ Attach letter of explanation if the Bidder does not have an EMR. PROPOSED PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT _______________________________ Attach brief resume or list of similar successful projects. LIST OF SIMILAR PROJECTS COMPLETED BY THE BIDDER Please list at least three completed projects of similar size and complexity to the project being bid, with reference contact information ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE #___ Owner: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE #___ Owner: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ REFERENCE #___ Owner: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Building 2

File No.511/14284.CAK

PERFORMANCE BOND SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No. __________________________________ That "the Contractor," ___________________________________________________, a corporation ___, individual ___, partnership ___, joint venture ___ of the State of __________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ____________________________________________________________________, of the State of _________________, as surety, are held and bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of __________________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, in compliance with 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq. The Contractor has entered into "the Contract" with the Owner for _______________________________________________ _______________, "the Work," covered by the Contract Documents, which are incorporated into this Performance Bond by this reference; If the Contractor faithfully performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, warranties, indemnifications and agreements of the Contract Documents within the Contract Time (including any authorized changes, with or without notice to the Surety) and during the Correction Period, and if the Contractor also performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, warranties, indemnifications and agreements of any and all duly authorized modifications of the Contract Documents, then THIS OBLIGATION IS VOID, OTHERWISE TO REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. A. No change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision) releases the Surety of its obligations under this Section 00610 Performance Bond. The Surety expressly waives notice of any such change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or

modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision). B. This Performance Bond must be solely for the protection of the Owner and its successors, legal representatives or assigns. C. It is the intention of the Contractor and Surety that they must be bound by all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to General Conditions and this Performance Bond). However, this Performance Bond is executed pursuant to 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq., and if any provision(s) of this Performance Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Performance Bond must nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner must be protected to the full extent provided by 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.

IMPORTANT: The Surety must be authorized to do business in the State of Michigan by the Department of Licensing and Regulatory Affairs  Insurance Bureau, must be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner in writing, must have at least an A Best's rating and a Class VII or better financial size category per current A. M. Best Company ratings. Name, Address and Telephone of the Surety:

Address and Telephone of Agent, who is either a resident of, or whose principal office is maintained in, the State of Michigan

Signed and sealed this __________ day of _______________________, 20_____.

THE CONTRACTOR: (Print Full Name and Sign)

By:___________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________

Name & Title: __________________________________________________ Telephone No. _________________________________________________

THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign)

Agent: ________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________

Attorney-in-Fact: ________________________________________________ Telephone No. _______________________________________________

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

PAYMENT BOND SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No.___________________________________

"the Contractor," ___________________________________________________, a corporation ___, individual ___, partnership ___, joint venture ___ of the State of __________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ____________________________________________________________________, of the State of _________________, as surety, are held and bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of __________________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, in compliance with 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq. The Contractor has entered into "the Contract" with the Owner for _____________________________________________ __________________, "the Work," covered by the Contract Documents, which are incorporated into this Payment Bond by this reference; If the Contractor promptly pays all claimants supplying labor or materials to the Contractor or to the Contractor's Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work, then THIS OBLIGATION IS VOID, OTHERWISE TO REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. A. All rights and remedies on this Payment Bond are solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials to the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work, and must be determined in accordance with Michigan Law. B. No change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision) must release the Surety of its obligations under this Payment Bond. The Surety

hereby expressly waives notice of any such change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision). C. It is the intention of the Contractor and Surety that they must be bound by all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to this Payment Bond). However, this Payment Bond is executed pursuant to 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq., and if any provision(s) of this Payment Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Payment Bond must nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner must be protected to the full extent provided by 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.

IMPORTANT: The Surety must be authorized to do business in the State of Michigan by the Department of Licensing and Regulatory Affairs  Insurance Bureau, must be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner in writing, must have at least an A Best's rating and a Class VII or better financial size category per current A. M. Best Company ratings. Name, Address and Telephone of the Surety:

Address and Telephone of Agent, who is either a resident of, or whose principal office is maintained in, the State of Michigan

Signed and sealed this __________ day of _______________________, 20_____.

THE CONTRACTOR: (Print Full Name and Sign)

By:___________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________

Name & Title: __________________________________________________ Telephone No. _________________________________________________

THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign)

Agent: ________________________________________________________

WITNESS ______________________________

Attorney-in-Fact: ________________________________________________ Telephone No. ____________________________________________________

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT FORMS BID SUMMARY FORM BID SCHEDULE QUALIFIED DISABLED VETERAN (QDV) BUSINESS REPRESENTATION CERTIFICATION OF A MICHIGAN BASED BUSINESS RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION BID BOND POST-BID SUBMITTALS PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND DIVISION 00 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS SECTION 00010 00020 00100 00120 00200 00700 00750 00800 00850 00900

TITLE PRE-BID INFORMATION GLOSSARY INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE ADDENDA 00-20

PAGES THRU 00-1 0-1 TO 00-5 00-5 TO 00-8 00-8 00-8 TO 00-9 00-9 TO 00-19 00-19 TO 00-20 00-20 00-20

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 01020 01025 01030 01040 01050 01060 01090 01100 01200 01300 01400 01500 01600 01650 01700 01800

TITLE SUMMARY OF WORK ALLOWANCES MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ALTERNATES COORDINATION FIELD ENGINEERING REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS REFERENCES PROJECT PROCEDURES PROJECT MEETINGS SUBMITTALS QUALITY CONTROL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMP. CONTROLS MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT FACILITY START-UP CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT MAINTENANCE

APPENDIX I – FORMS APPENDIX II – SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS APPENDIX III – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES APPENDIX IV – PREVAILING WAGE RATES 01 5723

SOIL EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROL SOIL REPORT

PAGES THRU 01-1 01-1 01-1 01-1 01-2 01-2 01-2 TO 01-4 01-4 01-4 01-5 01-5 TO 01-6 01-6 01-6 TO 01-7 01-7 01-7 TO 01-8 01-8 01-8

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 4000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5313 BAR GRATINGS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 6400 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 1400 SIGNAGE 10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 4416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEM DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FORPLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

22 0553 22 0700 22 1116 22 1119 22 1316 22 1319 22 3300 22 4000

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING PLUMBING INSULATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION 23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 5400 FURNACES 23 6313 AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 0010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 23 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 0500 VOICE AND DATE ROUGH-IN DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 2000 EARTH MOVING 31 5000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASHPALT PAVING 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 9200 TURF AND GRASSES DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 1100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 3100 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 33 4100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

DRAWINGS - BOUND SEPARATELY GENERAL: G 100

TITLE SHEET

CIVIL: C001 C101 C102 C103 C501

GENERAL NOTES AND LEGENDS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND SITE REMOVALS PLAN SITE LAYOUT AND UTILITIES PLAN SITE GRADING AND S.E.S.C. PLAN SITE DETAILS

ARCHITECTURAL: A101 FLOOR PLAN AND ROOF PLAN A201 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301 BUILDING AND WALL SECTIONS A401 EXTERIOR DETAILS A601 DOOR AND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES AND DETAILS STRUCTURAL: S101 FOUNDATION PLAN AND STRUCTURAL NOTES 5401 FOUNDATION AND FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING: P100 P400 P401 P900

PLUMBING NOTES AND LEGENDS BELOW FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN ABOVE FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN DETAILS AND SCHEDULES

MECHANICAL: M100 MECHANICAL NOTES AND LEGENDS M400 MECHANICAL PLAN M800 MECHANICAL DETAILS M900 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL: E1.0 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND SCHEDULES E4.0 LIGHTING AND POWER PLANS E6.0 RISER DIAGRAM

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

DIVISION 00 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 00010 PRE-BID INFORMATION 1.

Invitation to Bid (ITB)  Your firm is invited to submit a Bid. The State of Michigan as the Owner will receive sealed Bids, delivered to the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration (DTMBFBSA), General Office Building, 3B, 7150 Harris Drive, Dimondale, Michigan 48821, for CGTC Simulation Building 2 until 2:00 P.M., local time, on September 10, 2014, when all Bids duly received will be opened publicly and read aloud. The State reserves the right to cancel this Invitation to Bid (ITB) or change the date and time for submitting Bids by announcing same at any time before the established date and time for Bid opening. Bids must remain open for acceptance by the Owner for no less than the Bid hold period. Contractor may agree to extend the Bid hold period. However, any such extension must be based upon no increase in the Bid Price and/or Contract Time.

2.

Work Description  The Work, General Construction including site, building, mechanical, electrical, plumbing. Agency No. 511 Index No. 21000, DTMB File No.511/14284.CAK includes, but is not necessarily limited to: The site is located Camp Grayling, Kitchen Road, Grayling, MI , as shown on the Drawings.

3.

Bidding Documents  Sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained at www.Buy4Michigan.com.

4.

Bid Security  Each Bid must enclose Bid Security, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's Base Bid, paid to the “State of Michigan” in the form of a certified or cashier’s check or money order drawn upon a bank insured by an agency of the Federal Government or a bid bond with an authorized surety company.

5.

Pre-Bid Conference  A mandatory _X_ voluntary ____ pre-bid conference will be held at Camp Grayling, Building 560, Grayling, MI on August 26, 2014 at 10:30 a.m. Local Time. A tour of the site and adjacent buildings will _X_ will not ___ be held on the same day, starting immediately after the pre-bid conference. All prospective Bidders are required _X__ encouraged ___to attend the tour, if held. Other parties interested in the Work are encouraged to attend the tour. Addenda may be issued, in response to issues raised at the pre-bid conference and tour, or as the Owner and/or Professional may otherwise consider necessary. The purpose of the pre-bid conference and inspection is to answer questions and provide an inspection tour of the Project site at the scheduled time on the day of the meeting. A representative will be available to assist the Contractors. Other inspection visits may be allowed if needed. Individuals needing special services to fully participate in the meeting due to a disability may contact Eric Campbell at (989) 344-6799.

6.

Equal Employment Opportunity  Covenants to not discriminate in employment by Contractors, Subcontractors and Suppliers required by Law are contained in Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions and are applicable to the Work and any Sub-agreement under the Contract.

7.

Contract Times  The Contract Times and the associated liquidated damages are specified in the Contract.

8.

Contact Person  All requests or inquiries concerning the Bidding Documents or the Work must be addressed to: Todd Ockaskis, Paradigm Design. Questions will be accepted until September 3, 2014 at 5:00 p.m. Local Time.

9.

Award  Subject to any agreed extension of the period for holding Bids, Bids must remain valid for acceptance by the Owner for 60 Calendar Days after the date of Bid opening. In addition, the Owner expressly reserves the right, within the Owner's sole discretion, to reject any or all Bids, to waive any irregularities, to issue post-Bid Addenda and re-bid the Work without readvertising, to re-advertise for Bids, to withhold the award for any reason the Owner determines and/or to take any other appropriate action.

10. Performance and Payment Bonds – A performance bond and a payment bond are required for all contracts over $50,000.00.

END OF SECTION 00010

00-1

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.

2.

PREPARATION OF BID: Execute Bid fully and properly. Bid Summary Form (DTMB -0401D) and Bid Form Attachments must be used and completely filled out for the Bid to be considered responsive and meeting the requirements of the contract solicitation. All Bid prices must be printed or typed in both words and figures.

BID CHECKLIST: Submit one Bid Summary Form with original signatures plus Bid Form Attachments in a sealed envelope. On the outside of the envelope, identify: i) the Project by name, file number, index number and location; ii) Bidder’s name, complete address and phone number; and “Sealed Bid Enclosed” written on the envelope.

A complete Bid will consist of the following forms, which are included immediately following the Bid Summary Form: Bids All Bids

Over $50K

Over $100K

Over $250K

SUBMIT THESE Bid Forms and Bid Form Attachments

□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □

Signed and completed Bid Summary Form (DTMB-0401D); Bid Schedule; Qualified Disabled Veteran (QDV) Business Representation; Bid Security in the amount of 5% of Base Bid Price; Signature Authorization or copy of the partnership agreement if signed by all partners; Other Forms; Forms listed under All Bids; Payment and Performance Bond (upon issuing the Notice of Award). Forms listed under All Bids; Certification of a Michigan Based Business; Payment and Performance Bond (upon issuing the Notice of Award). Forms listed under All Bids; Certification of a Michigan Based Business; Payment and Performance Bond (upon issuing the Notice of Award). Copy of valid Certificate of Awardability (See Item 5. CERTIFICATE OF AWARDABILITY: below);

Apparent Low Bidders ONLY (upon request from the Professional)

□ □ □ 3.

Experience Modification Rating (EMR), or a letter stating why the Bidder does not have one. Identification of the proposed project superintendent, with a resume or list of similar projects handled by that individual. A list of at least three (3) projects completed by the Bidder, within the last three (3) years of similar size and complexity, with contact information for references for each.

BID SUBMISSION: Deliver Bid package to the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration, Design and Construction Division before the opening time when Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. Your proposal must be received on or before the Bid opening date and the time stated in the Bidding Documents. NOTE: Some express mail services guarantee delivery by 3:00 p.m. However, your Bid WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED if not received at Facilities and Business Services Administration by the 2:00 p.m. time required.

4.

BID GUARANTEE: Each proposal must be accompanied by either a bank certified or cashier's check on an open, solvent bank or a bid bond with an authorized surety company (the surety must be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570) in the amount of five percent of the base bid payable to the State of Michigan, as a guarantee of good faith. If the successful Bidder fails to furnish satisfactory bonds and insurance within fifteen Calendar Days after Notice of Award, such guarantee must be forfeited to the State as liquidated damages. The bid security, exclusive of bid bonds, of all unsuccessful Bidders will be returned when an award is made or upon substitution of a bid bond. The bid security of the successful Bidder will be returned when the performance bond and labor and material bond are approved. 00-2

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

5.

CERTIFICATE OF AWARDABILITY: The Contractor must not discriminate on the basis of religion, race, color, national origin, age, sex, marital status, height, weight, arrest record or disability. Prior to the award of any Contract of $250,000.00 or more, the Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget (DTMB) Contract Compliance Representative will notify the Michigan Department of Civil Rights (DCR) Contract Compliance Representative, providing a bid tabulation and providing a description of the recommended awardee(s) including business(es)’ name, business(es)’ designated contact person, last four digits of company(ies)’ tax identification number, business(es)’ address, and business(es)’ contact person telephone number. In the event a contractor does not have a valid Certificate of Awardability and is the best value low bidder, the contractor must immediately submit, upon notification by DTMB, their application to DCR. DCR will process the requests as quickly as possible.

6.

MICHIGAN BASED BUSINESS CERTIFICATION: All Bidders submitting Bids in excess of $100,000.00 must complete the Certification of Michigan Based Business. This information will determine if a Bidder qualifies as a "Michigan" business for purposes of application of reciprocity where applicable.

7.

POST-BID SUBMITTAL: For projects over $250,000, the Professional will request a Post-Bid Submittal from the Apparent Low Bidders. The Apparent Low Bidders must submit to the Professional, within two Business Days after receipt of the Professional’s request,   

8.

Experience Modification Rating (EMR), or a letter stating why the Bidder does not have one. Identification of the proposed project superintendent with a resume or list of similar projects managed by that individual. A list of at least three (3) projects completed by the Bidder, within the last three (3) years of similar size and complexity, with contact information for references for each. Failure to provide the submittals may disqualify the Bid.

SIGNATURES: All Bids, notifications, claims, and statements must be signed as follows: (a) Corporations: Signature of official must be accompanied by a certified copy of the Resolution of the Board of Directors authorizing the individual signing to bind the corporation. (b) Partnerships: Signature of one partner must be accompanied by a signed copy of the legal document (e.g. Power of Attorney or partnering agreement) authorizing the individual signing to bind all partners. If Bid is signed by all partners, no authorization is required. (c) Individual: No authorization is needed. Each signature must be witnessed.

9.

BID PRICES: The Bidder’s Base Bid and Alternate Bid prices must include, and payment for completed Work will compensate in full for: all services, obligations, responsibilities, management, supervision, labor, materials, devices, equipment, construction equipment, general conditions, permits, patent fees and royalties, testing, inspection and approval responsibilities, warranties, temporary facilities, small tools, supplies, Bonds, insurance, taxes, mobilization, close-out, overhead and profit and all connections, appurtenances and any other incidental items of any kind or nature, as are necessary to complete the Work, in a neat, first quality, workmanlike and satisfactory manner in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and as otherwise required to fulfill the requirements of the Bidding Documents. For each Cash Allowance item, the Bidder must include, within the Bid, all labor costs, construction equipment costs, insurance and Bond premiums and other general conditions costs and Fees (Bidder’s and Subcontractors’) to complete Work associated with the material, equipment or other designated item to be furnished under the Cash Allowance. For each Provisionary Allowance, the Bidder must include, within the Bid, insurance, premiums (not recoverable as labor burden) and Bond premiums required to complete Work that may be ordered under a Provisionary Allowance.

10. INSPECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE CONDITIONS: The Bidder must carefully review and inspect all documents referenced and made part of this ITB, site conditions, all applicable statutes, regulations, ordinances and resolutions addressing or relating to the goods and services under this contract. Failure to do so or failure to acquire clarifications and answers to any discovered conflicts, ambiguities, errors or omissions in the Bidding Documents will be at the Bidder’s sole risk. 11. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND LAWS: The Bidder awarded the Contract must comply with all applicable federal, state and local Laws including health and safety regulations, environmental protection, permits and licensing. 12. INTERPRETATIONS AND ALTERATIONS TO THE BID AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS: All requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents, all proposals for any modifications to the Bidding Documents, all requests for information and all other questions or inquiries about the Bidding Documents and/or the Work shall be submitted in writing to the Contact Person identified in the Bid Documents. Requests or inquiries received less than seven Calendar Days before the date of Bid opening will be answered only if (a) the response can be given through an Addendum made available at least seventy-two hours before Bid opening (counting Business Days only), (b) the Bid opening is postponed by Addendum, or (c) the Work is rebid without readvertising following the issuance of post-Bid Addenda. Bidders must not rely upon any oral statements or conversations regarding interpretations, clarifications, corrections, additions, deletions or other revisions or information to the Bidding Documents. Any addition, limitation or provision made with or attached to the Bid may render it non-responsive and/or irregular and be a cause for rejection. The Owner reserves the right to 00-3

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

issue a post-Bid Addendum after opening the Bids and set a new date for the receipt and opening of sealed Bids. The Bidder acknowledges that any quantities of Unit Price Work given in this ITB are approximate only and payments will be made only for actual quantities of Unit Price Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. MODIFICATION OF RECEIVED BID: A modification of a Bid already received will be considered only if the modification shows increase or decrease to the original bid and is submitted in writing in the Bid form(s) and received before the Bid opening time and date. Modifications may be submitted by a fax to (517) 284-7970. 14. BID WITHDRAWAL: Except for timely filed claims of mathematical or clerical errors granted by the State, no Bid may be withdrawn within sixty Calendar Days after the Bid Opening time and date or before the Bid expiration date without forfeiting Bid security. The request to withdraw a Bid due to error must be submitted in writing along with the supporting documents within two Business Days after the date of Bid Opening. The claim must describe in detail the error(s), include a signed affidavit stating the facts of the alleged error(s) and request that the Bidder be released from its Bid. The review of the claim and its supporting documents by the State is only for the purpose of evaluating the Bidder’s request and must not create duty or liability on the State to discover any other Bid error or mistake. The sole liability of any Bid error or mistake rests with Bidder. 15. BID OPENING; OBJECTION TO THE AWARD: Bids will be opened and publicly read at the opening time and date. A Bidder may file a written protest with the Director-FBSA to object to the Apparent Low Bidder. This objection must be filed within seven Calendar Days after the date of Bid opening and must describe in detail the basis for the protest and request a determination. The Director-FBSA will either dismiss or uphold the protest and notify the protestor within ten Calendar Days after receipt of the written protest. 16. BID IRREGULARITIES: The following irregularities on any Bid Form or Bid Form Attachment must be resolved as follows: (a) between words and figures, the words must be used; (b) between any sum, computed by the Bidder, and the correct sum, the sum computed by the Bidder must be used; (c) between the product, computed by the Bidder, of any quantity and Bid Unit Price and the correct product of the Unit Price and the quantity of Unit Price Work, the product extended by the Bidder must be used; (d) between a stipulated Allowance and the amount entered, the Allowance must be used; (e) any mobilization pay item exceeding the maximum specified must be ignored and the Bid must remain unchanged; (f) if any Bidder fails or neglects to bid a Unit Price for an item of Unit Price Work but shows an "Bid Price" for that item, the missing unit price must be computed from the respective quantity and the Item Bid Price shown; (g) if any Bidder fails or neglects to show a "Bid Price" for an item of Unit Price Work but bids a unit price, the missing Bid Price must remain as “zero”; and (h) if any Bidder fails or neglects to enter a Bid Price in both words and figures, the Bid Price printed or typed, whether in words or figures, must be used. 17. CERTIFICATION: The bidder certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that, within the past three (3) years, the bidder, an officer of the bidder, or an owner of a 25% or greater interest in the bidder: (a) Has not been convicted of a criminal offense incident to the application for or performance of a contract or subcontract with the State of Michigan or any of its agencies, authorities, boards, commissions, or departments. (b) Has not had a felony conviction in any state (including the State of Michigan). (c) Has not been convicted of a criminal offense which negatively reflects on the bidder’s business integrity, including but not limited to, embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, receiving stolen property, negligent misrepresentation, price-fixing, bid-rigging, or a violation of state or federal anti-trust statutes. (d) Has not had a loss or suspension of a license or the right to do business or practice a profession, the loss or suspension of which indicates dishonesty, a lack of integrity, or a failure or refusal to perform in accordance with the ethical standards of the business or profession in question. (e) Has not been terminated for cause by the Owner. (f) Has not failed to pay any federal, state, or local taxes. (g) Has not failed to comply with all requirements for foreign corporations. (h) Has not been debarred from participation in the bid process pursuant to Section 264 of 1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1264, or debarred or suspended from consideration for award of contracts by any other State or any federal Agency. (i) Has not been convicted of a criminal offense or other violation of other state or federal law, as determined by a court of competent jurisdiction or an administrative proceeding, that in the opinion of DTMB indicates that the bidder is unable to perform responsibly or which reflects a lack of integrity that could negatively impact or reflect upon the State of Michigan, including but not limited to, any of the following offenses under or violations of: 1. The Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, 1994 PA 451, MCL 324.101 to 324.90106. 2. A persistent and knowing violation of the Michigan Consumer Protection Act, 1976 PA 331, MCL 445.901 to 445.922. 3. 1965 PA 166, MCL 408.551 to 408.558 (law relating to prevailing wages on state projects) and a finding that the bidder failed to pay the wages and/or fringe benefits due within the time period required. 4. Repeated or flagrant violations of 1978 PA 390 MCL 408.471 to 408.490 (law relating to payment of wages and fringe benefits). 5. A willful or persistent violation of the Michigan Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1974, PA 154, MCL 408.10001 to 408.1094, including: a criminal conviction, repeated willful violations that are final orders, repeated violations that are final orders, and failure to abate notices that are final orders. 00-4

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

(j)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

6. A violation of federal or state civil rights, equal rights, or non-discrimination laws, rules, or regulations. 7. Been found in contempt of court by a Federal Court of Appeals for failure to correct an unfair labor practice as prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 372 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U. s. C. 158 (1980 PA 278, as amended, MCL 423.321 et seq). Is not an Iran-Linked Business as defined in MCL 129.312.

A false statement, misrepresentation or concealment of material facts on this certification may be grounds for rejection of this proposal or termination of the award and may be grounds for debarment. 18. REJECTION OF BID: The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any Bids and to waive any informality, defects or irregularity in any Bid received. In addition, the Bidder recognizes the right of the Owner to reject a Bid if: (a) the Bid is in any way incomplete or irregular; (b) the Bidder, Subcontractor or Supplier is not responsible as determined by the Owner; (c) the Bidder’s performance as a Contractor was unsatisfactory under a prior Contract with the Owner for the construction, repair, modification or demolition of a facility with the Owner, or under any other Contract, which was funded, directly or indirectly, by the Owner; (d) there are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion or unlawful agreements exists between any Bidders, that a Bidder is interested in more than one Bid, or that the Bid is not genuine; (e) the Bid exceeds the funds available; or (f) the Bidder does not have a valid Certificate of Awardability or does not qualify for consideration given to bids received while final certification is still pending. 19. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTION: Any Bidder wishing to use manufacturers or materials other than those specified must submit a written request to the Professional not later than seven days before due date for Bids. Request must be accompanied by product data to permit evaluation and comparison with specified products or materials. The Person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. The Professional and the Owner will examine and evaluate the product data and if found acceptable, an Addendum will be issued and mailed or delivered to each Person who has received a set of Drawings and Specifications. All Addenda issued must be made a part of the Contract requirements. Contractor will be responsible for any extra work and expense incurred to satisfactorily and completely incorporating each substitute product into the Project. 20. MICHIGAN PRODUCTS AND RECYCLED PRODUCTS: All Contractors and Suppliers are encouraged to provide Michigan-made products and/or recycled products and/or green products and/or environmentally-friendly products whenever possible where price, quality, and performance are equal to, or superior to, non-Michigan products and the requirements of the Contract Documents. A list of Michigan-made products is available at: www.michigan.gov/dcd. The Contractor will be required to use alternatives to landfills for waste disposal such as reuse or recycle of asphalt, bricks, concrete, masonry, plastics, paint, glass, carpet, metals, wood, drywall, insulation and any other waste materials to the extent practical. 21. PRE-AWARD PRODUCT SUBMITTALS: If requested, the Apparent Low Bidders must submit a summary of preliminary technical data on each product listed in N/A. The Apparent Low Bidders will furnish this summary data to the Professional within forty-eight hours of the Bid Opening. These submittals will be used to evaluate the Bid before the award. Failure to provide the submittals may disqualify the Bid. 22. CONTRACT AND CONTRACT AWARD: The Owner intends to award a Contract to the responsive and responsible best value bidder, except as provided below relative to veteran’s preference. 22.1

Determination of the lowest three Bidders shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and any additive and deductive Alternates the Owner accepts, in the order in which they are listed only. The Owner will accept an Alternate only if all other previously listed Alternates are also accepted, unless acceptance by the Owner of Alternates in a different order does not affect determination of the lowest three bidders in any way.

22.2

The bids will be evaluated for best value based on price and qualitative components by comparing the qualitative components of the three lowest responsive and responsible Bidders. The comparison may also include other Bidders whose bids are within 10% of the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder.

22.3

If a Qualified Disabled Veteran meets the requirements of the contract solicitation and with the veteran’s preference is the lowest Bidder, the Owner will award the contract to the Qualified Disabled Veteran bidder. A determination as to whether the requirements of the bid solicitation have been met will be based solely on the Owner’s and Professional’s evaluation of the Bid Summary, Bid Attachments, Bidder-provided documents, and interview.

22.4

For the purpose of evaluating and determining the low responsive bid, 10% of the lowest responsive bid (the bid that would otherwise receive the contract award if the preference were not being considered) will be deducted from all QDV bids. If the low responsive QDV bid, less the 10% preference, is less than the lowest responsive bid, then the QDV bid will be declared the official low responsive bid. The original QDV bid amount will be the basis of the contract award.

00-5

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Example: Lowest Responsive Bid Lowest Responsive QDV Bid Preference (10% of the Lowest Responsive Bid) Lowest Responsive QDV Bid Less Preference Official Low Responsive Bid 22.5

$100,000 $109,000 $ 10,000 $ 99,000 ($109,000 - $10,000) $109,000

The Apparent Low Bidders will be evaluated for responsiveness and responsibility based on the following:       

Compliance with the bid specifications and requirements. The Bidder’s financial resources. The Bidder’s technical capabilities. The Bidder’s technical experience. The Bidder’s past performance. The Bidder’s insurance and bonding capacity. The Bidder’s business integrity.

Some qualitative components that may be evaluated are:    22.6

Technical approach. Quality of proposed personnel. Management plans.

For contracts under $250,000, best value will primarily be based on the lowest responsive and responsible bid.

23. CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Work of all trades as specified in the Contract Documents must be completed by April 17, 2015 based on Notice-to-Proceed except for minor replacement, correction, or adjustment items which do not interfere with the complete operation and utilization of all parts of the Contract Work. This Contract Time is of the essence and liquidated damages for each Calendar Day that expires after this Substantial Completion of the entire Work must be in the amount of $ 300/day. Liquidated damages are not a penalty, are cumulative and represent a reasonable estimate of the Owner’s extra costs and damages, which are difficult to estimate with accuracy in advance. 24. MOBILIZATION: If used in the Specifications/Bid schedule, all the up-front costs incurred by the Contractor must be covered by the mobilization. The costs to establish temporary site offices, to obtain required permits for commencing the Work and for bonds and insurance premiums are examples of costs to the Contractor that are covered by mobilization pay item. This cost must not exceed four percent (4%) of the Base Bid, unless otherwise expressly provided in the Bidding Documents. 25. SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL: All Work under this Contract must meet the storm water management requirements of the Project and comply with the applicable Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control (SESC) rules and regulations and specific provisions for same within the Contract Documents. SESC measures will be monitored and enforced by the Facilities and Business Services Administration, or another authorized enforcing agency if so delegated, through the review of the Contractor’s implementation plans and site inspections. Facilities and Business Services Administration or the Professional will notify the Contractor in writing of any violation(s) of the applicable SESC statutes and/or the corrective action(s) undertaken by the Owner and may issue stop work orders. Facilities and Business Services Administration has the right to assess a fine to the Contractor for noncompliance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and/or SESC regulations applicable to this Work and fines must be in addition to any other remediation costs or liquidated damages applicable to the Project and may exceed the value of the Contract.

END OF SECTION 00100 SECTION 00120 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS The provisions of this Section amend or supplement Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and those other provisions of the Bidding Requirements that are indicated below. All other Bidding Requirements that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.

END OF SECTION 00120

00-6

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 00200 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS 1.

UNDERGROUND UTILITIES Information or data about physical conditions of existing Underground Utilities, which have been used by the Professional in preparing the Bidding Documents, is shown or indicated in the Drawings and technical Specifications and those Underground Utility drawings itemized immediately below.

2.

PERMITS, APPROVALS, LICENSES AND FEES

2.1 If the Owner has secured or will secure any permits, approvals and licenses and has paid or will pay any associated charges and fees, any such permits, approvals and licenses are itemized in this paragraph: None 2.2 If any permits, approvals and licenses itemized above have been obtained by the Owner and the fees have been paid, copies of those permits, approvals, licenses and corresponding fee receipts, are attached to this Section 00200 Information for Bidders. Except for any permits, approvals, licenses and fees identified above, the Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, approvals, licenses and fees applicable to Work. 3.

SEQUENCING REQUIREMENTS Refer to the technical Specifications, including, but not limited to the General Requirements, for information, data and criteria on sequences of Work restraints, construction and maintenance of service to existing facilities, which, if provided, must govern the selection of Work sequences. Each Bidder must be responsible for any conclusions or interpretations the Bidder makes related to the selection of sequences and Means and Methods, based on the technical data made available, and/or those additional investigations or studies made or obtained by that Bidder.

4.

SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS In preparing the bidding documents, the PSC used the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions itemized immediately. below If those reports are listed and not attached to this Section, they are available for purchase ($______ per copy) from the Professional. No Reports available

4.1 Information or data contained in those reports that may be properly considered Authorized Technical Data concerning subsurface conditions include (NOTE: All other information or data excluded from the list below represent Non-Technical Information or Data, interpretations or opinions): Soil report that is included 4.2 In preparing the bidding documents, the PSC has not used the following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions itemized immediately below. Those reports are available at the office of the Professional for review or purchase. Neither the Owner nor Professional warrants that this list identifies all existing relevant documents. No reports available 5.

OTHER PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

5.1 The Drawings and technical Specifications and those drawings itemized immediately below contain information or data that have been used in the preparation of the Bidding Documents, and that may be properly considered Authorized Technical Data concerning physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities. If those drawings and specifications are listed and not attached to this Section, they are available for purchase ($_____ per copy) from the Professional. None 5.2 The reference documents itemized immediately below have not been used in the preparation of the Bidding Documents, and are available for review or purchase. Information and data contained in those reference documents, including, but not limited to dimensions, locations and conditions of existing surface and subsurface structures, roadways, piping, raceways, equipment, etc. may not accurately or reliably reflect actual conditions. Neither the Owner nor Professional warrants that this list identifies all existing relevant documents.

END OF SECTION 00200

00-7

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.

Interpretations: Any requests for clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents must be in writing to the Professional, who will issue written clarifications or interpretations as appropriate. If the Contractor believes that such clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment to the Contract Price/Time, the Contractor must promptly notify the Professional in writing before proceeding with the Work Involved.

1.1 Standards: The Contract Documents describe the entire Work. The provisions of the Contract Documents must govern over any standard specifications, manual or code of any technical society, organization or association but, if lower than the standards set by any Law applicable to the Work or the Project, the higher standards must govern. The Contractor’s responsibilities extend to cover Subcontractors and Suppliers if liable as a result of their actions or obligations. 1.2 Contract Time Computation: The time to complete the Work must be made in Calendar Days and must include both the first and last day. The first day is established by the Notice-to-Proceed. 1.3 Technical Specifications and Priority: The following applies whenever priority is called for in Contract Documents: specifications must govern Drawings; figured dimensions must govern scaled dimensions; detail drawings must govern general drawings; Drawings must govern Submittals. 1.4 Indemnification: The Contractor is required to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Professional, their employees, agents, servants, and representatives from and against all claims, suits, demands, actions of whatever type and nature and all judgments, costs, losses and damages, whether direct, indirect or consequential including, but not limited to, charges of architects, engineers, attorneys and others and all court, hearing and any other dispute resolution costs arising from: (a) any patent or copyright infringement by the Contractor; (b) any damage to the premises or adjacent lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements, including loss of use to the business and property of others as a result of Contractor’s operations; (c) any bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to or destruction of property, including loss of use due to or related to the Work and caused in whole or in part by the Contractor or Subcontractor or Supplier’s negligence, omissions or failure to maintain the required insurance and coverage and; (d) a failure by the Contractor to appropriately handle Hazardous Materials for the Work or the Contractor’s operations in compliance with the Owner requirements and/or applicable Laws and regulations. The indemnification obligations are not affected by the limitation on the amount and types of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor or Supplier under worker’s or workman’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 1.5 Contract Documents Ownership: The State is the owner of the Contract Documents. The Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier must not reuse any of the documents on any other Project without prior consent of the State and Professional. The Professional will furnish on behalf of the Owner at no cost to the Contractor, up to ten copies of Drawings and Project Specifications. 2.

GENERAL PROVISIONS

2.1 Owner: the Project Director and/or Owner Field Representative will represent the Owner. Neither the Project Director nor the Owner Field Representative has the authority to interpret the requirements of the Contract Documents or to authorize any changes in the Work or any adjustment in Contract Price/Time. The State will provide the necessary easements for permanent structure and permanent changes in existing lands, areas, properties and facilities. However, the Contractor must obtain, at no increase in Contract Price/Time, permits for any other lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements required by the Contractor for temporary facilities, storage, disposal of soil or waste material or any other purpose. The Contractor must submit copies of the permits and written agreements to the Owner. The Contractor must engage a registered land surveyor to establish the necessary reference points and/or base lines for construction and must be responsible for protecting them including benchmarks and Project elevations. 2.2 Professional: Acting as the Owner’s representative during the Contract Time period, the Professional will endeavor to guard the Owner from Defective work and to keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work. Unless delegated by specific written notice from the Owner, the Professional and the Professional’s representatives do not have the authority to authorize any changes in the Work or any adjustment in Contract Price/Time. The On-site Inspections by the Owner Field Representative and/or the Professional do not relieve the Contractor from its obligation to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or represent acceptance of Defective Work. 2.3 Contractor: The Contractor must manage, supervise, and direct the Work competently, applying the management, supervision, skills, expertise, scheduling, coordination and attention necessary to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents with a minimum disturbance to or interference to the business operations on site or adjacent properties. The Contractor must assign and maintain a competent full-time superintendent on the Work, as its representative, at all times 00-8

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

while Work is being done on site and must not be replaced without the Owner’s consent. The Contractor shall enforce good order among its employees and shall not employ on the work any disorderly, intemperate, or unfit persons, or not skilled in the work assigned to them. The Contractor is solely responsible for his Means and Methods, safety precautions and programs related to safety, the Contractor’s failure to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and any act of omissions by the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier. The Contractor must compare Contract Documents for conflicts, unworkable or unsafe specified Means and Methods and verify against manufacturer’s recommendations for installations and handling and must notify the Professional in writing of the discovery of any such conflicts or errors. The Contractor is required to furnish certifications that lines and grades for all concrete work were checked before and after placing concrete, and that final grades are as required by the Contractor Documents. Wherever required, the Contractor must be responsible for all cutting, fitting, drilling, fixing-up, and patching of concrete, masonry, gypsum board, piping and other materials that may be necessary to make in-place Work and dependent Work fit together properly. The Contractor must restore to pre-existing conditions all walks, roadways, paved or landscaped areas and other real and personal property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. The Contractor must maintain at the site one copy of material safety data sheets (MSDS) and one copy of all asbuilt/Record Documents in good order and annotated in a neat and legible manner to show: (a) all revisions made, (b) dimensions noted during the furnishing and performance of the Work, and (c) all deviations between the as-built installation and the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications and interpretations. The Contractor must maintain and furnish promptly to the Owner and the Professional upon their request daily field reports recording the on-site labor force and equipment (Contractor and Subcontractors); materials/equipment received; visits by Suppliers; significant in-progress and completed trade Work within major areas; and other pertinent information. The Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, death, injury or loss without any special instruction in emergencies and must give the Owner prompt written notice of any changes in Work resulting from the action taken for review and approval. 2.4 Subcontractors and Suppliers: The Owner assumes no contractual obligations to anyone other than the Contractor. All trade construction Drawings must be field coordinated before fabrication and/or installation. The Owner reserves the right to reject or revoke, for its convenience, any approved Subcontractor/Supplier. Work performed by any Subcontractor or Supplier must be through an appropriate written agreement that: (a) expressly binds the Subcontractor/Supplier to the requirements of the Contract Documents, (b) requires such Subcontractor or Supplier to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations that the Contractor assumes toward the Owner and the Professional, and (c) contains the waiver of rights and dispute resolution provisions. 2.5 Access to Payroll Records: The Contractor and its Subcontractors must comply with the Prevailing Wage Rates for the county where the Project is located, and must maintain and keep, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, records pertaining to the bidding, award and performance of the Work, including, but not limited to certified payroll, employment records and all data used in estimating the Contractor’s prices for the Bid, Change Order, proposal or claim. The Owner or its representative must have access to those records, must have the right to interview the Contractor’s employees and must be provided with appropriate facilities for the purpose of inspection, audit/review and copying for five years after final payment, termination or date of final resolution of any dispute, litigation, audit exception or appeal. The payroll and other employment records of workers assigned to the site must contain the name and address of each worker, correct wage classification, rate of pay, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deduction made and actual wages paid. The Contractor must maintain records that show: (a) the anticipated costs or actual costs incurred in providing such benefits, (b) that commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, and (c) that the plan or program is financially responsible and has been communicated in writing to the workers affected. 3.

Bonds and Insurance:

3.1 Both the Performance Bond and Payment Bond must remain in effect from the date of Contract Award until final completion of the Work or the end of Correction Period, whichever comes later. The surety bonds required for a Construction Contract will not be accepted by FBSA unless the surety bonding company is listed in the current United States Government, Department of Treasury’s, Listing of approved sureties (bonding/insurance companies), Department Circular 570. Copies of the current Circular listing may be obtained through the internet web site at http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/c570.html. Insurers must have an “A-“ A.M. Best Company Rating and a Class VII or better financial size category as shown in the most current A.M. Best Company ratings. Insurance must be provided by insurers authorized by the Department of Insurance and Financial Services (DIFS) to do business as an insurer in Michigan. The insurance company and must attach evidence of the authorization. These certificates must specify the Project File No., Index No., Project Title, and a description of the Project. The Contractor agrees that insurance coverage afforded under the policies as such coverage relate to the State under this Contract as determined by the Contractor will not be modified or canceled without at least thirty calendar days prior written notice to the State. The latest A.M. Best’s Key Ratings Guide and the A.M. Best’s Company Reports (which include the A.M. Best’s Ratings) are found at: http://www.ambest.com. The Contractor must not perform any part of the Work unless the Contractor has all the required insurance in full force and effect. 00-9

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

3.2 The Contractor is required to provide proof of the minimum levels of insurance coverage as indicated below. The purpose of this coverage must be to protect the State from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s performance of services under the terms of this Contract, whether such services are performed by the Contractor, or by any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. The Contractor waives all rights against the State for recovery of damages to the extent these damages are covered by the insurance policies the Contractor is required to maintain pursuant to this Contract. The Contractor also agrees to provide evidence that all applicable insurance policies contain a waiver of subrogation by the insurance company. All insurance coverages provided relative to this Contract/Purchase Order is PRIMARY and NON-CONTRIBUTING to any comparable liability insurance (including self-insurances) carried by the State. The Insurance must be written for not less than any minimum coverage herein specified or required by law, whichever is greater. All deductible amounts for any of the required policies are subject to approval by the State. The State reserves the right to reject insurance written by an insurer the State deems unacceptable. BEFORE THE CONTRACT IS SIGNED BY BOTH PARTIES OR BEFORE THE PURCHASE ORDER IS ISSUED BY THE STATE, THE CONTRACTOR MUST FURNISH TO THE DIRECTOR-FBSA CERTIFICATE(S) OF INSURANCE VERIFYING INSURANCE COVERAGE. THE CERTIFICATE MUST BE ON THE STANDARD “ACCORD” FORM. THE CONTRACT OR PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER MUST BE SHOWN ON THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO ASSURE CORRECT FILING. All such Certificate(s) are to be prepared by the Insurance Provider and not by the Contractor. All such Certificate(s) must contain a provision indicating that coverages afforded under the policies WILL NOT BE CANCELLED, MATERIALLY CHANGED, OR NOT RENEWED without THIRTY days prior written notice, except for 10 days for non-payment of premium, having been given to the Director-FBSA Such NOTICE must include the CONTRACT NUMBER affected and be mailed to the Project Director. The Contractor is required to provide the type and amount of insurance below: (a) Commercial General Liability Insurance with a limit of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence. If such CGL insurance contains a general aggregate limit, it must apply separately to this project. The Contractor must list the State, its departments, divisions, agencies, offices, commissions, officers, employees and agents as ADDITIONAL INSUREDS on the Commercial General Liability policy. (b) Vehicle Liability Insurance for bodily injury and property damage as required by law on any auto including owned, hired and non-owed vehicles used in the Contractor’s business. The Contractor must list the State, its departments, divisions, agencies, offices, commissions, officers, employers and agents as ADDITIONAL INSUREDS on the vehicle liability policy. (c) Worker’s disability compensation, disability benefit or other similar employee benefit act with minimum statutory limits. NOTE: (i) If coverage is provided by a State fund or if Contractor has qualified as a self-insurer, separate certification must be furnished that coverage is in the state fund or that Contractor has approval to be a self-insurer; (ii) Any citing of a policy of insurance must include a listing of the States where that policy’s coverage is applicable; and (iii) This provision must not be applicable where prohibited or limited by Michigan law. (d) Employer’s Liability Insurance with the following minimum limits: $1,000,000 each accident $1,000,000 each employee by disease $1,000,000 aggregate disease 3.3 Liability Insurance: Liability insurance must be endorsed to list as additional insureds the Professional’s consultants and agents. Worker’s Compensation, Employer’s Liability Insurance and all other liability insurance policies must be endorsed to include a waiver of rights to recover from the Owner, Professional and the other additional insureds. The Contractor’s liability insurance must remain in effect through the Correction Period and through any special correction periods. For any employee of the Contractor who is resident of and hired in Michigan, the Contractor must have insurance for benefits payable under Michigan’s Worker’s Compensation Law. For any other employee protected by Worker’s Compensation Laws of any other state, the Contractor must have insurance or participate in a mandatory state fund, where applicable, to cover the benefits payable to any such employee. These requirements must not be construed to limit the liability of the Contractor or its insurers. The Owner does not represent that the specified coverage or limits of insurance are sufficient to protect the Contractor’s interests or liabilities. 00-10

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

3.4 Builder’s Risk Insurance: Unless indicated otherwise on the Bid Summary, the Owner will purchase and maintain property insurance for 100% of actual cash replacement value of the insurable Work while in the course of construction, including foundations, additions, attachments, and all fixtures, machinery and equipment belonging to and constituting a permanent part of the building structures. The property insurance also will cover temporary structures, materials and supplies to be used in completing the Work, only while on the building site premises or within five hundred feet of the site. The property insurance insures the interests of the Owner, Contractor and all Subcontractors and Suppliers at any tier as their interest may appear. The property insurance insures against “all risk” of physical loss or damage to the extent usually provided in policy forms of insurers authorized to transact this insurance in Michigan, but will be subject to a deductible of $10,000 for each loss occurrence. A copy of the master insurance policy will be kept at FBSA, for review by the Contractor and Subcontractors. The Contractor must cooperate with the Owner in determining the actual cash replacement value of any insured loss. Any deductible amount must be paid by the Contractor. The Owner may purchase and maintain for its benefit boiler and machinery insurance. 3.5 The Owner and Contractor intend that the required policies of property insurance must protect all the parties insured and provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered. Accordingly, to the extent that the insurance company pays claims, the Owner and the Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers waive all rights against each other for any such losses and damages and also waive all such rights against the Professional and all other persons named as insureds or additional insureds. 4.

Prosecutions; Substantial Completion:

4.1 The Contractor must not start the Work at the site before the first day established by the Notice to Proceed and/or before all insurance is in effect. A pre-construction conference will be held with the Contractor to review its Progress Schedule, qualifications of its key personnel, its proposed access to the site, traffic and parking, procedures for submittal, change orders, etc., and to exchange emergency contact information. The Contractor must use its accepted Progress Schedule when making proposals or claims for adjustment in Contract Time/Price. 4.2 Except in an Emergency, all Work at the site must take place during normal working hours; 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM, during Business Days and in accordance with the special working conditions for the Agency. If the Contract Documents allow work outside the normal hours, the Contractor must provide a written notice to the Owner twenty-four hours before performing such Work and must reimburse the Owner any related increase in the costs incurred by the Owner such as overtime charges of the Professional and payments for custodial and security personnel. 4.3 If, upon inspection and completing all pre-requisite testing of the Work, the Contractor considers that a portion of the work or all of the Work is substantially completed, it must provide a list of items to be corrected or completed to the Owner and the Professional for joint inspection. Within ten Calendar Days of this joint inspection, the Professional will deliver to the Owner and Contractor a list of incomplete/Defective work or a Certificate of Substantial Completion with a Punch List. The certificate must: (a) fix a reasonable date of Substantial Completion, (b) fix a date for completion of the Punch List, and (c) recommend the division of responsibilities between the Owner and Contractor for utilities, security, safety, insurance, maintenance, etc. Upon issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay for the completed Work subject to (a) withholding of two hundred percent of the value of any uncompleted Work, as determined by the Professional, and (b) any other deductions as the Professional may recommend or may withhold to cover Defective work, liquidated damages and the fair value of any other items entitling the Owner to a withholding. Prerequisites for Substantial Completion, over and above the extent of Work completion required, include (a) receipt by the Owner of operating and maintenance documentation, (b) all systems have been successfully tested and demonstrated by the Contractor for their intended use, and (c) the Owner having received all required certifications and/or occupancy approvals from the State and those Political Subdivisions having jurisdiction over the Work. Receipt of all certifications and/or occupancy approvals from those Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction in and of itself does not necessarily connote Substantial Completion. The Contractor must provide all related operating and maintenance (O&M) documentation to the Owner before training if training is required and not later than Substantial Completion otherwise. The Contractor must give the Owner the final O&M documentation (with revisions made after Substantial Completion) before the request for final payment. 4.4 The Owner may decide to use, at its sole option, any functioning portion of the Work and will inform the Contractor in writing of the decision. The portion of Work to be used must be jointly inspected to determine the extent of completion if it has not undergone the inspection for Substantial Completion. The Professional must prepare a list of items to be corrected/completed and the Owner will allow the Contractor reasonable access to correct/complete the listed items and finish other work.

00-11

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

5.

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Warranty; Tests, Inspections and Approvals; Corrections of Work:

5.1 Warranty: The Contractor must furnish the State with a written guarantee to remedy any defects due to faulty materials or labor which appear in the Work within one year from the date of final acceptance by the State. This warranty excludes defect or damage caused by (a) abuse, modification by others, insufficient or improper operation or maintenance, or (b) normal wear and tear under normal usage. Manufacturer warranties for materials and equipment received by the Contractor must be assigned and promptly delivered to the Owner at Substantial Completion. The warranties period starts from the date of the substantial completion and must be in full force and effect for the entire duration of the Correction Period. Roof Warranty: For roofing systems, the following warranties are required as minimum: (a) A two-year contractors warranty against any defects due to faulty materials or labor; (b) A fifteen-year manufacturer’s total system warranty; and (c) A twenty-year membrane/shingles/tiles warranty. 5.2 Tests, Inspections and Approvals: The Owner will perform or retain a professional/agency to perform inspections, tests or approvals for those materials required to meet quality control standards specified in the Contract Documents. However, the Contractor must assume full responsibility for any testing, inspection or approval (a) required to meet code requirements, as promulgated by code inspecting authorities; (b) required by Law; (c) indicated or required by the Contract Documents; (d) required for the Professional’s acceptance of a Supplier, materials or equipment or mix designs submitted for prior approval by the Contractor; or (e) Defective work, including an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs occasioned by discovery of Defective work. The Contractor must (a) pay all related costs; (b) schedule related activities; and (c) secure and furnish to the Professional the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor must provide proper and safe access to the site for inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor must provide the Professional a timely notice whenever any Work is ready for inspection, testing or approval. If the Contractor covers any Work without proper approval by the Professional as required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor must, at its own expense, uncover, expose or otherwise make available, when requested by the Professional or Owner, for testing, inspection or approval of the covered Work. 5.3 Correction of Work: If any testing, inspection or approval reveals Defective Work and the Work is rejected by the Professional, the Contractor, at its sole expense, must promptly, as directed, correct or remove the Defective Work from the site and replace it with non-Defective Work within the Correction Period. The Contractor must bear responsibility for its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from the correction and/or removal and replacement of Defective Work. If the Contractor, within reasonable and agreed upon time after receipt of written notice, (a) fails to correct Defective Work or remove and replace rejected Work, or (b) fails to correct or complete items on any Punch List, or (c) fails to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or (d) fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner, directly or through others, after seven Calendar Days from the date of the written notice to the Contractor, may correct and remedy the Defective Work. To the extent necessary to correct and remedy such Defective Work, the Owner must be allowed to exclude the Contractor from all or part of the site; take possession of all or part of the Work and stop related operations of the Contractor; take possession of the Contractor’s tools, plant and office and construction equipment at the site; and incorporate into the Work materials and equipment for which the Owner has paid the Contractor. The Contractor must allow the Owner and the Professional easy access to the site to correct such Defective Work. The Owner must be entitled to an appropriate decrease in Contract Price for all claims, costs, losses, damages and Delay incurred or sustained by the Owner which are attributable to the Contractor. Such costs may include, but not limited to, costs of correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work, costs of repair and replacement of other work destroyed or damaged by the action and related charges of the Professional. If the discovery of the Defective Work takes place after final payment and the Contractor fails to correct and pay the Owner any of these costs, the Owner must demand due performance under the Performance Bond. Until the period of limitation provided by Michigan Law, the Contractor must promptly, and upon receipt of written notice from the Owner, correct Defective Work. In the event of an Emergency or unacceptable risk of loss or damage or if appropriate under the circumstances, the Owner, directly or through others under contract with the Owner, may correct or remove and replace the Defective Work. The specified correction of Work requirements have no limitation on the rights of the Owner to have Defective Work corrected or removed and replaced, if rejected, except as otherwise provided by the Michigan Law. 5.4 Special Correction Period Requirements: Whenever the Owner undertakes any portion of the Work because the Contractor’s act or omission Delays completion of the Work or it is eligible for Partial Use, the warranties for all materials and equipment incorporated into that portion of the Work must remain in full force and effect between the start of such Partial Use and the date when the Correction Period starts. The Correction Period for any Defective Work that is corrected or rejected and replaced within the last three months of the Correction Period must be extended by an additional six months, starting on the date such Work was made non-Defective. 5.5 Special Maintenance Requirements: If the Contract Documents specify that the entire Work, or a portion of the Work, upon reaching Substantial Completion, must not be placed in use by the Owner, the Contractor must maintain the Work, or specified part of the Work, in good order and proper working condition and must take all other actions necessary for its protection between the certified date of Substantial Completion and the date when the Work, or designated part of the Work, is placed in 00-12

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

use. If no separate price for such special maintenance period was requested and made part of the Contract Documents, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to appropriately increase the Contract Price. 6.

Changes:

6.1 Changes in the Work: The Owner may, at any time, without notice to sureties, make any changes bilaterally or unilaterally, by a written Change Order, in the Work within the general scope of the Contract, including but not limited to changes in the Specifications, materials, or Contract Time. In a bilateral change order, the Owner may direct the Professional to prepare a Bulletin describing the change being considered. Upon receiving the Bulletin, the Contractor establishes the cost and returns it to the Professional for review within 15 calendar days. The Contractor’s proposal must be irrevocable for 60 Calendar Days after it is submitted to the Professional. If the Professional recommends acceptance of the Bulletin and the Owner agrees with the changes, the Owner issues a written bilateral Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Documents. However, the Owner may issue a unilateral Change Order if the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on the adjustment in Contract Price or Time. If the Contractor disagrees with such unilateral Contract Change Order, the Contractor must complete the Work and may deliver notice of a claim in accordance with the claim submittal process. 6.2 Differing Site Condition: The Owner does not warrant that any technical data, including the Project reference points, provided by the Owner is necessarily sufficient and complete for the purpose of selecting Means and Methods, initiating, maintaining and supervising safety precautions and programs or discharging any other obligation assumed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents. If different or unknown site conditions are discovered, the Contractor must notify the Owner in writing before the conditions are disturbed or before proceeding with the affected Work. Upon review, if the Owner decides to agree with the differing site conditions, with the Professional’s advice, the Owner may issue a written Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Price or Time through the Bulletin authorization process. If the Owner decides to disagree with the Contractor and the Contractor disagrees with the Owner’s decision, the Contractor must complete the Work and may deliver notice of a claim in accordance with the claim submittal process. No proposal or claim by the Contractor due to differing site conditions will be allowed (a) if the Contractor knew of their existence before submitting its Bid or if those conditions could have been discovered by any reasonable examinations for which the Contractor, as Bidder, was made responsible under the Bidding Requirements and/or (b) unless the Contractor’s notice is provided on a timely basis and gives the Owner adequate opportunity to investigate the asserted differing site conditions. 6.3 Responsibilities for Underground Utilities: The Contractor must comply with the 1974 PA 53, as amended, MCL 460.701 et seg., and all other Laws concerning Underground Utilities. Before performing site Work, all Underground Utilities, lines and cables (public and private) must be located and marked. The Contractor must notify MISS DIG to locate and mark utilities on properties that are not State properties. In addition, the Contractor must be responsible for immediately notifying the Owner of any contact with or damage to Underground Utilities, and for the safety, protection of and repairing any damage done to any Work, surface and subsurface facilities. If the Contractor encounters Underground Utilities that inaccurately located by the Contract Documents or not previously located/marked, which could not be reasonably have been seen, the Owner may issue a written Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Price or Time through the Bulletin authorization process. 6.4 Hazardous Material Conditions: If the Contractor encounters material reasonably believed to be Hazardous Material, which was not described in the Drawings and/or Specifications and was not generated or brought to the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall immediately stop all affected work, give written notice to the Owner of the conditions encountered, and take appropriate health and safety precautions in accordance with all federal, State and local laws. Upon receipt of the notice, the Owner will investigate the conditions and (a) may stop the Work and terminate the affected Work or the Contract for convenience; (b) may contract others to have the Hazardous Material removed or rendered harmless or; (c) issue a written Contract Change Order to amend the Contract Price/Time through the Bulletin authorization process. If the Hazardous Material is brought to site by the Contractor or as a result in whole or in part from any of its violation of any Law covering the use, handling, storage, disposal of, processing, transport and transfer or from any other act or omission within its control, the Contractor is responsible for the Delay and costs to clean up the site, remove and render harmless the Hazardous Material to the satisfaction of the Owner, State and all Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction. 6.5 Incidents with Archaeological Features: The Contractor must immediately notify the Owner in writing of any Archeological Feature deposits encountered at the site and must protect the deposits in a satisfactory manner. If the Contractor encounters such features, which result in an anticipated change to the Contract Price/Time, the Owner may issue a written Contract Change Order through the Bulletin authorization process. 6.6 Unit Price Work: Quantities as listed have been carefully estimated but are not guaranteed. The Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease the quantities of the Work to be performed at the Unit Price by amounts up to 20 percent of the listed estimated quantities. For Unit Price Work, the Contractor must promptly inform the Professional in writing if actual quantities differ from the estimated quantities for any item. For quantities over 120% or below 80% of the estimated quantity, the Owner may negotiate a Unit Price with the Contractor, or direct a unilateral change, or bid that Work under separate contract. Any adjusted Unit Price agreed upon by the Owner will only apply to the actual quantities above 120% or below 80% of the estimated quantity. No adjustment due to quantity variations must be allowed (a) unless the Contractor met the notice requirements, or (b) if any Unit Price increase results in whole or in part from any act or omission within the control of the Contractor (errors in the Contractor's Bid, unbalanced Unit Prices, etc.). If a dispute arise between the Owner and the 00-13

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Contractor on the adjusted Unit Price, the Contractor must carry on the Work with due diligence during the disputes/disagreements. 6.7 Cash Allowances; Provisionary Allowances: The Contractor must obtain the Professional’s and Project Director’s written acceptance before providing materials, equipment, or other items covered by Cash Allowance. Work authorized under any Provisionary Allowance may consist of (a) changes required by actual conditions, as determined by the Professional, and (b) any other Work authorized and completed under the pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents. 6.8

Changes in Contract Price:

6.8.1

The Contractor’s proposals or claims for Work Involved must detail all affected items of Work, whether increased, revised, added or deleted, and must be fully documented and itemized as to (a) individual adds and deducts in Work quantities and labor man-hours; (b) corresponding itemized cost of Work Involved; (c) materials and equipment cost including transportation, storage and suppliers’ field services; and (d) Fee.

6.8.2

For Contractor’s proposals or claims for adjustments in Contract Price arising from Delays, the Contractor’s estimates must be as comprehensive and detailed as may be appropriate to support the proposal or claim. Examples of related information include labor manpower levels, production data and Progress Schedule revision.

6.8.3

If the Contract Documents use lump sum or Unit Prices for the Work Involved, those prices must be used in estimating the price change. Otherwise, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed (a) on a negotiated lump sum; or (b) on an actual cost basis with or without a guaranteed maximum; or (c) through a unilateral Change Order on a lump sum basis or a not-toexceed basis, based on the Professional’s estimate of the anticipated Cost of the Work Involved and a fee. Items making-up the Cost of the Work Involved must be allowable to the extent (a) consistent with those prevailing in the Project locality, (b) necessary, reasonable and clearly allocable to the Work Involved, and (c) limited to labor costs, subcontract costs, material and equipment costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs.

6.8.4

In estimating any additional cost by the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the rates for the craft labor man-hour used in estimating changes in Contract Price must not exceed the rates in Means Cost Data (Means) or other cost guide acceptable to the Owner. If the rates exceed the acceptable cost guides, the Contractor must provide proper justifications acceptable to the Professional and the Owner. The payroll costs may be used to quote a Bulletin. However, the payroll costs must include wages, labor burdens and a factor for field supplies and purchase costs (less market values if not consumed) of tools not owned by the workers. Labor burdens must be certified by an authorized financial representative of the Contractor and may include social security, unemployment, taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, vacation and holiday pay. The factor for field supplies and tools (individually valued at less than $1,000.00) must not exceed 4% of the wages without burdens, unless detailed data, which supports higher costs, is provided. Rates for owned, rented or leased construction equipment must be in accordance with the contract price rates. Otherwise, the appropriate hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates listed in Means must be used. However, if the total rental or lease cost of an item to the Project exceeds the reasonable purchase price of the rented or leased item, the Owner reserves the right to pay only the purchase price of the item and take title to the item. Operating cost must not exceed the hourly operating rate in Means and for multiple shifts, rates must not exceed the shift work adjustments recommended in the cost guide.

6.8.5

The cost of any Work Involved may include necessary general conditions costs to the extent those costs increase or decrease on account of, or are directly attributable to, the performance of the furnishing and/or performance of the additional Work Involved, or are required due to an extension in Contract Times or Delays. Such costs may include payroll costs of personnel, temporary facilities at the site, liability insurance and bond premiums, Subcontractors, royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses and taxes on the Work Involved.

6.8.6

A contractor or subcontractor who performs the Work may charge a fee of up to 15% of the cost of Work involved for overhead and profit. Contractor may charge a mark-up fee of up to 5% of its Subcontractor’s cost excluding fees if the Work is performed by the Subcontractor. If Work is to be performed by lower tier subcontractor(s), intermediate subcontractors must share a fee of up to 5% of the lowest tier subcontractor’s cost excluding fees. The total mark-up fees for the Work must not exceed 25% of the lowest tier subcontractor’s cost excluding fees. If the adjustment to the Contract Price incorporates a contractor reservation of rights to claim additional adjustments, the fees must be reduced by one-third. Contractor’s administrative costs and home office overhead must be non-reimbursable expenses covered by the Fee for the Work.

6.9

Changes in Contract Time:

6.9.1 If a justified extension beyond the Contract Time is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances, the Owner may approve an extension to the Contract Time through the Bulletin authorization process at no additional cost to the Owner. Examples of events that may justify an extension in the Contract Time include acts of God; acts of the public enemy; fires; floods; and strikes. 6.9.2 If, at any time during the life of this Contract, the Contractor finds that for reasons beyond its control, it will be impossible to complete the Work on or before the Contract completion date, a written request for a change to the Contract extending the 00-14

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

time of completion must be submitted. Such a request must set forth in precise detail the reasons believed to justify an extension and must be in such format as the State may require. 6.9.3 When submitting a quotation for a Contract change authorization for extra work or change in plans, the Contractor must include as part of the quotation, a statement requesting any extra time necessary to complete the related Work. Lack of such a statement will serve as notification that the extra time will not be required to complete the Contract work and will waive the right to a later claim. The Owner will not pay additional compensation to the Contractor for performing Contract Work during any extension period granted. 6.9.4 If the Progress Schedule and the funding allow for an early completion date, the Contractor may submit to the Owner for approval, a request to shorten the Contract Time. If approved by the Owner, the new Contract Time applies to the Project and liquidated damages, if any, will be assessed for any delays after the new completion date. 6.10 Price Reduction for Defective Cost or Pricing Data: Whenever the Contractor signs a proposal for a change in the Contract or claim settlement, the Contractor will be deemed to have certified on behalf of itself, Subcontractors and Suppliers, to its best knowledge and belief that the proposal and its contents (a) were made in good faith and are consistent with the facts and the provisions of the Contract; and (b) are current, complete and accurate. If the Contract Price/Time is increased by any Change Order, claim or dispute settlement because the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier, at any tier, represented or furnished cost or pricing data of any kind that were false, contained math errors or were incomplete, the Contract Price must be correspondingly reduced by Change Order. If there is a good cause to doubt the Contractor’s compliance with the Defective cost and pricing data requirements, the Owner must be entitled to make an appropriate withholding from any payment otherwise owed to the Contractor. 7.

Payments

7.1

Schedule of Values: The Schedule of Values must be approved by the Professional and accepted by the Owner and must divide the Work into pay items for significant Sections and areas, facilities or structures, with subtotals for first tier Subcontractors. If required in Division 1, the accepted Schedule of Values must be supported by a more detailed breakdown allocating the pay items to the Progress Schedule Activities. It must tabulate labor costs, Subcontract costs and material and equipment costs. Labor costs must include appropriate sums for construction equipment costs, general conditions costs, administrative costs and profit, unless separate pay items are itemized for those costs. The Schedule of Values must include two percent of the Contract Price for each of the following close-out pay items: (a) fire safety inspection, certificate of occupancy and other code approvals, as specified in the Contract Documents, (b) manufacturer warranties, finalized operating and maintenance documentation, Owner training documentation, and test and balance reports, and (c) finalized asbuilt/Record Documents.

7.2

Requests for Payment: Not more than once every thirty Calendar Days, the Contractor may submit to the Professional a Request for Payment on the Owner’s form signed by the Contractor certifying Work completed and enclosing all supporting documentation. A draft copy of the payment request may be submitted to the Owner Field Representative for review and comments. For projects under $50,000, the Contractor may not submit more than two requests in addition to the final payment request. Each Request for Payment must certify that all monies owed by the Contractor to Subcontractors and Suppliers for which payment previously has been sought has been paid from payments received. No Request for Payment must include amounts for a Subcontractor or Supplier if the Contractor does not intend to use the payments requested, when received, to reduce the Contractor’s outstanding obligations on the Work. The Owner will pay the Contractor within thirty Calendar Days after the Owner receives and approves a certified Request for Payment from the Professional. The Contractor will provide a certification in writing that the payment request submittal is true and accurate. If payment is requested based on materials and equipment stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Request for Payment also must be accompanied by (a) consent of surety, (b) a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that the Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect them and the Owner's interests. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Request for Payment, whether incorporated in the Work or not, will pass to the Owner free and clear of all liens no later than at the time of payment by the Owner to the Contractor.

7.3

Review of Request for Payment; Intent of Review: Within ten Calendar Days after receipt of a Request for Payment, the Professional must certify to the Owner the amount the Professional determines to be due, or must return the Request for Payment to the Contractor indicating the reasons for withholding certification. The Professional's certification of any Request for Payment constitutes a representation to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that to the best of the Professional's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents; and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. In the case of final payment, the Professional's certification of final payment and recommendation that the Work is acceptable must be a further representation that conditions governing final payment to the Contractor have been met.

7.4

Refusal to Make or to Recommend Payment: The Owner may withhold from any payment an amount based on the (a) Professional's refusal to recommend payment or (b) Owner's estimate of the fair value of items included in the payment request. The Owner will give the Contractor reasonably prompt written notice supporting such action. The Professional may refuse to recommend any part of any payment, or because of subsequently discovered evidence, inspections or tests or the 00-15

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

value of the Punch List, nullify all or any portion of any payment previously recommended, as the Professional may consider necessary to protect the Owner from loss because: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

the Work is Defective or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Order, it has been necessary that the Owner correct Defective Work or complete Work, reasonable evidence exists that all or a part of the Work will not be completed within the corresponding Contract Time, the Contractor failed to comply with any material requirements of the Contract, including, but not limited to the failure to submit Progress Schedule Submittals or as-built/Record Documents when due, (f) stored materials for which payment has been made or is sought has been determined by the Professional or the Owner Field Representative to be damaged or missing, or (g) the Professional reasonably believes or knows of the occurrence of an event justifying termination for cause.

7.5

Request for Final Inspection: The Contractor must complete the Substantial Completion Punch List within the Contract Time and date. The Contractor must assemble all required documentation before requesting final inspection in writing. The Contractor may request final inspection of the entire Work, or the part of the Work for which final payment is specified in the Contract Documents. Upon this written notice, and if deemed appropriate by the professional, the Professional will make a final completion inspection with the Owner and Contractor and notify the Contractor of all incomplete or Defective Work revealed by the Final Inspection. The Contractor must immediately correct and complete the Work.

7.6

Close-out Documents: The Contractor must prepare and submit the following documentation before requesting final inspection or final payment: final operating and maintenance documentation (with revisions made after Substantial Completion), warranties, inspection certificates, as-built/Record Documents, release of payment claim forms, and all other required documents.

7.7

Request for Final Payment: The Contractor may request final payment after correcting or completing the Work to the satisfaction of the Professional and delivering close-out documentation (7.6). The Contractor’s request for final payment must also enclose: (a) evidence of completed operations insurance and an affidavit certifying that the insurance coverage will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused, (b) an affidavit certifying that the surety agrees that final payment does not relieve the surety of any of its obligations under the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, (c) a completed DTMB-0460 Form close out checklist, (d) a list of all pending insurance claims rising out of or resulting from the Work being handled by the Contractor and/or its insurer (e) Contractor’s ‘Guarantee and Statement’ (DTMB-0437) containing a statement of guaranteed indebtedness acceptable to the Owner in the full amount of the Contract Price, or a release of payment claims in the form of a release of liens, or a Bond or other security acceptable to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any payment claim.

7.8

Final Payment and Acceptance: If the Professional is satisfied that the entire Work, or the part of the Work for which final payment is specified in the Contract Documents, is complete and the Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents has been fulfilled, the Professional will furnish to the Owner and Contractor the Professional’s certification of final payment and acceptance within thirty Calendar Days after receipt of the final payment request. If the Professional is not satisfied, the Professional will return the request to the Contractor indicating in writing the reasons for not certifying final payment. If the final payment request is returned, the Contractor must correct the deficiencies and re-request final payment. If the Owner concurs with the Professional’s certification of final payment the Owner will, within thirty Calendar Days after receipt of the Professional’s certification of final payment, pay the balance of the Contract Price subject to those provisions governing final payment specified in the Contract Documents. If the Owner does not concur with the Professional’s determination, the Owner will return the request for final payment to the Contractor with written reasons for refusing final payment and acceptance.

7.9

Contractor's Continuing Obligation: The following does not constitute acceptance of the Work in the event the Work or any Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, and therefore does not release the Contractor from its obligation to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)

a certification by the Professional of any Request for Payment or final payment; the issuance of a Substantial Completion certificate; any payment by the Owner to the Contractor; any Partial Use; any act of acceptance by the Owner or any failure to do so; any review and approval of a Shop Drawing, sample, test procedure or other Submittal; any review of a Progress Schedule; any On-Site Inspection; any inspection, test or approval; any issuance of a notice of acceptability by the Professional; or any correction of Defective Work or any completion of Work by the Owner. 00-16

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

7.10 Waiver of Claims: The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any rights as to the Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents, nor will it constitute a waiver of any claims by the Owner against the Contractor still unsettled, or arising from unsettled payment claims, Defective Work appearing after final inspection or failure by the Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special warranties provided by the Contract Documents or by Law. The acceptance of final payment will constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor against the Owner, other than those claims previously made in writing, on a timely basis. 8.

Other Work: During the Contract Time, the Owner may self perform or Contract for other work at the site. By doing so, the Owner or its representative will coordinate the operations of the Contractor and the other work. Whenever the other work interfaces with the Contractor’s Work on site, the Contractor must coordinate its activities with the interfacing work, inspect the other work and promptly report to the Professional in writing if the other work is unavailable or unsuitable. The Contractor’s failure to do so will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with the Work except for latent or non-apparent defects and deficiencies in the other work. The Contractor must provide proper and safe access to the site for handling, unloading and storage of their materials and equipment and for the execution of the other work. The Contractor must do all cutting, fitting, patching and interfacing of the Work that may be required to make any part of the Work come together properly and integrate with other work. If the Contractor becomes party to a dispute or claim due to damages caused to its Work/property or other work/their property, the Contractor must promptly attempt, without involving the Owner or the Professional or their agents, to settle with the other party by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim. If the Owner determines that the other work resulted in a delay to the Work to be performed by the Contractor and such delay justifies a Change Order, the Owner will authorize the necessary adjustment in Contract Price and/or Time.

9.

Stop Work Orders and Suspension of Work: The Owner may order the Contractor in writing to defer, stop, suspend or interrupt all or part of the Work, in the event any of the following situations: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

any Work is Defective, any Work, when completed, will not conform to the Contract Documents, any materials or equipment are unsuitable, any workers are insufficiently skilled, failure of the Contractor to implement appropriate measures for the SESC, or as the Owner may determine appropriate for its convenience. The Contractor is responsible for the Delays and any additional costs if at fault. Any justified increase in Contract Price/Time due to suspension of Work must be submitted within thirty Calendar Days of knowing the extent of Delays and before submitting the final payment.

10. Termination: 10.1 Termination for Breach: The Owner may elect to terminate all or any part of the Work if: (a) the Contractor fails to complete the Work, or a specified part of the Work, within the corresponding Contract Time; fails or refuses to supply sufficient management, supervision, workers, materials or equipment; or otherwise fails to prosecute the Work, or any specified part of the Work, with the diligence required to comply with the Contract Time(s); (b) the Contractor persistently disregards the authority of the Professional or violates or disregards a provision of the Contract Documents or the Laws of any Political Subdivision with jurisdiction; (c) the Contractor admits in writing, or the Owner otherwise establishes, the Contractor's inability or refusal to pay the Contractor's debts generally as they become due; (d) in response to the Owner's demand, the Contractor fails to provide adequate, written assurance that the Contractor has the financial resources necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Time; (e) the Contractor fails to comply with the Michigan Residency requirements (1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1241a); or is found to be in violation of Section 4 of 1980 PA 278 concerning unfair labor practices, or any nondiscrimination requirements imposed by Law; (f) at any time, the Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier is in violation of unfair labor practices prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 327 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. 158; or (g) the Contractor violates or breaches any material provision of the Contract Documents, which provides contractually for cause termination or rescission of the Contract or of the Contractor’s right to complete the Work. Within seven Calendar Days after the Contractor receives a notice requiring assurance of due performance for any of the above occurring non-conformances, the Contractor must meet with the Owner and present the Contractor’s plan to correct the problems. If the Owner determines that the Contractor’s plan provides adequate assurance of correction, that determination does not waive the Owner's right to subsequently default the Contractor or affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor and/or surety then existing or that may accrue in the future. The Owner, after giving the Contractor and surety seven Calendar Days’ written notice of intent to default, may declare the Contractor in default and terminate the services of the Contractor for cause. Unless otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor, at the expiration of the SevenCalendar Day (intent to default) period, the Contractor must immediately stop all Work and proceed in accordance with the Owner’s instructions. Following the expiration of the Seven-Calendar Day (intent to default) notice, the Contractor will be sent a default letter – notice of termination for cause. The Owner will issue a Contract Change Order to revise the name of the contract party to the name of the surety company. The surety company must undertake to perform and complete the 00-17

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, in place of the Contractor, either through the surety's agents or by executing agreements with qualified contractors (excluding the Contractor and any of the Contractor's affiliates), or both. The Owner may issue a fifteen-Calendar Day notice of intent to default the surety company if they fail to execute in a timely manner the completion of the Contract Work. Without an adequate plan of correction, the Owner may issue a notice of termination for cause letter to the surety. If a termination of the contract with the surety occurs, the Owner reserves the right to complete the Work. If the Owner has terminated the Contractor, any such termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor or surety, or both, then existing or that may accrue after termination. All provisions of the Contract Documents that, by their nature, survive final acceptance of the Work must remain in full force and effect after a termination for cause of the Contractor or default of the surety, or both. The Owner may, in its sole discretion, permit the Contractor to continue to perform Work when the Contractor is in default or has been defaulted. Such decision by the Owner in no way operates as a waiver of any of the Owner's rights under the Contract Documents or Performance Bond, nor in the event of a subsequent default, entitle the Contractor or surety to continue to perform or prosecute the Work to completion. 10.2 Termination on Non-Bonded Project: For non-bonded projects, the Owner will follow the termination protocol in Paragraph 10.1 without involving a surety. 10.3 Termination for Convenience of the Owner: Upon fifteen Calendar Days' written notice to the Contractor and surety, or sooner if reasonable under the circumstances, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, elect to terminate any part of the Work, or the Contract in whole or in part, as the Owner may deem appropriate for its convenience. Upon receipt of any such termination notice, the Contractor must immediately proceed in accordance with any specific instructions, protect and maintain the Work, and make reasonable and diligent efforts to mitigate costs associated with the termination. In such termination, the Contractor must be paid in accordance with the terms of this Contract for only services rendered before the effective date of termination. Upon termination for convenience, the Contractor must be released from any obligation to provide further services and the Owner must have full power and authority to take possession of the Work, assume any agreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers that the Owner selects, and prosecute the Work to completion by Contract or as the Owner may deem expedient. 10.4 Termination for Lack of Funding: If expected or actual funding is withdrawn, reduced or limited in any way before the completion date set forth in this Contract or in any amendment, the State may, upon written notice to the Contractor, terminate this Contract in whole or in part in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. 11.

Disputes: All claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents must be submitted in writing to the Professional and otherwise processed and resolved as provided in this Article. The Contractor must carry on the Work with due diligence during all disputes or disagreements. Work must not be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements. The Contractor must exercise reasonable precautions, efforts and measures to avoid situations that would cause delay.

11.1 Notice of Claim: Except for Owner claims for liquidated damages, no claim is valid unless it is based upon written notice delivered by the claimant to the other party promptly, but in no event later than thirty Calendar Days after the Professional's or Project Director’s determination giving rise to the claim. The notice must state the nature of the dispute, the amount involved, if any, and the remedy sought. The claim submittal with all supporting data must be delivered within sixty Calendar Days after the determination giving rise to the claim (unless the Professional allows an extension). The responsibility to substantiate claims rests with the claimant. A claim by the Contractor must be submitted to the Professional and Project Director for a recommendation or decision from the Professional. A claim by the Owner must be submitted to the Contractor and the Professional for a written recommendation or decision by the Professional. The Owner reserves the right to audit any Contractor claim (or claim package) that the Contractor values at more than $50,000.00. Pending final resolution of any claim under this Article, the Contractor must proceed diligently with the Work and comply with any decision of the Owner and/or Professional. For all Contractor claims seeking an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor must submit an affidavit, certifying that the amount claimed accurately reflects any Delay and all costs that the Contractor is entitled from the occurrence of the claimed event and that supporting cost and pricing data are current, accurate, complete and represent the Contractor's best knowledge and belief. The affidavit must be signed in the same manner as required in Item 6 of Section 00100. 11.2 Recommendations or Decisions from the Professional: For claims under $100,000.00, if requested in writing by the Contractor, the Professional will render a recommendation or decision within thirty Calendar Days after the request and the Owner will issue, if necessary, a determination within thirty Calendar Days after the Professional's recommendation or decision. For claims exceeding $100,000.00, the Professional will issue its recommendation or decision and the Owner, if necessary, will issue its determination, within sixty Calendar Days. If the Professional denies a Contractor claim or agrees with an Owner claim, that decision must be final and binding on the Contractor, without any determination by the Owner, unless the Contractor files a request for a presentation with the DirectorFBSA within thirty Calendar Days. To the extent that any recommendation from the Professional is partly or wholly adverse to a claim from the Owner, that determination must be final and binding on both the Owner and Contractor unless either party files a request for a presentation with the Director-FBSA within thirty Calendar Days. If the Professional recommends 00-18

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

payment of any Contractor claim which increases the Contract Price, that recommendation is subject to the Owner’s written approval. In the event any such determination from the Owner is partly or wholly adverse to the preceding recommendation from the Professional, that determination must be final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor files suit in the Michigan Court of Claims within thirty Calendar Days after receipt of such determination. The claim is waived if not made in accordance with these requirements. If either the Contractor or Owner is not satisfied with any decision of the Professional on a claim, that party must, within thirty Calendar Days of receiving that decision, file a written appeal with complete supporting documentation with the DirectorFBSA.. The Director-FBSA has discretion concerning the allowability of evidence submitted, and is not bound to any rules of evidence. If the right to a presentation is waived or if a presentation is conducted and the dispute remains unresolved, the Director-FBSA, at the Director-FBSA’s sole option, must specify in which forum the dispute must be conducted by issuing a written determination to the Contractor that the dispute if the Contractor so elects, be submitted in writing to the Michigan Court of Claims. The Director-FBSA’s determination on the dispute is final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor files a lawful action in the Michigan Court of Claims within thirty Calendar Days after receiving the Director-FBSA’s determination. After settlement or final adjudication of any claim, if payment by the Contractor is not made to the Owner, the Owner may offset the appropriate amounts against (a) payments due to the Contractor under any other Contract between the Owner and the Contractor, or (b) any amounts for which the Owner may be obligated to the Contractor in any capacity. The Director-FBSA may designate someone to fulfill the Director-FBSA’s duties under these terms and conditions.

END OF SECTION 00700 SECTION 00750 SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS 1.

The Work is for the Department of Military and Veterans Affairs and their special working conditions are included in Appendix II. Contractor must comply with all security regulations. Access to and egress from the buildings and State Agency grounds must be via routes specifically designated by the State Agency. Whenever the Contractor has caused an operating security or fire system to go out of service, or left unsecured openings in existing facilities or security fences, the Contractor must furnish a security guard or fire watch acceptable to the Owner to maintain security of the facility outside of normal working hours and will be held responsible for any losses from the facility.

2.

The Contractor must maintain at all times dust control measures to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION 00750 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1. The following conditions must supplement the general conditions: SC – 1.3:

Delete paragraph 1.3 Section 00700 General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: “If drawings and specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, estimate on and furnish the greater quantity or better quality unless otherwise instructed by the Architect”.

SC- 5.2 (f)

Add the following paragraph to paragraph 5.2 (f) of Section 00700 General Conditions: (f) “Unless the Professional determines that the additional resubmissions are reasonable under the circumstances, all costs for the Professional review of a submittal after the first resubmission of that submittal shall be paid by the Contractor directly to the Architect/Engineer.”

END OF SECTION 00800

00-19

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 00850 WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE The Contractor and all Subcontractors must comply with all Laws pertaining to occupational classifications and to the following requirements: 1.

The rates of wages and fringe benefits to be paid to each class of construction mechanics must not be less than the wage and fringe benefit rates issued by the Michigan Department of Licensing and Regulatory Affairs (DLARA), Wage and Hour Division in its schedule of occupational classification and wage and fringe benefit for the locality in which the Work is to be performed. These prevailing wage rates are included in Appendix IV.

2.

The Contractor must keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates as prescribed in the Contract and the address and telephone number of the DLARA’s, Wage and Hour Division office responsible for enforcing these provisions, and must keep an accurate record showing the name and classification of each Person performing Work on the site, the dates on which Work was performed, the hours each Person worked on the site and the actual hourly wage and benefits paid to each Person. This record must be notarized by a Notary Public and must be available to DTMB-FBSA and DLARA for an audit or inspection, at any time, upon their request. In addition, as per section 6.10 of this Document, the Contractor must have available to DTMB and DLARA, certified payroll of those working on the project.

3.

If any trade is omitted from the schedule of wages and fringe benefit rates included in Appendix IV, the trades omitted must also be paid not less than the wage and fringe benefit rates prevailing in the locality in which the Work is to be performed.

4.

The Contractor must keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, notice that construction mechanics, as the intended beneficiaries of 1965 PA 166, as amended, who have not been paid in accordance with the Act may file a claim with the LARA.

A finding by the DLARA that the Contractor or any Subcontractor is in violation of these requirements is final.

END OF SECTION 00850 SECTION 00900 ADDENDA 1. Each Bid submittal must include acknowledgement of receipt and review of all Addenda issued during the Bidding period.

END OF SECTION 00900

00-20

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.

General 1.1 General information covering the "Scope of Work" is specified on the Invitation to Bid. Additional information is as follows: (a). Refer to bid summary 1.2 The Agency will provide the following Work: (a) State Salvage: The State reserves the right to salvage certain items and equipment and those salvaged items will be identified to the Bidder at the time of their inspection of the proposed Work. The State will remove salvaged items before commencement of the Work. (b) Moving Furnishings and Equipment: The Contractor must give timely notice to the State Agency representative identified in the pre-construction meeting of all furnishings, window covering and movable equipment that will interfere with the Work or which the Contractor cannot protect with coverings of paper, plastic, drop cloths or clean tarpaulin. The Contractor must furnish, install, maintain and remove all coverings used to protect furnishings, window coverings and movable equipment.

END OF SECTION 01010 SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES 1.

Allowances 1.1 Provisional/Contingency Allowances: (a) Bidders must include in their Base Proposal Sum a contingency allowance of $45,000The base bid shall include bonds and insurance on the value of the allowance. (b) Monies will be used in the contingency allowance only if directed in writing by the Project Director and Professional. (c) Payments under a Provisionary Allowance will include not only the purchase/furnished cost of the materials and equipment involved, but also all related labor costs, subcontract costs, construction equipment costs, general conditions costs and Fee, provided they are calculated in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. (c ) Unused allowances will be deducted from the contract amount through contract change order.

END OF SECTION 01020 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.

Schedule of Values: If required, before the construction start date, the Contractor must submit a Schedule of Values to the Professional for review and approval, of the various tasks that must be performed to complete all the Work. The schedule must show each task and the corresponding value of the task, including separate monies allocated for General Condition items and Project close-out. The aggregate total value for all tasks must be equal to the total Contract sum.

END OF SECTION 01025 SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES 1.

Use of Alternates: Determination of the lowest three Bidders shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and any additive and deductive Alternates the Owner accepts, in the order in which they are listed only. The Owner will accept an Alternate only if all other previously listed Alternates are also accepted, unless acceptance by the Owner of Alternates in a different order does not affect determination of the lowest three bidders in any way.

2.

Execution: (a) Coordinate pertinent related Work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the Project for each alternate. (b) Description of Alternates: Alternate No. 1: None

END OF SECTION 01030 01-1

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 01040 COORDINATION 1.

Project Coordination: (a) Before beginning Work the Contractor must coordinate with the State Agency representative to implement the schedule for the Project. Once the Project is started, it must be carried to completion without delay.(b)Any building utility service interruptions or outages including security required by the Contractor in performing the Work must be prearranged with the staff of the State Agency and must occur only during those scheduled times.(c) The Contractor is not responsible for removing room furnishings unless is required by the Contract Documents. 2.

Cutting and Patching:

(a) The Contractor must do all cutting, fitting or patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly or make new Work join with the existing structure. The Contractor must take proper precautions so as not to endanger any existing Work. The Contractor must not cut or alter existing structural members or foundations unless specifically required by the Contract Documents. (b) Holes or openings cut in exterior walls and roofs for installation of materials or equipment must be waterproofed by appropriate, approved materials and methods. (c) All adjacent finished surfaces that are damaged by the new Work must be patched with materials matching existing surfaces. Joints between patched and existing material must be straight, smooth and flush. Workers skilled in its installation must apply all patching material.

END OF SECTION 01040 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 1.

When applicable, the Contractor must employ a surveyor who must establish and maintain all lines and levels required for laying out and constructing the Work. The Contractor agrees to assume all responsibility due to inaccuracy of any Work of the surveyor, and including incorrect bench marks, their loss or disturbance. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor must submit two copies of site layout Drawings prepared for the Project and certified by the surveyor.

END OF SECTION 01050 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.

Laws: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with all Federal, State and local Laws applicable to the Work and site.

2.

Codes: All Works must be provided in accordance with the State Construction Code Act, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seg,, International Building and Residential Codes and all applicable Michigan construction codes and fire safety including but not limited to: Michigan Building Code, Michigan Residential Code, Michigan Uniform Energy Code, Michigan Electrical Code, Michigan Rehabilitation Code for Existing Buildings, Michigan Mechanical Code, Michigan Elevator Code and Michigan Plumbing Code. If the Contractor observes that any Contract Document conflicts with any Laws or the State Construction Code or any permits in any respect, the Contractor must promptly notify the Professional in writing. If the Contractor provides any Work knowing or having to reason to know of such conflict, the Contractor must be responsible for that performance.

3.

Permits: All required construction permits must be secured and their fees including inspection costs must be paid by the Contractor. The time incurred by the Contractor in obtaining construction permits must constitute time required to complete the Work and does not justify any increases to the Contract Time or Price, except when revisions to the Drawings and/or Specifications required by the permitting authority cause the Delays. The Contractor must pay all charges of Public Utilities for connections to the Work, unless otherwise provided by Cash Allowances specific to those connections. The following permit fees will be paid by the Owner

4.

Section 01060 Regulatory Requirements item 3, A no-fee permit is required from the Grayling Fire Department. A final fire inspection, including a fire alarm test, will be required for occupancy.

5.

Taxes: The Contractor must pay all Michigan sales and use taxes and any other similar taxes covering the Work that are currently imposed by legislative enactment and as administered by the Michigan Department of Treasury, Revenue Division. If the Contractor is not required to pay or bear the burden or obtains a refund of any taxes deemed to have been included in the Bid and Contract Price, the Contract Price must be reduced by a like amount and that amount, whether as a refund or otherwise, must ensure solely to the benefit of the State of Michigan.

01-2

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

6.

Safety and Protection: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with all applicable Federal, State and local Laws governing the safety and protection of persons or property, including, but not limited to the Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act (MIOSHA), 1974 PA 154, as amended, MCL 408.1001 et seg., and all rules promulgated under the Act. The Contractor is responsible for all damages, injury or loss to the Work, materials, equipment, fines, penalties as a result of any violation of such Laws, except when it’s due to the fault of the Drawings or Specifications or to the Act, error or omission of the Owner or Professional. The Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs and such responsibility must continue until such time as the Professional is satisfied that the Work, or Work inspected, is completed and ready for final payment. In doing the Work and/or in the event of using explosives, the Contractor must take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and must erect and maintain all necessary safeguards and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) all employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work, (b) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, whether stored on or off the site, and (c) other property at or adjacent to the site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement. In the event of severe weather, the Contractor must inspect the Work and the site and take all reasonably necessary actions and precautions to protect the Work and ensure that public access and safety are maintained.

7.

Fire Hazard Conditions: (a). The fire hazard classification of finish materials where used in the specification must be in accordance with the current Michigan Building Code. (b) Classification must be determined by tunnel test in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-255), American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM E-84) or Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL-723).

8.

Michigan Right-To-Know Law: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with MIOSHA, Michigan Rightto-Know Law (Public Act 80 of 1986) and the rules promulgated under it. The Act places certain requirements on employers to develop a communication program designed to safeguard the handling of hazardous chemicals through labeling of chemical containers and development and availability of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and to provide training for employees who work with these chemicals and develop a written hazard communications program. The Act also provides for specific employee rights, including the right to be notified of the location of MSDS and to be notified at the site of new or revised MSDS within five Business Days after receipt and to request MSDS copies from their employers. The Contractor, employer or Subcontractor must post and update these notices at the site.

9.

Environmental Requirements: The Contractor and its Subcontractors/Suppliers must comply with all applicable Federal, State and local environmental Laws, standards, orders or requirements including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, as amended, Michigan Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, P.A. 451 of 1994, as amended, the Clean Air Act, as amended, the Clean Water Act, as amended, the Safe Drinking Water Act, as amended, Pollution Prevention Act, as amended, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, as amended, National Historic Preservation Act, as amended and Energy Policy and Conservation Act and Energy Standards for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-1999.

10.

Nondiscrimination: For all State Contracts for goods or services in amount of $5,000 or more, or for Contracts entered into with parties employing three or more employees; in connection with the performance of Work under this Contract, the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers must comply with the following requirements:

10.1

Not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex, height, weight or marital status and take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and the employees are not subject to such discrimination. Such action must include, but is not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training.

10.2

To state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex, height, weight or marital status.

10.3

To send, or have its collective bargaining representative send, each labor union or representative of workers with which there is a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor unions or workers' representative of the commitments under this provision.

10.4

To comply with the Elliot-Larsen Civil Rights Act, 1976 PA 453, as amended , MCL 37.2201 et seq.; the Michigan Persons With Disability Civil Rights Act, 1976 PA 220, as amended, MCL 37.1101 et Seq.; and all published rules, regulations, directives, and orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission (MCRC) which may be in effect on or before the date of Bid opening.

10.5

The Contractor must furnish and file compliance reports within the times, and using the forms prescribed by the MCRC. Compliance report forms may also elicit information as to the practices, policies, programs, and employment statistics of the Contractor and Subcontractors. The Contractor must permit access to Records by the MCRC and its agent for purposes of ascertaining compliance with the Contract and with rules, regulations, and orders of the MCRC.

01-3

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

10.6

If, after a hearing held under its rules, the MCRC finds that the Contractor has not complied with the nondiscrimination requirements of the Contract Documents, MCRC may, as part of its order, certify its findings to the Administrative Board of the State of Michigan, which may order the cancellation of the Contract and/or declare the Contractor ineligible for future contracts with the State until the Contractor complies with the MCRC’s order.

11.

Michigan Residency for Employees: Fifty percent of the persons employed on the Work by the Contractor must have been residents of the State of Michigan for not less than one year before beginning employment on the Work. This residency requirement may be reduced or waived to the extent that Michigan residents are not available or to the extent necessary to comply with the federal funds used for the Project. This requirement does not apply to employers who are signatories to collective bargaining agreements that allow for the portability of employees on an interstate basis.

END OF SECTION 01060 SECTION 01090 REFERENCES 1.

References will be made in an abbreviated alpha numeric form to specific standard specifications, reference publications and building codes of federal or state agencies, manufacturers, associations or trade organizations. Such references will be identified by the alphabetic abbreviation which identifies the government agency, the association or organization followed by the rule, section or detail number that are to form a part of these specifications, the same as if fully set forth herein, and must be of latest issued date in effect three months before the Bid opening date shown on the Proposal and Contract. The abbreviations used are referred to as follows: Abbreviation ACI AISC AMCA ANSI ASHRAE ASME ASSE ASTM AWS AWWA BOCA CDA CLFMI CISPI CRSI CS F/M FS HEW MDOT NFPA NSF NSWMA PCA PDI SMACNA UL USBM USDC

Agency, Association or Organization American Concrete Institute American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Air Moving and Conditioning Association American National Standards Institute, Inc. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Sanitary Engineering American Society of Testing and Materials American Welding Society American Water Works Association Building Officials and Code Copper Development Assn., Inc. Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Commercial Standard Factory Mutual Research Corporation Federal Specifications United States Department of Health Education and Welfare Michigan Department of Transportation National Fire Protection Association National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratory, Inc. National Solid Waste Management Association Portland Cement Association Plumbing and Drainage Institute Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. United States Bureau of Mines United States Department of Commerce

END OF SECTION 01090 SECTION 01100 PROJECT PROCEDURES 1.

Signage and Safety: The Contractor must post appropriate construction signs to advise the occupants and visitors of occupied facilities of the limits of construction work areas, hardhat areas, excavations, construction parking and staging areas, etc. Advertising signage by contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers is not allowed. The Contractor must maintain safe and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking lots, hospitals, fire and police stations and like establishments. The Contractor must obtain written approval from the Owner ten Calendar Days before connecting to existing facilities or interrupting the services on site.

01-4

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

2.

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Barrier and Enclosures: (a) The Contractor must furnish, install and maintain as long as necessary and remove when no longer required adequate barriers, warning signs or lights at all dangerous points throughout the Work for protection of property, workers and the public. The Contractor must hold the State of Michigan harmless from damage or claims arising out of any injury or damage that may be sustained by any person or persons as a result of the Work under the Contract.

END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.

Pre-Construction Conferences: The Project Director will schedule a pre-construction conference to be attended by the Professional, State Agency staff, and the Contractors. A project procedure as outlined in Form DTMB-0460, will be established for the Work during the pre-construction meeting. When no organizational meeting is called, the Contractor, before beginning any Work, must meet with the staff of the Agency and arrange a Work schedule for the Project. Once the Project has been started, the Contractor must carry it to completion without delay.

2.

Progress Meetings: The Professional will schedule progress meetings to be held on the job site whenever needed to supply information necessary to prevent job interruptions, to observe the Work or to inspect completed Work. The Contractor must be represented at each progress meeting by persons with full authority to act for the Contractor in regard to all portions of the Work.

END OF SECTION 01200 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 1.

Shop Drawings, Samples and Technical Submittals: .

1.1 Contractor’s Review: Before each submission, the Contractor must: (a) determine and verify all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, instructions for installation and handling of equipment and systems, installation requirements (including location, dimensions, access, fit, completeness, etc.), materials, color, catalog numbers and other similar data as to correctness and completeness, and (b) have reviewed and coordinated that technical Submittal with other technical submittals and the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 Notice of Variation: The Contractor must give the Professional specific written notice of any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.3 Contractor’s Approval: The Contractor shall not submit unapproved submittals. Each submittal shall be stamped/certified to indicate that the submittal satisfies the requirements of the Contract Documents before submission to the Professional. 1.4 Responsibility and Authority: Neither the Owner’s authority to review any of the Submittals by the Contractor, nor the Owner’s decision to raise or not to raise any objections about the Submittals, creates or imposes any duty or responsibility on the Owner to exercise any such authority or decision for the benefit of the Contractor/Subcontractor/Supplier, any surety to any of them or any other third party. The Contractor is not relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings, product data, samples, or similar submittals just because the Professional approved them. 1.5 Final As-Built/Record Documents and Submittals: The approved Submittals are a part of the final As-Built/Record Documents required for processing final payment to the Contractor. 1.6 Submissions: Contractor must submit to the Professional: (a) PDF Files of all Product Data and Shop Drawings; (b) A 3-inch wide by 2-inch high clear space for State approval stamp must be provided on the Title Sheet of the shop drawings; (c) all required samples; and (d) all other technical submittals (test, results, test and safety procedures, O&M manuals, etc.) that are required by the Contract Documents 1.7 Professional’s Review and Return: Submittals will be returned to the Contractor within fifteen Calendar Days. The Contractor is responsible for any time Delay and any cost incurred by the Professional, Contractor or Subcontractors/Suppliers as a result of resubmissions and re-reviews of a particular Submittal. The Contractor shall revise and correct submittals returned for revision and resubmittal until approval by the Professional is achieved. Time consumed by resubmissions and reviews of a particular submittal 01-5

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

2.

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Progress Schedule: Upon request, the Contractor must submit an electronic copy in PDF format of the Progress Schedule for the Professional and Owner review. The Progress Schedule Submittals are intended to show: (a) the priority and sequencing by which the Contractor intends to execute the Work (or Work remaining) to comply with Contract Times, those sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents; (b) how the Contractor anticipates foreseeable events, site conditions and all other general, local and prevailing conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, schedule, performance and furnishing of the Work; and (c) how the Means and Methods chosen by the Contractor translate into activities and sequencing; and (d) the actual timing and sequencing of completed Work. Contractor must resolve the issues arising from the review by the Professional and/or the Owner and submit Progress Schedule Revision. The review of the Progress Schedule by the Professional or the Owner does not create or impose on the Owner or the Professional any responsibility for the timing, planning, scheduling or execution of the Work or the correctness of any such Progress Schedule detail. The Contractor must update the schedule monthly. The correctness of Progress Schedule remains the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall deliver shop drawings of products, materials, assemblies, or equipment to the Professional.

3.

Samples: The Contractor must deliver all samples of material or equipment to the job site for examination by the State Agency and the Professional. Samples will be examined by the Professional for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor must furnish all Work in accordance with approved samples. The following general classifications of material and equipment require submission of samples. Samples of other items may be requested by the Professional at any time.

END OF SECTION 01300 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 1.

2.

Testing Laboratory Services: All tests required by the Owner must fulfill ASTM, ANSI, Commercial and other Standards for testing. The Contractor must submit a minimum of three copies of each test report to the Professional for evaluation and subsequent distribution. The following general classifications of Work require submission of test reports and/or certificates of inspection. Additional submissions may be requested by the Professional at any time. Item of Work

Test Type

Section Number

Earthwork Portland Cement Concr. Paving Cast-in-place Concrete

Compaction and Density Core Analysis Compression Tests

02200 02512 03300

Tests: (a) Paid by Contractor:

3.

Concrete/Asphalt Materials: Before placement of any concrete, the Contractor must submit for the Professional's approval complete data on the trial concrete mix formulation and a testing laboratory report for ASTM C94, twenty-eight-day standard cylinder test for compressive strength of a sample of the concrete mix. For asphalt paving, the Contractor must submit the data and testing reports for ASTM D946, AC-5. The mix must have 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight for binder course and 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight for surface course in accordance with Asphalt Institute Manual MS-4, MS-13 and the current Michigan Department of Transportation (MDOT) Standard Specifications for Construction. (a) The Contractor must furnish to the Professional tickets showing mix formulation, Contractor's name, Project name, mix identification for each load of concrete/asphalt delivered and installed. If the technical specifications allow added water to the concrete mix after leaving the batch plant, the delivery ticket must reflect the added water. The Owner Field Representative must receive a copy of each delivery ticket for transmittal to the Professional for evaluation. (b) The Professional may require the Contractor to core drill questionable cast-in-place concrete/asphalt for laboratory testing. Should the laboratory analysis indicate the concrete/asphalt fails to meet specification requirements, the Contractor must pay all costs for core drilling and testing in the laboratory and replace the concrete/asphalt found to fail meeting the specification requirements. Should the laboratory analysis confirm that the concrete/asphalt meets specification requirements, the Owner will pay the Contractor for their costs for core drilling, concrete/asphalt patching and the laboratory fee for testing of the concrete/asphalt core samples.

END OF SECTION 01400 01-6

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.

The Contractor must furnish and install all temporary facilities and controls required by the Work, must remove them from State property upon completion of the Work, and the grounds and existing facilities must be restored to their original condition.

2.

If water or electricity is available in the area where Work will be performed, the Contractor will not be charged for reasonable use of these services for construction operation. The Contractor must pay costs for installation and removal of any temporary connections including necessary safety devices and controls. Use of services must not disrupt or interfere with operations of the State Agency.

3.

Temporary Sanitary Facilities: (a) Portable Toilets: The Contractor must provide and maintain a sufficient number of portable temporary toilets in locations approved by the State Agency. They must comply with all Federal, State and local code requirements. The Contractor must maintain the temporary toilets in a sanitary condition at all times and must remove them when the Work under this Contract is complete. The Contractor's employees are not allowed to use any existing State toilet facility.

4. Field Office: (a) On Site Trailer: At the beginning of the Work, the Contractor may provide a field office and storage building at the site in a location acceptable to the Owner. The building may be a trailer. The Contractor may provide such other temporary buildings as he may require for the use of workers and safe storage for tools and materials. Job signs with the Contractor’s name, logos, specialty, etc., are not allowed. 5. Temporary Heating: Until the new heating system is ready to provide heat, the Contractor must provide adequate temporary heaters to maintain the temperature in those areas of the building where Work is being conducted between 55 degrees F. and 70 degrees F. during working hours.

END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.

The Contractor must furnish and be responsible for all materials, equipment, facilities, tools, supplies and utilities necessary for completing the Work. All materials and equipment must be provided as described in the Contract Documents and of good quality, free of defect and new and must be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned following the manufacturer’s and Suppliers’ instructions.

2.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling: All materials and equipment delivered to and used in the Work must be suitably stored and protected from the elements. The areas used for storage must only be those approved by the State Agency. The Owner assumes no responsibility for stored material. The ownership and title to materials will not be vested in the Owner before materials are incorporated in the Work, unless payment is made by the Owner for stored materials and equipment. After delivery, before and after installation, the Contractor must protect materials and equipment against theft, injury or damage from all causes. For all materials and equipment, the Contractor must provide complete information on installation, operation and preventive maintenance. (a) The Contractor must cover and protect bulk materials while in storage which are subject to deterioration because of dampness, the weather or contamination. The Contractor must keep materials in their original sealed containers, unopened, with labels plainly indicating manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade of material and must immediately remove from the Work site containers which are broken, opened, watermarked and/or contain caked, lumpy or otherwise damaged materials. (b) The Contractor must keep equipment stored outdoors from contact with the ground, away from areas subject to flooding and covered with weatherproof plastic sheeting or tarpaulins. (b) The Contractor must certify that any materials stored off-site are: a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Stored on property owned or leased by the Contractor or owned by the agency. Insured against loss by fire, theft, flood or other hazards. Properly stored and protected against loss or damage. In compliance with the plans and specifications. Specifically allotted, identified, and reserved for the project. Itemized for tracking and payment. Subject to these conditions until the items are delivered to the project site.

END OF SECTION 01600 01-7

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

Project Name: CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SECTION 01650 FACILITY START-UP 1.

Tests: The complete installation consisting of the several parts of equipment and systems installed according to the requirements of the Contract Documents must be ready in all respects for use by the State Agency and must be subjected to a test at full operating conditions and pressures for normal conditions of use.

2.

Adjustments: Contractor must adjust and replace the Work which is necessary to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents and to comply with the directions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the several parts of equipment, and to comply with all provisions of architectural and/or engineering drawings/specifications and all codes and regulations which may apply to the entire installation.

3.

Demonstration: Contractor must provide an on-site demonstration and training of all systems operations to the Owner when it is substantially completed.

END OF SECTION 01650 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT 1.

Substantial Completion: The Contractor must notify the Professional, the Project Director and the Agency when the Work will be substantially complete. If the Professional, Owner, and Agency agree that the project is Substantially Complete, the Professional and Project Director will inspect the Work. The Professional, upon determining that the Work, or a portion of the Work inspected, is substantially complete, will prepare a Punch List and will attach it to the respective Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Contractor must be represented on the job site at the time this inspection is made and thereafter must complete all Work by the date set for final acceptance by the Owner.

2.

Cleaning: (a) Regular Cleaning: The Contractor must remove all scrap or removed material, debris or rubbish from the Project work site at the end of each working day and more frequently whenever the Owner Field Representative deems such material to be a hazard. The Contractor cannot discard materials on the grounds of the State Agency without the express permission of the Project Director. No salvage or surplus material may be sold on the premises of the State Agency. No burning of debris or rubbish is allowed. Any recycled materials must be recycled and the Contractor will be required to provide recycling plan. (b) Final Cleaning: Before final acceptance by the State, the Contractor must clean all of the Work and existing surfaces, building elements and contents that were soiled by their operations and make repairs for any damage or blemish that was caused by the Work.

END OF SECTION 01700 SECTION 01800 MAINTENANCE 1.

The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the following parts of Work in good order and proper working conditions and must take all necessary actions for their protection until they are placed for use by the Owner:

END OF SECTION 01800

01-8

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

APPENDIX I GLOSSARY

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

GLOSSARY ActivityAn element in the Progress Schedule establishing a requisite step, or the time and resources required, for completing the part of the Work associated with that Activity. AddendaWritten instruments that are used by the Owner and/or Professional to incorporate interpretations or clarifications, modifications and other information into the Bidding Documents. An Addendum issued after Bid opening to those Bidders who actually submitted a Bid, for the purpose of re-bidding the Work without re-advertising, is referred to as a post-Bid Addendum. Agency- Any unit, section, division, department or other instrumentality of the State that benefits from the Work. AlternateRefers to work specified in the Bidding Documents for which the Bidder must bid a Bid Price. Apparent Low Bidders: Those Bidders whose Base Bid, when added to those specific Alternates the Owner intends to accept, yields the three lowest sums of Bid and Alternates. Additional Bidders may be considered Apparent Low Bidders if their Bid, when added to those specific Alternates the Owner intends to accept, yields a sum within 10% of the lowest of the Apparent Low Bidder’s sum. If a qualified disabled veteran meets the requirements of the contract solicitation and with the veteran’s preference is the lowest Bidder it is considered the Apparent Low Bidder. Archaeological FeatureAny prehistoric or historic deposit of archaeological value, as determined by a representative of a State agency that is duly authorized to evaluate such findings and render such judgments. An Archaeological Feature deposit may include, but is not limited to Indian habitations, ceremonial sites, abandoned settlements, treasure trove, artifacts or other objects with intrinsic archaeological value and that relate to the history and culture of the State of Michigan. The Archaeological Features are listed under Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions. Authorized Technical DataInformation and data contained in a report of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions. Also, any physical data (dimension, location, conditions, etc.) contained in those Drawings of physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities. Best Value-The bids will be evaluated for best value based on price and qualitative components that may include but are not limited to technical design, technical approach, quality of proposed personnel, and management plans, per PA 430 of 2012. BidWritten offer by a Bidder for the Work, as specified, which designates the Bidder’s Base Bid and Bid Prices for all Alternates. The term Bid includes a re-bid. BidderThe Person acting directly, or through an authorized representative, who submits a Bid directly to the Owner. Bidding DocumentsThe proposed Contract Documents as advertised, and all Addenda issued before execution of the Contract. Bid Price The Bidder’s price for a lump sum item of work, or the product of the Bidder’s unit price for an item of Unit Price Work times the quantity given on the Bid Form for that item. Bid SecuritySecurity serving as a guarantee that the Bidder will conform to all conditions. Bidding RequirementsThe Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions, Information for Bidders, Bid Form, Bid Form Attachments and qualification submittals, as advertised and as modified by Addenda, and any other Section included within Division 0 of the Bidding Documents for the purpose of governing bidding and award of the Contract. BoardThe Administrative Board of the State of Michigan. Bond Security furnished by the Contractor, as required by the Contract Documents. Business DayAny Day except Saturdays, Sundays and holidays observed by the Owner. BulletinA request used by the Owner to describe a change in the Work under consideration by the Owner and to request the Contractor to submit a proposal for the corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, if any. Calendar DayEvery day shown on the calendar, Saturdays, Sundays and holidays included. Cash AllowanceAn Owner-specified sum included within the Contract Price to reimburse the Contractor for the actual purchase/furnished cost of materials and/or equipment or other designated items, as specifically provided in the Contract Documents. Although the scope (e.g., the required quantity) of any Work covered by a Cash Allowance is sufficiently detailed in the

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Contract Documents for the purposes of bidding the required labor costs, Subcontract costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs and Fee, it is understood that the required materials, equipment or other designated items are of uncertain purchase cost at the time of Bid or are yet to be specified in more detail by the Professional as to quality, appearance, durability, finish and such other necessary features affecting purchase price. Change OrderA written order issued and signed by the Owner, which amends the Contract Documents for changes in the Work or an adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, or both. Contract AwardThe official action of the Board or the Director-FBSA awarding the Contract to the Contractor. Contract DocumentsWritten and graphic documents that form the legal agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, consisting of this document, completed Bid and Contract forms, terms and conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings, addenda, Notice of Award, Notice-to-Proceed and contract change orders. Contract PriceThe total compensation, including authorized adjustments, payable by the Owner to the Contractor (subject to provisions for Unit Price Work). Contract TimesThe Contract Times for the entire Work are the periods allowed, including authorized adjustments, for Substantial Completion and final completion of the Work. The Contract Times for a designated portion of the Work are the periods allowed for Substantial Completion and final completion of any such portion of the Work, as specified in the Contract Documents. ContractorBusiness enterprise with which the Owner has entered into the Contract. Correction PeriodPeriod during which the Contractor must, in accordance with the Contract Documents, (a) correct or, if rejected, remove and replace Defective Work, and (b) maintain warranties for materials and equipment in full force and effect. Cost of the Work InvolvedThe sum of all costs that would be, or actually were, necessarily incurred by the Contractor in providing any Work Involved with the related change, less the costs that would be, or would have been, incurred by the Contractor to provide such Work without the related change. DefectiveAs determined by the Professional, an adjective which when referring to or when applied to the term “Work” refers to (a) Work not conforming to the Contract Documents or not meeting the requirements of an inspection, test or approval, or (b) Work itemized in a Punch List which the Contractor fails to complete or correct within a reasonable time after issuance of the Punch List by the Professional. DelayAny act or omission or other event that in any manner adversely affects or alters the schedule, progress or completion of all or any part of the Work. Delay is a generic term intended to include deferral, stoppage, slow down, interruption and extended performance, and all related hindrance, rescheduling, disruption, interference, inefficiency and productivity and production losses. Department (DTMB)Department of Technology, Management and Budget of the State of Michigan. Director is the Director of the Department. Director-FBSA is the Director of DTMB Facilities and Business Services Administration. DivisionEach of the numbered, distinct parts (starting with Division 0) into which the Specifications are divided. DrawingsPart of the Contract Documents showing the Work. Drawings must neither serve nor be used as Shop Drawings. EmergencyA condition affecting the safety or protection of persons, or the Work, or property at or adjacent to the site. Facilities and Business Services Administration (FBSA)-Entity in the Department responsible for design, construction, and operations and maintenance of facilities. Fee for the Work Involved (Fee)An established, percentage mark-up on the Cost of the Work Involved which is allowed to the Contractor for (a) reasonable administrative costs, and (b) negotiated, reasonable profit on the Cost of the Work Involved. Hazardous MaterialAsbestos containing materials (ACMs), Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), petroleum products, such construction materials as paint thinners, solvents, gasoline, oil, etc., and any other like material the manufacture, use, treatment, storage, transportation or disposal of which is regulated by federal, State or local Laws governing the protection of public health, natural resources or the environment. Invitation To Bid (ITB) -The solicitation document presenting the terms and conditions that will become part of the Contract when the Bid is accepted.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Law(s)Means federal, State and local statutes, ordinances, orders, rules and/or regulations. MCLThe Michigan Compiled Laws of the State of Michigan. Means and MethodsIncludes means, methods, techniques, sequences and/or procedures applicable to the Work. Notice of AwardWritten notice accepting the Bid to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder and designating the Contract Price (and establishing the Alternates accepted by the Owner). Notice-to-ProceedWritten notice issued by the Project Director directing the Contractor to commence the construction activities and establishing the start date of the Contract Time. On-Site Inspection–The Professional’s on-site examination of the Contractor’s completed or in progress Work to determine and verify to the Project Director that the quantity and quality of all Work complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. OwnerThe State of Michigan, with whom the Contractor has entered into the Contract and for whom the Work is to be provided. Owner Field RepresentativeA State employee or consultant, acting under the direction of the Project Director, providing on-site, periodic observation and documentation of the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents. Partial UseUse by the Owner of a designated portion of the Work before accomplishing Substantial Completion of the entire Work. Partial Use does not mean Substantial Completion of the portion of the Work placed in use by the Owner. PersonIndividuals, partnerships, corporations, receivers, trustees, joint ventures or any other legal entity and any combinations of any of them. Political SubdivisionAny county, city, village or other local unit of the State, including any agency, department or instrumentality of any such county, city, village or other local unit. PostBid Submittal A Qualification Submittal required of the Bidder selected under Section 00100 - 22 before Contract Award, and which is used by the Owner in the evaluation of the Bid of the selected Bidder. Professional Services Contractor (PSC or Professional)The individual or business entity who has the authority to practice the design disciplines required by the Contract Documents. An Agency with appropriate licensing may replace the PSC in their role if a consultant is not used. ProjectThe total construction, which includes the Work and possibly other work completed by others, as indicated in the Contract Documents. Project Director-Designated State employee(s) (a) Responsible for directing and supervising the Professional’s services during the period allowed for completion of the Work; and/or (b) Acting as representative for the Owner and for the enforcement of the Contract Documents, approving payment to the Contractor and coordinating the activities of the State, Owner, Professional and Contractor. Project ScheduleWork Schedule that shows the Contractor's approach to planning, scheduling and execution of the Work and that accurately portrays completed Work as to sequencing and timing, as provided in the Contract Documents. Project SpecificationsThe Contract Documents organized into Divisions. "Technical Specifications" means Divisions of the Specifications consisting of technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship. Provisionary AllowanceAn amount included within the Contract Price to reimburse the Contractor for the cost to furnish and perform Work that is uncertain because, for example, it is indeterminate in scope and may not be shown or detailed in the Contract Documents. Punch ListA list of minor items to be completed or corrected by the Contractor, any one of which do not materially impair the use of the Work for its intended purpose. Qualified Disabled Veteran (QDV)-QDV as defined by Public Act 22 of 2010, MCL 18.1241.3 and supported by a DD214 Proof of Service and Discharge, a Veterans Administration rating decision letter, proof of disability (if the disability is not indicated on the DD214), and appropriate legal documents setting forth the 51% natural persons QDV ownership. Record DocumentsDrawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Change Authorizations, Bulletins, inspection, test and approval reports, photographs, written clarifications and interpretations and all other documents recording, or annotated to show, all

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

revisions and deviations between the as-built installation and the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications and interpretations. RecordsBooks, reports, documents, electronic data, and other evidence relating to the bidding, award and furnishing and performance of the Work. Recycled MaterialRecycled paper products, structural materials made from recycled plastics, re-refined lubricating oils, reclaimed solvents, recycled asphalt and concrete, recycled glass products, re-treaded tires, ferrous metals containing recycled scrap metals and all other materials that contain (a) waste materials generated by a business or consumer, (b) materials that have served their intended purpose, and/or (c) materials that have been separated from solid waste for collection, recycling and disposition in the percentage determined by the State as provided by Law. Request for PaymentThe form provided by the Owner (Payment Request DTMB-0440) to be used by the Contractor in requesting payment for Work completed, which must enclose all supporting information required by the Contract Documents. Schedule of ValuesA schedule of pay items, which subdivides the Work into its various parts and which details, for each itemized part, cost and pricing information required for making payments for Work performed. The sum of all pay item costs in the Schedule of Values must equal the Contract Price for the Work. Shop DrawingsIncludes drawings, diagrams, illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions and other data prepared by or for the Contractor to illustrate some part of the Work, or by a Supplier and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate items of material or equipment. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control–The planning, design and installation of appropriate Best Management Practices designed and engineered specifically to reduce or eliminate the off-site migration of soils via water runoff, wind, vehicle tracking, etc. Soil erosion and sedimentation control in the State of Michigan is regulated under The Natural Resources Environmental Protection Act; Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control, 1994 PA 451, Part 91, as amended, MCL 324.9101 et seq. Soil erosion and sedimentation control associated with this Contract is monitored and enforced by the DTMB-FBSA. StateThe State of Michigan in its governmental capacity, including its departments, divisions, agencies, boards, offices, commissions, officers, employees and agents. Non-capitalized references to a state refer to a state other than the State of Michigan. State Construction CodeThe Michigan State Construction Code Act, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seq. SubcontractorA Person having an agreement with the Contractor to provide labor at the site and furnishing materials and/or equipment for incorporation into the Work. SubmittalsIncludes technical Submittals, Progress Schedules and those other documents required for submission by the Contract Documents. The term "technical Submittal" includes Shop Drawings, brochures, samples, Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, test procedures and any other Submittal the Contract Documents require the Contractor to submit to demonstrate how the items covered, after installation or incorporation into the Work, will conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design of the completed Work as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents. Substantial CompletionThe Work, or a portion of the Work designated in the Contract Documents as eligible for separate Substantial Completion, has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents as determined by the PSC, to the extent that the Owner can use or occupy the entire Work, or the designated portion of the Work, for the use intended without any outstanding, concurrent Work at the site, except as may be required to complete or correct Punch List items. SupplierA manufacturer or fabricator, or a distributor, material man or vendor representing a manufacturer or fabricator, who has an agreement with the Contractor to furnish materials and/or equipment. Underground UtilitiesPipelines, piping, conduit, duct, cables, wells, tanks, tunnels and appurtenances, or other similar facilities, installed underground to convey or support conveyance of potable water, sprinkler or irrigation water, fire protection systems, electricity, gases, steam, petroleum products, sewerage and drainage removal, telephone, communications, cable TV, traffic or control systems. Unit Price WorkWork involving specified quantities (i.e., related Work quantities) which when performed is measured by the Professional and paid using the measured quantities and unit prices contained in the Contract Documents. Performance of Unit Price Work for undefined quantities is contingent upon conditions encountered at the site, as determined and authorized by the Professional.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Unit Price Work, SpecifiedWork of specified and defined quantities (i.e., quantities are detailed in, and can be taken-off from, the Contract Documents) that when performed is measured by the Professional and paid based on the measured quantities and unit prices contained in the Contract Documents. Work (as in “the Work,” "the entire Work”)The entire completed Construction required by the Contract Documents. The Work results from furnishing and performing all services, obligations, responsibilities, management, supervision, labor, materials, equipment, construction equipment, general conditions, permits, taxes, patent fees and royalties, testing, inspection and approval responsibilities, warranties, temporary facilities, small tools, field supplies, Bonds, insurance, mobilization, close-out, overhead and all connections, devices and incidental items of any kind or nature required and/or made necessary by the Contract Documents. Work Involved, any Work InvolvedExisting or prospective Work (a) reflected in any notice, proposal or claim, or (b) reflected in changes ordered or in process, or (c) affected by Delay.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

APPENDIX II SPECIAL WORKING CONDITIONS

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

DTMB Facilities and Business Services Administration Security Clearance Request Contractor Instructions The purpose of this document is to establish security and supervision requirements for contract personnel requiring access to Department of Technology, Management and Budget (DTMB) facilities. A DTMB Security Clearance form must be completed before an individual is granted access to a facility. Access approval will be in effect for one year from date of DTMB Facility Services approval or until estimated project completion date (whichever occurs first). Contract personnel agree to adhere to all DTMB rules and regulations which in DTMB facilities. Access will only be granted for normal business hours. (Monday-Friday, 8:00 a.m.-5:00 p.m. except State holidays). DTMB Facilities and Business Services Administration, Facility Services section must clear any exception in advance. Contract personnel will be required to submit the following to DTMB Facility Services Manager or Regional Manager before entering a DTMB facility: Procedure for submitting form electronically (preferred and recommended) 1. Complete a DTMB Security Clearance form (using Microsoft Excel) and include the following:   

Company name Company Contact name and phone number Complete name (last name first) and date of birth for all employees requiring access.

2. Email completed form to DTMB Facility Manager for an individual building or DTMB Regional Facility Manager for multiple building requests. Procedure for submitted in person or mail delivery 1. Complete a DTMB Security Clearance form (using Microsoft Excel) and include the following:   

Company name Company Contact name and phone number Complete name (last name first) and date of birth for all employees requiring access.

2. Return completed form to DTMB Facility Manager for an individual building or DTMB Regional Facility Manager for multiple building requests. Note: This request must be received a minimum of 48 hours before enter a DTMB Facility. DTMB Facility Access Criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Present pictured ID. Name must appear on the clearance list. Sign-in and wear a dated visitor’s pass (must be visibly displayed at all times). Return visitor pass to security desk at days end.

Note: Individuals whose name does not appear on the clearance list are required to be signed in by a member of the DTMB Facility Services staff. Failure to comply with the above procedure will result in the individual(s) being delayed and may be cause for denying access to DTMB facilities.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

APPENDIX III SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES

File No. 511/14284.CAK

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR CONTRACTORS ON DTMB OWNED AND MANAGED PROPERTIES 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Comply with Part 91, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control of the Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act 1994 PA 451, as amended. Contact the DTMB, FBSA, Design and Construction Division to discuss the implementation of soil erosion and sedimentation control (SESC) on the Project. Phone (517) 284-7911; FAX (517) 284-7971. Following the award of a contract, the Contractor will be required to prepare and issue for approval an SESC Implementation Plan, which indicates the Contractor’s intended implementation of SESC on the project including a schedule and sequence. The Environmental Health and Safety Section, upon approval of the implementation plan, will issue to the Contractor an “Authorization to Proceed with Earth Change” document, which is to be posted at the job site. This document is issued in lieu of a permit from the county. Earthwork shall not begin prior to the issuance of this Authorization. Upon receipt of the Authorization document, the Contractor may begin earth change activities. See below the “Checklist for Contractor’s SESC Implementation Plan” for details of the required information necessary for the Contractor to create the SESC Implementation Plan. The intent of this plan is to ensure that the Contractor has reviewed and understands the SESC provisions within the plans and specifications. CHECKLIST FOR CONTRACTOR’S SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL IMPLEMENTATION PLAN (For projects that include earth changes or disturb existing vegetation): DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION DIVISION SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PROGRAM P.O. Box 30026, Lansing, Michigan 48909

PROJECT TITLE: PROJECT LOCATION: PROJECT FILE NUMBER: INDEX NUMBER: Prior to the start of earthwork, the Contractor must submit a Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control (SESC) Implementation Plan to the Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Program. The intent of this plan is to ensure that the Contractor has reviewed and understands the SESC provisions within the plans and specifications. The following checklist will provide Contractors with assistance in creating the SESC Implementation Plan. The SESC Implementation Plan must include: 1.

A written plan or letter demonstrating: The Contractor’s means and methods for the implementation of SESC provisions included within the plans and specifications and compliance with the provisions of Part 91 of PA 451 of 1994, as amended. The Contractor’s plan for dust control. The Contractor’s plan for inspection and maintenance of temporary SESCs.

2.

A map, location plan, drawing, or amended copy of the Project SESC or grading plan showing: The locations of any stockpiles of soil associated with the Project The temporary SESC controls associated with stockpiles of soil The Contractor’s suggested or proposed additions or relocations of any temporary or permanent SESCs. associated with the Project plans and specifications (subject to approval by Engineer and DTMB) Location of site entrances, exits and vehicle routes Location of site superintendent’s/project manager’s site trailer or office (for SESC Inspector check-in)

3.

A schedule for the installation and removal of temporary controls and the installation of permanent soil erosion and sedimentation controls in relation to the overall construction schedule.

Submit the above items to the above address. Upon approval of the Contractor’s plan, an “Authorization to Proceed with Earth Change” will be issued by DTMB, Design and Construction Division.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

File No. 511/14284.CAK

DEMOLITION/REMODELING PROJECT PROCEDURES Furnish all equipment, materials, labor and services necessary to complete all building demolition required in connection with the existing building, in order to permit the installation of new Work. The goal of the Owner is to generate the least amount of waste or debris possible. However, inevitable waste and debris that are generated shall be reused, salvaged, or recycled, and disposal in landfills shall be minimized to the extent economically feasible. The Contractor will be required to prepare waste management plan for the collection, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of the waste generated at the construction site for the Owner’s review and approval. The Contractor will be required to produce waste management progress reports. 1.

Locations: Notations are made in various places on the Drawings to call attention to building demolition which is required; however, these Drawings are not intended to show each and every item to be removed. The Contractor and the Subcontractors for the various trades must remove the materials related to their respective trades as required to permit the construction of the new Work as shown.

2.

Permits: The Contractor must secure from the appropriate agencies all required permits necessary for proper execution of the work before starting work on the project site. All fees for securing the permits must be paid by the Contractor, including all inspection costs which may be legally assessed by the Bureau of Construction Codes in accordance with the authority granted under the Public Act 1980 PA 371, as amended.

3.

Enclosures: Where it is necessary to make alterations to walls, floors or roof of the existing building, the Contractor must provide and maintain dustproof partitions to separate the parts where Work is being done from the adjoining parts occupied by the State Agency. Where any parts are opened and exposed to the elements, the Contractor must provide weather tight enclosures to fully protect the structure and its contents.

4.

Waste Management Plan: The management plan must address waste source identification and separation, returns, reuse and salvage, recycling, landfill options, alternatives to landfilling, materials handling procedures and transportation.

5.

Preparation: Protect all existing Work that is to remain and restore in an approved manner any such Work that becomes damaged. 5.1 Rubbish and debris resulting from the Work must be removed immediately from the site by the Contractor. However, any recyclable materials must be recycled; the Contractor will be required to use alternatives to landfills for waste disposal such as reuse or recycle of asphalt, bricks, concrete, masonry, plastics, paint, glass, carpet, metals, wood, drywall, insulation and any other waste materials to the extent practical. 5.2 Unless otherwise specified, the Agency will remove existing furniture, drapery tracks, draperies, window blinds, and other equipment items, which might interfere with the new construction.

6.

Coordination: Demolition work, in connection with any new unit of Work, must not be commenced until all new materials required for completion of that new item of Work are at hand.

7.

Waste Management Plan Progress Reports: Submit an updated report with the payment requests. The progress reports shall include: a. The amount of waste sent to a landfill, tipping fees paid and the total disposal cost. Include supporting documents such as manifests, weight tickets, receipts and/or invoices. b. Records for each material recycled/reused/salvaged from the project including the amount, date removed from the job site, final destination, transportation cost, recycled materials and the net cost/ savings. c. Breakdown of waste by type generated to date. d. Recycling/salvage/landfill rates. e. Percent of waste recycled/salvaged to date.

8. Cover all trash and waste containers with a tarp, cover, or lid.

Bidding and Contract Document (R 11/13)

CGTC Simulation Support Building

APPENDIX IV PREVAILING WAGE RATES

File No. 511/14284.CAK

State of Michigan [email protected]

Official Request #:

1072

Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Simulation Center Project Number: File# 511/13315.CAK - Index# 21000

Crawford County

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 1 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer MLDC 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, must be consecutive calendar days

Asbestos & Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler Asbestos and Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler AS207

$39.75

$53.04

$66.32 H H H X X X X D Y

$39.75

$53.08

$66.40 H H H X X X X D Y

$54.70

$81.08 $107.45 H H H H H H H D Y

$40.31 $41.45 $42.57 $43.69 $44.81 $49.53 $49.32 $51.58

$59.49 $78.67 $61.21 $80.95 $62.88 $83.19 $64.57 $85.43 $66.24 $87.67 $73.40 $97.26 $73.01 $96.69 $76.40 $101.21

8/14/2013

9/16/2013

4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday,

Boilermaker Boilermaker

BO169 8/14/2009

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 1 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 2 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Bricklayer Bricklayer

BR9-40

$40.14

$53.00

$65.85 H H H H H H H D Y

$29.86 $31.14 $32.43 $33.71 $35.00 $36.28 $37.57 $38.85

$37.57 $39.49 $41.43 $43.35 $45.29 $47.21 $49.14 $51.06

$45.29 $47.85 $50.43 $52.99 $55.57 $58.13 $60.71 $63.27

$40.14

$53.00

$65.85 H H H H H H H D Y

$31.14 $32.43 $33.71 $35.00 $36.28 $37.57

$39.49 $41.43 $43.35 $45.29 $47.21 $49.14

$47.85 $50.43 $52.99 $55.57 $58.13 $60.71

$36.42

$46.08

$55.74 X X H H H H H D Y

$28.69 $30.62 $32.56 $33.52

$34.48 $37.38 $40.29 $41.73

$40.28 $44.14 $48.02 $49.94

$37.07

$47.06

$57.04 X X H H H H H D Y

$29.08 $31.08 $33.08 $34.07

$35.07 $38.07 $41.07 $42.56

$41.06 $45.06 $49.06 $51.04

3/8/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2,999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours 4500-5249 hours 5250-6000 hours Caulker, Pointer, Cleaner, Plasterer, Tile Setter, Terrazzo Worker

BR9-40-BL 3/8/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours

Carpenter Carpenter 4 10s allowed M-Th

CA202 6/9/2014

Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year Pile Driver Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday

CA202PD 6/9/2014

Apprentice Rates: 1st Year 2nd Year 3rd Year 4th Year

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 2 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 3 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Cement Finisher Cement Finisher

BR9-40-CF

$36.16

$47.26

$58.36 X X H X X X H D Y

$28.39 $29.50 $30.61 $31.72 $32.83 $33.94

$35.60 $37.27 $38.94 $40.60 $42.26 $43.93

$42.82 $45.04 $47.26 $49.48 $51.70 $53.92

$35.48

$47.03

$58.58 H H H H H H H D Y

$27.40 $29.70 $32.01

$34.91 $38.36 $41.82

$42.42 $47.02 $51.64

$36.34

$47.60

$58.85 H H H H H H H D Y

$25.09 $28.46 $31.84 $34.09

$30.72 $35.77 $40.85 $44.22

$36.35 $43.09 $49.85 $54.35

3/8/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours

Cement Mason Cement Mason PL16-13 Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday or Saturday inclement weather make up days. Saturday hours for inclement weather make up shall be paid straight rate unless over 40 hours worked.

10/23/2012

Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year

Drywall Drywall Finisher

PT-1803-DF 8/2/2013

4 10 hour days allowed on consecutive days, MondayFriday. Make up day allowed M-F for work missed due to holidays or inclement weather. Apprentice Rates: 0 - 900 hours 901- 1800 hours 1801 - 2700 hours 2701 - 3600 hours

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 3 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 4 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Electrician Road Way Electrical Work EC-17 Double time due after 16 hours on any calendar day and all hours Sunday.

$50.53

$73.30

$96.06 H H H H H H H D Y

$32.32 $34.59 $36.88 $39.15 $41.43 $45.97

$45.98 $49.39 $52.82 $56.23 $59.65 $66.46

$59.64 $64.18 $68.76 $73.30 $77.86 $86.94

$42.97

$61.14

$79.31 H H H H H H D D Y

$17.56 $19.00 $22.16 $23.65 $27.20 $30.28

$23.36 $25.52 $30.36 $32.62 $37.94 $42.55

$29.14 $32.02 $38.60 $41.57 $48.66 $54.82

$43.44

$61.51

$79.57 H H H H H H H D Y

$21.64 $23.40 $26.92 $28.68 $32.20 $35.72

$29.56 $32.20 $37.48 $40.12 $45.41 $50.68

$37.48 $41.00 $48.04 $51.56 $58.60 $65.64

8/6/2013

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Inside Wireman Double time pay required after 12 hours worked Monday Friday

EC-498-IW 3/11/2013

Apprentice Rates:

Subdivision of county

1st Period Period 2 Period 3 Period 4 Period 5 Period 6 All Townships EXCEPT Lovells.

Inside Wireman

EC-692-IW-Z2 6/3/2013

Apprentice Rates:

Subdivision of county

Period 1 Period 2 Period 3 Period 4 Period 5 Period 6 Lovells Township ONLY.

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 4 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 5 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sound and Communication Installer/Technician

EC-692-SC

$27.29

$37.89

$48.49 H H H H H H H D N

$12.56 $13.63 $15.79 $16.86 $18.82 $21.18

$17.87 $19.46 $22.68 $24.28 $27.22 $30.72

$23.17 $25.29 $29.57 $31.70 $35.62 $40.26

$47.05

$68.11

$89.17 H H H H H H H D Y

$30.20 $32.32 $34.42 $36.53 $38.63 $40.74 $42.84

$42.69 $46.02 $49.16 $52.33 $55.47 $58.64 $61.79

$55.26 $59.70 $63.90 $68.12 $72.32 $76.54 $80.74

3/11/2013

Apprentice Rates:

Subdivision of county

1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Lovells township

Lineman/Technician outside utility and commercial power and high voltage pipe type cable work and electrical underground.

EC-876 11/18/2009

Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday makeup or Tuesday-Friday with Monday makeup. Apprentice Rates: 1st period 2nd period 3rd period 4th period 5th period 6th period 7th period

Elevator Constructor Elevator Constructor Elevator Constructor

EL 36

$56.46

$94.99 D D D D D D D D Y

$37.74 $41.90 $43.98 $48.14

$58.93 $66.94 $70.95 $78.96

8/7/2007

Apprentice Rates: 1st Year Apprentice 2nd Year Apprentice 3rd Year Apprentice 4th Year Apprentice

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 5 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 6 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Glazier Glazier 4 tens allowed on consecutive days

GL-826

$42.89

$57.34

$71.79 H H H H H H H D Y

$30.29 $31.79 $33.30 $34.80 $36.30 $37.80 $39.31 $40.82

$38.96 $41.18 $43.41 $45.63 $47.86 $50.08 $52.32 $54.55

$47.63 $50.57 $53.53 $56.47 $59.42 $62.36 $65.32 $68.28

$20.14

$29.14

H H H H H H H H N

$44.40

$58.76

$73.12 H H H H H H H D Y

$25.78 $29.50 $33.22 $36.95 $40.68

$32.96 $38.11 $43.27 $48.44 $53.61

$40.14 $46.73 $53.32 $59.93 $66.53

$44.11

$55.52

$66.93 X X H H H H D D Y

$27.18 $29.29 $31.41 $33.53 $35.64 $37.76

$33.53 $36.27 $39.03 $41.78 $44.53 $47.28

$39.88 $43.25 $46.64 $50.02 $53.40 $56.78

8/2/2013

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months

Heat and Frost Insulator Spray Insulation

AS25S 3/5/2007

Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker AS47 4 ten hour work days shall be either Monday thru Thursday or Tuesday thru Friday

3/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year 5th year

Ironworker Siding, Glazing, Curtain Wall 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time.

IR-25-GZ2 4/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 6 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 7 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Pre-engineered Metal Work

IR-25-PE-Z2

$43.02

$52.70

$62.37 X X H X X X X D Y

$26.11 $28.23 $30.36 $32.48 $34.61

$31.58 $34.46 $37.35 $40.21 $43.10

$37.06 $40.68 $44.33 $47.95 $51.59

$54.61

$81.78 $108.95 H H D H D D D D N

$34.66 $37.11 $39.54 $42.16 $44.76 $47.38

$51.56 $55.23 $58.70 $62.80 $66.71 $70.64

$60.28

$90.26 $120.24 H H H H H H H D N

$34.93 $37.80 $40.66 $43.53 $46.41

$52.39 $56.71 $60.99 $65.29 $69.62

$52.24

$78.08 $103.92 X X H H H H D D Y

6/3/2014

Apprentice Rates: 1st Year 3rd 6 month period 4th 6 month period 5th 6 month period 6th 6 month period Reinforced Iron Work

IR-25-RF 6/25/2013

Apprentice Rates: Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Rigging Work

IR-25-RIG

$68.45 $73.35 $77.84 $83.45 $88.65 $93.89

6/25/2013

Apprentice Rates: Level 1& 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Decking 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. If bad weather, Friday may be a make up day. If holiday celebrated on a Monday, 4 10s may be worked Tuesday thru Friday. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time.

IR-25-SD 6/25/2013

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

$69.86 $75.60 $81.32 $87.06 $92.82

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 7 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 8 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Structural, ornamental, conveyor, welder and pre-cast 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. If bad weather, Friday may be a make up day. If holiday celebrated on a Monday, 4 10s may be worked Tuesday thru Friday. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time.

IR-25-STR

$60.41

$90.34 $120.26 H H H H H H D D Y

$35.06 $37.89 $40.71 $43.54 $46.37 $49.19 $52.02

$52.64 $69.98 $56.52 $75.14 $60.74 $80.78 $65.37 $86.94 $69.24 $92.10 $73.47 $97.74 $77.71 $103.40

$40.97

$61.13

$81.29 H H H H H H D D Y

$29.15

$39.15

$49.15 X X H X X X H D Y

$20.35 $21.45 $22.56 $23.65 $24.75 $25.85

$26.35 $27.95 $29.56 $31.15 $32.75 $34.35

$32.35 $34.45 $36.56 $38.65 $40.75 $42.85

6/25/2013

Apprentice Rates: Levels 1 & 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Industrial Door erection & construction

IR-25-STR-D 6/27/2013

Fence, Sound Barrier & Guardrail erection/installation and Exterior Signage work

IR-340-F2 4/2/2013

Four ten hour work days may be worked during MondaySaturday. Apprentice Rates: 60% Level 65% Level 70% Level 75% Level 80% Level 85% Level

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 8 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 9 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer Class A Laborer: building and heavy construction work, L1098-N-A demolition, mortar mixers, mason tender, carpenter tender, fire watch, heater tender, all 3" pumps and below, furniture mover, material mixers, vibrator operators, operators of concrete mixers, chipping hammers, tamping machines, sand blasters, concrete breakers (90 lb hammer or less), cement gun nozzelman, operators of motor driven buggies, plaster mixers and plaster tenders, pipe or crock layers, caisson work in buildings only, except others falling within class B.

$29.32

$37.55

$45.77 X X H H H H H D Y

$25.21 $26.03 $26.85 $28.50

$31.38 $32.61 $33.84 $36.31

$37.55 $39.19 $40.83 $44.13

$30.53

$39.36

$48.19 X X H H H H H D Y

$26.11 $27.00 $27.88 $29.65

$32.73 $34.07 $35.39 $38.04

$39.35 $41.13 $42.89 $46.43

6/27/2014

Cleaning and clearing of all debris, including wire brushing of windows, scraping of floors, removal of surplus material from all fixtures within confines of structure and cleaning all debris in building and construction area. The general cleanup, including sweeping, cleaning, washdown and wiping of construction facility, equipment and furnishings and removal and loading or burning of all debris including crates, boxes, packaging waste material. Washing and cleaning of walls, partitions, ceilings, windows, bathrooms, kitchens, laboratory, and all fixtures and facilities therein. Cleanup, mopping, washing, waxing and polishing or dusting of all floors or areas. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class B Refractory Work: inside or outside digester, L1098-N-B tanks, lime kilns, chests, boilers, and boiler tubes, including the handling of acid, chlorine, chemicals, epoxies, liquids and cleaning of existing precipitators, hydro blasting, hydro washing, and sandblasting.

6/27/2014

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 9 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 10 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer - Hazardous Class A Laborer performing work in conjunction with site preparation and other preliminary work prior to actual removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances not requiring use of personal protective equipment required by state or federal regulations; or a laborer performing work in conjunction with the removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when use of personal protective equipment level "D" is required.

LHAZ-Z10-A

$28.72

$40.15

$51.57 H H H H H H H D Y

$24.68 $25.49 $26.30 $27.91

$34.09 $35.30 $36.52 $38.94

$43.49 $45.11 $46.73 $49.95

$29.72

$41.65

$53.57 H H H H H H H D Y

$25.44 $26.29 $27.15 $28.86

$35.23 $36.50 $37.80 $40.36

$45.01 $46.71 $48.43 $51.85

$35.67

$47.07

$58.47 X X X X X X X D Y

$30.52 $31.55 $32.58 $34.64

$39.35 $40.90 $42.44 $45.53

$48.17 $50.23 $52.29 $56.41

11/1/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class B Laborer - performing work in conjunction with the LHAZ-Z10-B removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when the use of personal protective equipment levels "A", "B" or "C" is required.

11/1/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Laborer Underground - Tunnel, Shaft & Caisson Class I - Tunnel, shaft and caisson laborer, dump man, shanty man, hog house tender, testing man (on gas), and watchman.

LAUCT-Z2-1 9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 10 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 11 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class II - Manhole, headwall, catch basin builder, bricklayer LAUCT-Z2-2 tender, mortar man, material mixer, fence erector, and guard rail builder

$35.76

$47.21

$58.65 X X X X X X X D Y

$30.58 $31.62 $32.66 $34.72

$39.44 $41.00 $42.56 $45.65

$48.29 $50.37 $52.45 $56.57

$35.86

$47.36

$58.85 X X X X X X X D Y

$30.66 $31.70 $32.74 $34.82

$39.56 $41.12 $42.68 $45.80

$48.45 $50.53 $52.61 $56.77

$36.02

$47.60

$59.17 X X X X X X X D Y

$30.78 $31.83 $32.88 $34.97

$39.74 $41.32 $42.89 $46.02

$48.69 $50.79 $52.89 $57.07

$36.28

$47.99

$59.69 X X X X X X X D Y

$30.98 $32.04 $33.10 $35.22

$40.04 $41.63 $43.22 $46.40

$49.09 $51.21 $53.33 $57.57

9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class III - Air tool operator (jack hammer man, bush LAUCT-Z2-3 hammer man and grinding man), first bottom man, second bottom man, cage tender, car pusher, carrier man, concrete man, concrete form man, concrete repair man, cement invert laborer, cement finisher, concrete shoveler, conveyor man, floor man, gasoline and electric tool operator, gunnite man, grout operator, welder, heading dinky man, inside lock tender, pea gravel operator, pump man, outside lock tender, scaffold man, top signal man, switch man, track man, tugger man, utility man, vibrator man, winch operator, pipe jacking man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.).

9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class IV - Tunnel, shaft and caisson mucker, bracer man, liner plate man, long haul dinky driver and well point man.

LAUCT-Z2-4 9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class V - Tunnel, shaft and caisson miner, drill runner, keyboard operator, power knife operator, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars)

LAUCT-Z2-5 9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 11 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 12 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class VI - Dynamite man and powder man.

LAUCT-Z2-6

$36.59

$48.45

$60.31 X X X X X X X D Y

$31.21 $32.28 $33.36 $35.51

$40.38 $41.99 $43.61 $46.84

$49.55 $51.69 $53.85 $58.15

$28.86

$36.86

$44.85 X X X X X X X D Y

$25.41 $26.10 $26.79 $28.17

$31.68 $32.72 $33.76 $35.82

$37.95 $39.33 $40.71 $43.47

$27.85

$38.49

$49.12 X X H X X X H D Y

$23.65

$31.06

$38.47 X X H X X X H D Y

9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class VII - Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, LAUCT-Z2-7 cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes and flagstones.

9/9/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Landscape Laborer Landscape Specialist includes air, gas, and diesel equipment operator, skidsteer (or equivalent), lawn sprinkler installer on landscaping work where seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintenance of landscape projects occurs. Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.

Skilled Landscape Laborer: small power tool operator, lawn sprinkler installers' tender, material mover, truck driver on when seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintaining of landscape projects occurs Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.

LLAN-Z2-A 6/26/2014

LLAN-Z2-B 6/26/2014

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 12 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 13 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Operating Engineer Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, stiff leg derrick, scraper dozer, grader, front end loader, hoist, job mechanic, head grease man, concrete pump truck and hydro excavators

EN-324-BH2C

$48.75

$62.62

$76.49 H H H H H H H D Y

$39.83 $41.21 $42.60 $43.99 $45.38 $46.76

$49.54 $51.61 $53.69 $55.78 $57.87 $59.93

$59.25 $62.01 $64.79 $67.57 $70.35 $73.11

$43.95

$55.42

$66.89 H H H H H H H D Y

$43.35

$54.52

$65.69 H H H H H H H D Y

$40.90

$50.85

$60.79 H H H H H H H D Y

10/22/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday. Apprentice Rates: 0 - 999 hours 1,000 - 1,999 hours 2,000 - 2,999 hours 3,000 - 3,999 hours 4,000 - 4,999 hours 5,000 - 5,999 hours Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, boiler operator, sweeping machine, winch truck, Bob Cat and similar equipment, elevators (when operated by an operating engineer), and fork truck over 20' lift

EN-324-BH2D 9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class E- Pump 6" or over, well points, freeze systems, boom truck (non-swinging), end dumps and laser/power screed, concrete wire saw 20 h.p. and over and brokk concrete breaker

EN-324-BH2E 9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class F- Air compressor, welder, generators, conveyors, pumps under 6", Grease man, and fork truck 20' or less lift

EN-324-BH2F 9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather,

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 13 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 14 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class G- Oiler, fireman and heater operator

EN-324-BH2G

$39.20

$48.30

$57.39 H H H H H H H D Y

$50.10

$64.65

$79.19 H H H H H H H D Y

$51.60

$66.90

$82.19 H H H H H H H D Y

$53.10

$69.15

$85.19 H H H H H H H D Y

$49.85

$64.27

$78.69 H H H H H H H D Y

$52.80

$79.20 $105.60 H H H H H H H D N

$65.00

$84.85 $104.70 X X H H H H H D Y

9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or longer

EN-OSA

9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or longer

EN-OSA3

9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or longer

EN-OSA4

9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and jib 140' or longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick

EN-OSB 9/12/2013

Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Operating Engineer - DIVER Diver/Wet Tender/Tender/Rov Pilot/Rov Tender

GLF D 4/2/2014

Operating Engineer - Marine Construction Diver/Wet Tender, Engineer (hydraulic dredge)

GLF-1 2/12/2014

Holiday pay= $124.55 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county

all Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Statewide

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 14 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 15 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Crane/Backhoe Operator, 70 ton or over Tug Operator, Mechanic/Welder, Assistant Engineer (hydraulic dredge), Leverman (hydraulic dredge), Diver Tender

GLF-2

$63.50

$82.60 $101.70 X X H H H H H D Y

2/12/2014

Holiday pay = $120.80 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county

All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Friction, Lattice Boom or Crane License Certification

GLF-2B

$64.50

$84.10 $103.70 X X H H H H H D Y

2/12/2014

Holiday pay = $123.30 Subdivision of county

All Great Lakes, islands, therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, Maintenance of Crane (over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs or more), Tug/Launch Operator, Loader, Dozer on Barge, Deck Machinery

GLF-3

$76.30

$93.30 X X H H H H H D Y

$67.75

$81.90 X X H H H H H D Y

$50.13

$65.29

$80.45 H H H H H H H D Y

$40.44 $41.96 $43.48 $44.98 $46.50 $48.02

$51.06 $53.34 $55.62 $57.87 $60.15 $62.43

$61.67 $64.71 $67.75 $70.75 $73.79 $76.83

$59.30 2/12/2014

Holiday pay = $110.30 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county

All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman/Fireman), (4 equipment units or more), Off Road Trucks, Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, & Crane Maintenance 50 ton capacity and under or Backhoe 115,000 lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator

GLF-4

$53.60 2/12/2014

Holiday pay = $96.05 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county

All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Class I Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWCI-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 15 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 16 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWCI-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing.

$49.18

$63.87

$78.55 H H H H H H H D Y

$39.77 $41.24 $42.70 $44.18 $45.65 $47.11

$50.05 $52.26 $54.44 $56.66 $58.87 $61.06

$60.33 $63.27 $66.19 $69.15 $72.09 $75.01

$47.88

$61.92

$75.95 H H H H H H H D Y

$38.86 $40.27 $41.67 $43.07 $44.48 $45.88

$48.69 $50.80 $52.91 $55.00 $57.12 $59.21

$58.51 $61.33 $64.13 $66.93 $69.75 $72.55

$47.63

$61.54

$75.45 H H H H H H H D Y

$38.68 $40.07 $41.46 $42.85 $44.25 $45.64

$48.42 $50.50 $52.58 $54.67 $56.78 $58.86

$58.15 $60.93 $63.71 $66.49 $69.29 $72.07

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HWCI-Z2D 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HWCI-Z2DCL 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 16 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 17 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Class II Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWCII-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection.

$45.73

$58.69

$71.65 H H H H H H H D Y

$44.79

$57.28

$69.77 H H H H H H H D Y

$43.49

$55.33

$67.17 H H H H H H H D Y

$43.24

$54.96

$66.67 H H H H H H H D Y

$52.78

$69.27

$85.75 H H H H H H H D Y

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWCII-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HWCII-Z2D 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HWCII-Z2DCL 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Crane w/ Boom & Jib leads 140' or longer Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HW140-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 17 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 18 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HW140-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing.

$51.72

$67.68

$83.63 H H H H H H H D Y

$50.53

$65.89

$81.25 H H H H H H H D Y

$50.28

$65.52

$80.75 H H H H H H H D Y

$53.08

$69.72

$86.35 H H H H H H H D Y

$52.04

$68.16

$84.27 H H H H H H H D Y

$50.83

$66.34

$81.85 H H H H H H H D Y

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HW140-Z2D 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HW140-Z2DCL 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Crane w/ Boom & Jib leads 220' or longer Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HW220-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HW220-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HW220-Z2D 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 18 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 19 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HW220-Z2DCL

$50.58

$65.97

$81.35 H H H H H H H D Y

$51.10

$66.75

$82.39 H H H H H H H D Y

$50.15

$65.32

$80.49 H H H H H H H D Y

$48.85

$63.37

$77.89 H H H H H H H D Y

$48.60

$63.00

$77.39 H H H H H H H D Y

$57.11

$75.12

$93.13 H H D H H H D D Y

1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Regular Crane, Job Mechanic, Dragline Operator, Boom Truck Operator, Power Shovel Operator and Concrete Pump with boom Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWRC-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Regular Crane, Job Mechanic, Dragline Operator, Boom Truck Operator, Power Shovel Operator and Concrete Pump with Boom Operator Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWRC-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HWRC-Z2D 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.

EN-324-HWRC-Z2DCL 1/23/2012

Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.

Operating Engineer Steel Work Forklift, 1 Drum Hoist

EN-324-ef 6/17/2013

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 19 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 20 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Crane w/ 120' boom or longer

EN-324-SW120

$98.53 H H D H H H D D Y

$59.81

$79.17

$60.81

$80.67 $100.53 H H D H H H D D Y

$60.99

$80.94 $100.89 H H D H H H D D Y

$61.99

$82.44 $102.89 H H D H H H D D Y

$61.26

$81.35 $101.43 H H D H H H D D Y

$62.26

$82.85 $103.43 H H D H H H D D Y

$62.76

$83.60 $104.43 H H D H H H D D Y

$63.76

$85.10 $106.43 H H D H H H D D Y

$64.26

$85.85 $107.43 H H D H H H D D Y

EN-324-SW400-O

$65.26

$87.35 $109.43 H H D H H H D D Y

EN-324-SWCO

$59.45

$78.63

$97.81 H H D H H H D D Y

$47.09 $49.01 $50.93 $52.85 $54.76 $56.68

$60.51 $63.40 $66.28 $69.16 $72.02 $74.91

$73.94 $77.78 $81.62 $85.46 $89.28 $93.12

$60.45

$80.13

$99.81 H H D H H H D D Y

6/14/2013

Crane w/ 120' boom or longer w/ Oiler

EN-324-SW120-O 6/14/2013

Crane w/ 140' boom or longer

EN-324-SW140 6/14/2013

Crane w/ 140' boom or longer W/ Oiler

EN-324-SW140-O 6/14/2013

Boom & Jib 220' or longer

EN-324-SW220 6/14/2013

Crane w/ 220' boom or longer w/ Oiler

EN-324-SW220-O 6/14/2013

Boom & Jib 300' or longer

EN-324-SW300 6/14/2013

Crane w/ 300' boom or longer w/ Oiler

EN-324-SW300-O 6/14/2013

Boom & Jib 400' or longer

EN-324-SW400 6/14/2013

Crane w/ 400' boom or longer w/ Oiler

6/14/2013

Crane Operator, Job Mechanic, 3 Drum Hoist & Excavator

6/17/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours 1,000-1,999 hours 2,000-2,999 hours 3,000-3,999 hours 4,000-4,999 hours 5,000 hours Crane w/ Oiler

EN-324-SWCO-O

6/17/2013

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 20 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 21 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Compressor or Welder Operator

EN-324-SWCW

$52.00

$67.46

$82.91 H H D H H H D D Y

$58.81

$77.67

$96.53 H H D H H H D D Y

$50.59

$65.34

$80.09 H H D H H H D D Y

$60.54

$80.27

$99.99 H H D H H H D D Y

$61.54

$81.77 $101.99 H H D H H H D D Y

$48.63

$62.77

$76.90 H H H H H H H D Y

$38.70 $40.09 $41.48 $42.87 $44.26 $45.64

$48.42 $50.50 $52.59 $54.68 $56.76 $58.83

$58.14 $60.92 $63.70 $66.48 $69.26 $72.02

$43.74

$55.43

$67.12 H H H H H H H D Y

6/17/2013

Hoisting Operator, 2 Drum Hoist, & Rubber Tire Backhoe

EN-324-SWHO 6/17/2013

Oiler

EN-324-SWO 6/17/2013

Tower Crane & Derrick where work is 50' or more above first level

EN-324-SWTD50

Tower Crane & Derrick 50' or more w/ Oiler where work station is 50' or more above first level

EN-324-SWTD50-O

6/14/2013

6/14/2013

Operating Engineer Underground Class I Equipment - Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, Batch EN-324A2-UC1 Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Paver 2 drums or 9/13/2013 larger, Conveyor Loader Euclid type, Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, endloader, gradall, grader, hydro excavator, power shovel, roller asphalt, scraper self-propelled or tractor drawn, side boom tractor, slip form paver, slope paver, trencher over 8 ft. digging capacity, well drilling rig, concrete pump with boom operator Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours 1,000-1,999 hours 2,000-2,999 hours 3,000-3,999 hours 4,000-4,999 hours 5,000-5,999 hours Class II Equipment - Boom Truck, Crusher, Hoist, Pump 6 inch discharge or larger, side boom tractor, Tractor (pneutired other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher 8 ft. digging capcity and smaller, Vac Truck

EN-324A2-UC2 9/13/2013

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 21 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 22 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class III Equipment - Air Compressors 600 cfm or larger, Air Compressors 2 or more less than 600 dfm, Boom Truck non-swinging non-powered type boom, Concrete Breaker self-propelled or truck mounted, Concrete paver 1 drum 1/2 yd. or larger, Elevator other than passenger, Pump 4 inch to 6 inch discharge, pumpcrete machine, wagon drill, welding machine or generator 2 or more 300

EN-324A2-UC3

Class IV Equipment - Boiler, Concrete Saw 40 hp or over, curing machine self propelled, end dumps, extend a boom forklift, farm tractor with attachment, finishing machine concrete, firemen, hydraulic pipe pushing machine, mulching equipment, oiler, pumps up to 4 inch discharge, roller other than asphalt, stump remover, sweeper wayne type, trencher, vibrating compaction equipment self propelled 6 ft. wide or over, water wagon.

EN-324A2-UC4

Painter Painter

$43.24

$54.68

$66.12 H H H H H H H D Y

$42.96

$54.26

$65.56 H H H H H H H D Y

$34.03

$44.75

$55.46 H H H H H H H D Y

$22.60 $26.53 $29.74

$27.60 $33.50 $38.31

$32.60 $40.46 $46.88

$27.20

$36.70

H H H H H H H H N

$31.70

$43.45

H H H H H H H H N

$30.45

$41.57

H H H H H H H H N

9/13/2013

9/13/2013

PT-1803-P

8/2/2013

4 10 hour days allowed on consecutive days, MondayFriday. Make up day allowed M-F for work missed due to holidays or inclement weather. Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year

Pipe and Manhole Rehab General Laborer for rehab work or normal cleaning and cctv work-top man, scaffold man, CCTV assistant, jettervac assistant

TM247 10/15/2012

Tap cutter/CCTV Tech/Grout Equipment Operator: unit driver and operator of CCTV; grouting equipment and tap cutting equipment

TM247-2

CCTV Technician/Combo Unit Operator: unit driver and operator of cctv unit or combo unit in connection with normal cleaning and televising work

TM247-3

10/15/2012

10/15/2012

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Statewide

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 22 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 23 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Boiler Operator: unit driver and operator of steam/water heater units and all ancillary equipment associated

TM247-4

Combo Unit driver & Jetter-Vac Operator

TM247-5

Pipe Bursting & Slip-lining Equipment Operator

$32.20

$44.20

H H H H H H H H N

$32.20

$44.20

H H H H H H H H N

$33.20

$45.70

H H H H H H H H N

$33.61

$44.20

$54.79 H H H H H H H D N

$26.20 $28.31 $30.43

$33.09 $36.25 $39.43

$39.97 $44.19 $48.43

$46.99

$60.74

$74.48 X X H H H H H D Y

$28.56 $30.48 $32.39 $34.32 $36.23 $38.16 $40.07 $42.00 $43.91

$35.43 $38.04 $40.64 $43.25 $45.85 $48.47 $51.06 $53.69 $56.28

$42.30 $45.60 $48.88 $52.19 $55.47 $58.78 $62.06 $65.37 $68.65

10/15/2012

10/15/2012

TM247-6 10/15/2012

Plasterer Plasterer

PL16-1 10/23/2012

Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year

Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder

PL-85-Z2

10/14/2013

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months 9th & 10th 6 months

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 23 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 24 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Roofer Commercial Roofer

RO-149-NL

$29.18

$38.00

$46.81 X X X X X X X D Y

$18.02 $21.34 $22.55 $23.76 $24.97 $26.20

$23.08 $26.68 $28.45 $30.23 $32.00 $33.79

$28.14 $32.02 $34.35 $36.69 $39.02 $41.39

$42.26

$57.09

$71.91 H H H H H H H D N

$40.73

$54.79

$68.85 H H H H H H H D N

$45.28

$59.06

$72.84 H H D H H H D D Y

$15.21 $17.67 $19.49 $21.92 $23.75 $26.19 $28.01 $30.45

$20.46 $23.58 $26.06 $29.14 $31.63 $34.72 $37.20 $40.30

$25.71 $29.49 $32.62 $36.36 $39.51 $43.26 $46.39 $50.15

8/18/2008

Straight time is not to exceed ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. Apprentice Rates: Apprentice 1 Apprentice 2 Apprentice 3 Apprentice 4 Apprentice 5 Apprentice 6

Sewer Relining Class I-Operator of audio visual CCTV system including remote in-ground cutter and other equipment used in conjunction with CCTV system.

Class II-Operator of hot water heaters and circulation system; water jetters; and vacuum and mechanical debris removal systems and those assisting.

Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker 4 10s allowed as consecutive days, M-Th or T-F

SR-I 5/6/2014

SR-II 5/6/2014

SHM-7-3 10/22/2012

Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 24 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 25 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sprinkler Fitter Sprinkler Fitter

SP 669

$46.51

$61.99

$77.47 H H H H H H H D Y

$23.44 $29.35 $30.93 $35.50 $37.07 $38.65 $40.22 $41.79 $43.36

$31.31 $37.75 $40.12 $45.47 $47.83 $50.20 $52.55 $54.91 $57.27

$39.17 $46.15 $49.31 $55.45 $58.59 $61.75 $64.89 $68.03 $71.17

$32.94

$42.20

$51.45 H H H H H H H D Y

$26.46 $27.39 $28.31 $29.24 $30.16 $31.09

$32.47 $33.87 $35.25 $36.65 $38.03 $39.42

$38.49 $40.35 $42.19 $44.05 $45.89 $47.75

$41.92

$37.85

H H H H H H H H Y

$41.82

$37.70

H H H H H H H H Y

$41.35

$38.08

H H H H H H H H Y

9/17/2009

Apprentice Rates: Class 1 & 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 Class 7 Class 8 Class 9 Class 10

Tile Finisher Tile, Terrazzo, Marble Finisher

BR9-40-TW 3/8/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours

Truck Driver of all trucks of 8 cubic yd capacity or over

TM-RB2

of all trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or less (except dump trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or over, tandem axle trucks, transit mix and semis, euclid type equipment, double bottoms and low boys)

TM-RB2A

on euclid type equipment

TM-RB2B

8/8/2013

8/8/2013

8/8/2013

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 25 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 26 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class I Construction Laborer

LAUC-Z4-1

$32.52

$42.35

$52.17 X X X X X X X D Y

$28.17 $29.04 $29.91 $31.65

$35.83 $37.13 $38.43 $41.05

$43.47 $45.21 $46.95 $50.43

$32.65

$42.54

$52.43 X X X X X X X D Y

$28.27 $29.14 $30.02 $31.77

$35.97 $37.28 $38.60 $41.23

$43.67 $45.41 $47.17 $50.67

$32.76

$42.71

$52.65 X X X X X X X D Y

$28.35 $29.23 $30.11 $31.88

$36.09 $37.41 $38.73 $41.39

$43.83 $45.59 $47.35 $50.89

$32.83

$42.81

$52.79 X X X X X X X D Y

$28.40 $29.29 $30.17 $31.94

$36.17 $37.51 $38.83 $41.48

$43.93 $45.71 $47.47 $51.01

9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class II Mortar and material mixer, concrete form man, signal man, well point man, manhole, headwall and catch basin builder, guard rail builders, headwall, seawall, breakwall, dock builder and fence erector.

LAUC-Z4-2 9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class III Air, gasoline and electric tool operator, vibrator operator, LAUC-Z4-3 drillers, pump man, tar kettle operator, bracers, rodder, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars, etc.), cement finisher, welder, pipe jacking and boring man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.), windlass and tugger man, and directional boring man.

9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class IV Trench or excavating grade man.

LAUC-Z4-4 9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 26 of 27

Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 7/7/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 10/5/2014 Page 27 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class V Pipe Layer

LAUC-Z4-5

$32.95

$42.99

$53.03 X X X X X X X D Y

$28.49 $29.38 $30.28 $32.06

$36.31 $37.64 $38.99 $41.66

$44.11 $45.89 $47.69 $51.25

$30.17

$38.82

$47.47 X X X X X X X D Y

$26.41 $27.16 $27.91 $29.42

$33.19 $34.31 $35.43 $37.70

$39.95 $41.45 $42.95 $45.97

$28.51

$36.33

$44.15 X X X X X X X D Y

$25.16 $25.83 $26.50 $27.84

$31.31 $32.31 $33.32 $35.33

$37.45 $38.79 $40.13 $42.81

9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VI Grouting man, top man assistant, audio visual television operations and all other operations in connection with closed circuit television inspection, pipe cleaning and pipe relining work & the installation and repair of water service pipe and appurtenances.

LAUC-Z4-6 9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VII Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes, flagstones etc.

LAUC-Z4-7 9/11/2013

Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours

Official Request #: 1072 Requestor: DTMB Project Description: DMVA/Camp Grayling Annual Training Center - Construct Project Number: File# 511/14284.CAK - Index# 21000 County: Crawford

Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 27 of 27

RICK. SNYDER GOVERNOR

STATE OF MICHIGAN Prevailing Wages PO Box 30476 Lansing, MI 48909 517-322-1825

Informational Sheet: Prevailing Wages on State Projects REQUIREMENTS OF THE PREVAILING WAGES ON STATE PROJECTS ACT, PUBLIC ACT 166 OF 1965 The State of Michigan determines prevailing rates pursuant to the Prevailing Wages on State Projects Act, Public Act 166 of 1965, as amended. The purpose of establishing prevailing rates is to provide minimum rates of pay that must be paid to workers on construction projects for which the state or a school district is the contracting agent and which is financed or financially supported by the state. By law, prevailing rates are compiled from the rates contained in collectively bargained agreements which cover the locations of the state projects. The official prevailing rate schedule provides an hourly rate which includes wage and fringe benefit totals for designated construction mechanic classifications. The overtime rates also include wage and fringe benefit totals. Please pay special attention to the overtime and premium pay requirements. Prevailing wage is satisfied when wages plus fringe benefits paid to a worker are equal to or greater than the required rate. State of Michigan responsibilities under the law: •

The department establishes the prevailing rate for each classification of construction mechanic requested by a contracting agent prior to contracts being let out for bid on a state project. Contracting agent responsibilities under the law: •

If a contract is not awarded or construction does not start within 90 days of the date of the issuance of rates, a redetermination of rates must be requested by the contracting agent.



Rates for classifications needed but not provided on the Prevailing Rate Schedule, must be obtained prior to contracts being let out for bid on a state project.



The contracting agent, by written notice to the contractor and the sureties of the contractor known to the contracting agent, may terminate the contractor's right to proceed with that part of the contract, for which less than the prevailing rates have been or will be paid, and may proceed to complete the contract by separate agreement with another contractor or otherwise, and the original contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the contracting agent for any excess costs occasioned thereby. Contractor responsibilities under the law: •

Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing rates prescribed in a contract.



Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep an accurate record showing the name and occupation of and the actual wages and benefits paid to each construction mechanic employed by him in connection including certified payroll, as used in the industry, with said contract. This record shall be available for reasonable inspection by the contracting agent or the department.



Each contractor or subcontractor is separately liable for the payment of the prevailing rate to its employees.



The prime contractor is responsible for advising all subcontractors of the requirement to pay the prevailing rate prior to commencement of work.



The prime contractor is secondarily liable for payment of prevailing rates that are not paid by a subcontractor.



A construction mechanic shall only be paid the apprentice rate if registered with the United States Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training and the rate is included in the contract. Enforcement: A person who has information of an alleged prevailing wage violation on a state project may file a complaint with the State of Michigan. The department will investigate and attempt to resolve the complaint informally. During the course of an investigation, if the requested records and posting certification are not made available in compliance with Section 5 of Act 166, the investigation will be concluded and a referral to the Office of Attorney General for civil action will be made. The Office of Attorney General will pursue costs and fees associated with a lawsuit if filing is necessary to obtain records.

(06/11)

Page 1 of 1

STATE OF MICHIGAN

RICK. SNYDER GOVERNOR

Prevailing Wages PO Box 30476 Lansing, MI 48909 517-322-1825

Informational Sheet: Prevailing Wages on State Projects General Information Regarding Fringe Benefits Certain fringe benefits may be credited toward the payment of the Prevailing Wage Rate: o o o

If a fringe benefit is paid directly to a construction mechanic If a fringe benefit contribution or payment is made on behalf of a construction mechanic If a fringe benefit, which may be provided to a construction mechanic, is pursuant to a written contract or policy If a fringe benefit is paid into a fund, for a construction mechanic

o When a fringe benefit is not paid by an hourly rate, the hourly credit will be calculated based on the annual value of the fringe benefit divided by 2080 hours per year (52 weeks @ 40 hours per week). The following is an example of the types of fringe benefits allowed and how an hourly credit is calculated: Vacation Dental insurance Vision insurance Health insurance Life insurance Tuition Bonus 401k Employer Contribution Total Hourly Credit

40 hours X $14.00 per hour = $560/2080 = $31.07 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $372.84 /2080 = $5.38 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $64.56/2080 = $230.00 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $2,760.00/2080 = $27.04 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $324.48/2080 = $500.00 annual cost/2080 = 4 quarterly bonus/year x $250 = $1000.00/2080 = $2000.00 total annual contribution/2080 =

$.27 $.18 $.03 $1.33 $.16 $.24 $.48 $.96 $3.65

Other examples of the types of fringe benefits allowed: ƒ Sick pay ƒ Holiday pay ƒ Accidental Death & Dismemberment insurance premiums The following are examples of items that will not be credited toward the payment of the Prevailing Wage Rate: o Legally required payments, such as: ƒ Unemployment Insurance payments ƒ Workers’ Compensation Insurance payments ƒ FICA (Social Security contributions, Medicare contributions) o Reimbursable expenses, such as: ƒ Clothing allowance or reimbursement ƒ Uniform allowance or reimbursement ƒ Gas allowance or reimbursement ƒ Travel time or payment ƒ Meals or lodging allowance or reimbursement ƒ Per diem allowance or payment o Other payments to or on behalf of a construction mechanic that are not wages or fringe benefits, such as: ƒ Industry advancement funds ƒ Financial or material loans

(06/11)

Page 1 of 1

State of Michigan DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS MICHIGAN OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION MARTHA B. YODER DIRECTOR

OVERTIME PROVISIONS for MICHIGAN PREVAILING WAGE RATE COMMERCIAL SCHEDULE 1.

Overtime is represented as a nine character code. Each character represents a certain period of time after the first 8 hours Monday thru Friday. Monday thru Friday First 8 Hours

Saturday

Sunday & Holidays

Four 10s

4

9th Hour

1

5

10th Hour

2

6

Over 10 hours

3

7

8

9

Overtime for Monday thru Friday after 8 hours: the 1st character is for time worked in the 9th hour (8.1 - 9 hours) the 2nd character is for time worked in the 10th hour (9.1 - 10 hours) the 3rd character is for time worked beyond the 10th hour (10.1 and beyond) Overtime on Saturday: the 4th character is for time worked in the first 8 hours on Saturday (0 - 8 hours) the 5th character is for time worked in the 9th hour on Saturday (8.1 - 9 hours) the 6th character is for time worked in the 10th hour (9.1 - 10 hours) the 7th character is for time worked beyond the 10th hour (10.01 and beyond) Overtime on Sundays & Holidays The 8th character is for time worked on Sunday or on a holiday Four Ten Hour Days The 9th character indicates if an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can be worked between Monday and Friday without paying overtime after 8 hours worked, unless otherwise noted in the rate schedule. To utilize a 4 ten workweek, notice is required from the employer to employee prior to the start of work on the project. 2. Overtime Indicators Used in the Overtime Provision: H - means TIME AND ONE-HALF due X - means TIME AND ONE-HALF due after 40 HOURS worked D - means DOUBLE PAY due Y - means YES an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can be worked without paying overtime after 8 hours worked N - means NO an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can not be worked without paying overtime after 8 hours worked 3. EXAMPLES: HHHHHHHDN - This example shows that the 1½ rate must be used for time worked after 8 hours Monday thru Friday (characters 1 - 3); for all hours worked on Saturday, 1½ rate is due (characters 4 - 7). Work done on Sundays or holidays must be paid double time (character 8). The N (character 9) indicates that 4 ten-hour days is not an acceptable workweek at regular pay. XXXHHHHDY - This example shows that the 1½ rate must be used for time worked after 40 hours are worked Monday thru Friday (characters 1-3); for hours worked on Saturday, 1½ rate is due (characters 4 – 7). Work done on Sundays or holidays must be paid double time (character 8). The Y (character 9) indicates that 4 ten-hour days is an acceptable alternative workweek. LARA is an equal opportunity employer. Auxiliary aids, services and other reasonable accommodations are available upon request to individuals with disabilities. Wage & Hour Division 7150 HARRIS DRIVE  P.O. BOX 30476  LANSING, MICHIGAN 48909 www.michigan.gov/wagehour  Phone : (517) 322-1825

ENGINEERS - CLASSES OF EQUIPMENT LIST UNDERGROUND ENGINEERS

HAZARDOUS WASTE ABATEMENT ENGINEERS

CLASS I

CLASS I

Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clam-Shell, Concrete Paver (2 drums or larger), Conveyor Loader (Euclid type), Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, End Loader, Gradall (and similar type machine), Grader, Power Shovel, Roller (asphalt), Scraper (self propelled or tractor drawn), Side Broom Tractor (type D-4 or larger), Slope Paver, Trencher (over 8’ digging capacity), Well Drilling Rig, Mechanic, Slip Form Paver, Hydro Excavator.

Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Breaker when attached to hoe, Concrete Cleaning Decontamination Machine Operator, Concrete Pump, Concrete Paver, Crusher, Dozer, Elevating Grader, Endloader, Farm Tractor (90 h.p. and higher), Gradall, Grader, Heavy Equipment Robotics Operator, Hydro Excavator, Loader, Pug Mill, Pumpcrete Machines, Pump Trucks, Roller, Scraper (self-propelled or tractor drawn), Side Boom Tractor, Slip Form Paver, Slope Paver, Trencher, Ultra High Pressure Waterjet Cutting Tool System Operator, Vactors, Vacuum Blasting Machine Operator, Vertical Lifting Hoist, Vibrating Compaction Equipment (self-propelled), and Well Drilling Rig.

CLASS II Boom Truck (power swing type boom), Crusher, Hoist, Pump (1 or more 6" discharge or larger gas or diesel powered by generator of 300 amps or more, inclusive of generator), Side Boom Tractor (smaller than type D-4 or equivalent), Tractor (pneu-tired, other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher (8’ digging capacity and smaller), Vac Truck.

CLASS III Air Compressors (600 cfm or larger), Air Compressors (2 or more less than 600 cfm), Boom Truck (non-swinging, non-powered type boom), Concrete Breaker (self-propelled or truck mounted, includes compressor), Concrete Paver (1 drum, ½ yard or larger), Elevator (other than passenger), Maintenance Man, Mechanic Helper, Pump (2 or more 4" up to 6" discharge, gas or diesel powered, excluding submersible pump), Pumpcrete Machine (and similar equipment), Wagon Drill Machine, Welding Machine or Generator (2 or more 300 amp or larger, gas or diesel powered).

CLASS IV Boiler, Concrete Saw (40HP or over), Curing Machine (self-propelled), Farm Tractor (w/attachment), Finishing Machine (concrete), Firemen, Hydraulic Pipe Pushing Machine, Mulching Equipment, Oiler (2 or more up to 4", exclude submersible), Pumps (2 or more up to 4" discharge if used 3 hrs or more a day-gas or diesel powered, excluding submersible pumps), Roller (other than asphalt), Stump Remover, Vibrating Compaction Equipment (6’ wide or over), Trencher (service) Sweeper (Wayne type and similar equipment), Water Wagon, Extend-a-Boom Forklift.

CLASS II Air Compressor, Concrete Breaker when not attached to hoe, Elevator, End Dumps, Equipment Decontamination Operator, Farm Tractor (less than 90 h.p.), Forklift, Generator, Heater, Mulcher, Pigs (Portable Reagent Storage Tanks), Power Screens, Pumps (water), Stationary Compressed Air Plant, Sweeper, Water Wagon and Welding Machine.

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project#1310110.2

SECTION 01 5723 – SOIL EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

1.3

Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" regarding dewatering and drains. DEFINITIONS

A.

Best Management Practice (BMP): Structural, Vegetative, or managerial practice used to treat, prevent, or reduce water pollution.

B.

Stabilized: The proper placement, grading, and/or covering of soil or rock to insure their resistance to soil erosion, sliding, or other earth movement.

C.

Certified Storm Water Operator: An individual who has been certified by the Michigan Department of Environmental Quality, pursuant to the provisions of section 3110 of Part 31 of 1994 PA 451, as properly qualified to operate treatment or control facilities for storm water discharges.

1.4

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1. Minimum control required per plan sheet. 2. Additional unforeseen measures shall be implemented as needed or as outlined in the permit.

B.

Scheduling: 1. Establish an inspection and maintenance table (reference table on drawings) 2. Applicable BMP’s shall be implemented as needed. 3. Clean Up: Within one week after BMP is no longer needed.

SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

01 5723 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project#1310110.2

C.

Staging: 1. Construction planning shall be designed to minimize the amount and duration of exposed soil at any given time.

D.

Responsibilities: 1. It is the Contractors responsibility to obtain the Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control permit. 2. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain the controls in accordance with the requirements of the permitting agency and as otherwise deemed necessary during construction, until permanent restoration has been established. 3. The Contractor will engage a certified storm water operator in accordance with EPA Phase II rules to meet the requirements of the permit. This operator will inspect the job site as required by rule, notify job site superintendent of any deficiencies and enter findings in the job site inspection log book.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SILT FENCE MATERIALS A.

2.2

MDOT 916.02 CATCH BASIN MATERIALS

A. 2.3

AND

EXISTING

DRAINAGE

STRUCTURE

PROTECTION

Dandy Bag by Dandy Products, Inc. or approved equal. EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS

A.

1:4 Slopes 1. North American Green – DS75 single net short term blanket or approved equal.

B.

1:3 and 1:2 Slopes, Ditches, and Swales 1. North American Green – S150BN double net biodegradable blanket or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PERFORMANCE A.

Site Preparation: 1. Protect existing drainage structures from sediment-laden runoff.

SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

01 5723 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project#1310110.2

B.

Construction Sequencing: 1. Install all temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures in accordance with the approved plan and special permit conditions. 2. Inspect job site at least weekly and after every rainfall event to evaluate the effectiveness of the control measures. 3. Maintain all temporary and permanent control measures per plan or as needed based on the site inspections.

C.

Site Stabilization: 1. Maintain temporary control measures until not needed or site is stabilized. 2. Contractor shall begin repairs to damaged control measures or begin implementing required control measures within 24 hours of notification from Storm Water Operator or Authorized Public Agency. 3. Permanent control measures for all disturbed land shall be completed within 15 calendar days after the final earth change has been completed.

D.

Erosion Control Blanket: 1. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION 01 5723

SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

01 5723 - 3

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings Camp Grayling Grayling, Michigan

Submitted to:

Mr. Richard Bromfield Tower Pinkster Titus Associates, Inc. 242 East Kalamazoo Avenue Suite 200 Kalamazoo, Michigan 49007

Prepared by:

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC One Madison Avenue Cadillac, Michigan 49601

July 29, 2008

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1. Wilcox Professional Services, LLC conducted a subsurface investigation and subsequent geotechnical evaluation for the proposed Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings at Camp Grayling near Grayling, MI. The purpose of this subsurface investigation was to determine the soil conditions at the site, evaluate and analyze the conditions, and provide information to be used in the foundation design for the proposed structures. The subsurface investigation included reconnaissance of the project site and drilling/sampling 9 soil borings to depths of 16.5 and 21.5 feet (ft) below the existing ground surface (bgs). In general, reddish brown, fine sand underlain by loose to medium dense, light brown, fine to medium sand was encountered at each boring location. The reddish brown sand ranged in depth from 1.5 to 3 ft bgs while the light brown sand extended to the boring termination depths. During drilling, groundwater was encountered in soil boring SB-3 at 20.5 ft bgs. 2. Both these sites were relatively open with the exception of some trees at southeast portions of the Target Maintenance building. Both one-story buildings will be steel and masonry construction. The Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings have finish floor elevations set at 1170.0 and 1192.0, respectively. Based on current site grades, proposed footings for the Target Maintenance Building will be placed on loose sand. At the Simulation Building, portions of the footing will be placed on newly placed fill and loose sand. The proposed building layout varies as shown on the appended Boring Location Plan. 3. A shallow foundation system, with spread and continuous footings was analyzed with the loads provided to Wilcox by JDH Engineering, Inc. Based on the soil conditions and proposed loading, a shallow spread footing foundation support is feasible at both building locations. The Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings footings can be designed utilizing a net allowable bearing pressure of 3000 and 2000 lb/ft2, respectively if founded on approved native material or engineered fill. In utilizing the above recommendations, it is estimated that total and differential settlements for the footings should be one inch or less and one-half inch, respectively. 4. Additional foundation, floor slab, and construction considerations are discussed further in the report. Questions regarding the soil conditions or geotechnical recommendations often arise during design and construction. Please contact Wilcox at your convenience if we can provide further assistance. We appreciate this opportunity to provide geotechnical engineering services and look forward to working with you on the construction phase of the project. Sincerely, WILCOX PROFESSIONAL SERVICES, LLC

Erron J. Peuse, E.I.T. Geotechnical Engineer

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Chris D. Johnecheck, P.E. Geotechnical Engineer

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .............................................................................................................. 2 1.0

INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 4 1.1 1.2

2.0

FIELD EXPLORATION & LABORATORY TESTING ...................................................... 5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

3.0

General Project Description.................................................................................................9 Soil Properties for Design....................................................................................................9 Foundation Recommendations............................................................................................9 Floor Slabs.........................................................................................................................10 Additional Investigation......................................................................................................10

CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS.......................................................................... 11 6.1 6.2

7.0

General Site Grading...........................................................................................................8 Proofrolling and Backfill Compaction...................................................................................8

FOUNDATION DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................... 9 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5

6.0

General ................................................................................................................................7 Soil Conditions.....................................................................................................................7 Groundwater Observations..................................................................................................7

SITE PREPARATION ....................................................................................................... 8 4.1 4.2

5.0

General ................................................................................................................................5 Drilling and Sampling Procedures .......................................................................................5 Field Tests and Measurements ...........................................................................................5 Laboratory Testing...............................................................................................................6

DESCRIPTION OF SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS .......................................................... 7 3.1 3.2 3.3

4.0

General ................................................................................................................................4 Site Description ...................................................................................................................4

Excavations .......................................................................................................................11 Groundwater Control .........................................................................................................11

SUMMARY...................................................................................................................... 12

TABLE: Table 1: Summary of Soil Properties ........................................................................................... 9 APPENDIX • Site Location Map • Boring Location Plans • Excavation for Footings in Unsuitable Soils • General Notes • Soil Boring Logs

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 3

1.0

INTRODUCTION

1.1

General This report presents the results of a geotechnical investigation conducted for the proposed structures at Camp Grayling, Michigan. The proposed structures include a Simulation Building and Target Maintenance Building. The purpose of this study was to determine and evaluate the subsurface conditions existing at the site, and establish related parameters for use by the contractors and designers. Included are the results of the subsurface investigation and recommendations regarding the design and construction of the proposed buildings foundation system. The scope of the geotechnical work consists of:

1.2



A reconnaissance of the immediate site



A subsurface exploration consisting of 9 soil borings



Field and laboratory testing



A geotechnical engineering analysis of the soils encountered in the field and evaluation of the proposed structure foundation



Recommendations for the proposed building foundations

Site Description 1.2.1

Site Location The site is located approximately five miles southwest of Grayling, Michigan. More specifically, the project is located on the Camp Grayling Military Reservation on the southwest side of Lake Margrethe. See appended Site Location Map.

1.2.2

Site Topography and Drainage The surface of the Target Maintenance Building site is gently sloping with the high point in the north portion of the site, approximate elevation 1194. The existing ground surface, in the vicinity of the proposed building locations slopes from approximate elevation 1194 to 1190 providing 4 ft of relief. At the Simulation Building, the site is gradually sloping south to north with elevations varying in the proposed building pad from 1169 to 1162. See the appended Boring Location Plans for site contours. The ground cover across both sites is predominantly grass and weeds with a wooded area on the eastern third of the Target Maintenance Building site. Both sites have adjacent structures and underground and overhead utilities. It should be noted that several underground utilities are present within the building footprint of the Simulation Building.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 4

2.0

FIELD EXPLORATION & LABORATORY TESTING

2.1

General A field exploratory program was undertaken to determine the engineering characteristics of the foundation materials and assess their suitability. The field investigation included drilling 9 soil borings, performing standard penetration tests, and obtaining samples retained on the standard split-spoon sampler. The apparent groundwater level at each boring location, if encountered during drilling, was also determined.

2.2

Drilling and Sampling Procedures The borings were drilled with an all-terrain Diedrich D-90 drill rig equipped with a rotary head. Conventional, continuous flight, 3.25 inch diameter (ID) hollow-stem augers were used to advance the borings. Representative samples were obtained employing split-barrel sampling techniques in general accordance with ASTM Procedure D-1586 utilizing a 140 pound automatic drop hammer. After completion of boring operations, the holes were backfilled with soil cuttings.

2.3

Field Tests and Measurements 2.3.1

Standard Penetration Tests During the sampling procedure, Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) were performed at regular intervals to obtain the standard penetration value of the soil. The SPT value (“N” Value) is defined as the number of blows a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches is required to advance a two inch O.D., split-barrel sampler a distance of one foot into the soil. These values provide a useful preliminary indication of the consistency or relative density of most soil deposits, and therefore provide a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. The results of the SPT tests are included on the Soil Boring Logs located in Appendix of this report.

2.3.2

Water Level Measurements Groundwater observations were made during drilling operations and if encountered are noted on the boring logs.

2.3.3

Soil Boring Locations and Elevations Existing ground surface elevations were provided from a survey conducted by Wilcox. During the survey, the proposed building corners were staked and the soil borings were located from these staked locations. The soil depths discussed in this report are referenced from the existing ground surface at the time of boring operations.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 5

2.4

Laboratory Testing In addition to field investigations, a supplemental laboratory investigation was conducted to ascertain additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the foundation materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the proposed buildings. The laboratory program consisted of visual classification on all collected samples. Soil samples obtained from SPT’s were placed in sealed glass sample jars and are stored at Wilcox in Cadillac. The soil samples will be retained for 60 days after the issue of this report. After this date the soil samples will be discarded.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 6

3.0

DESCRIPTION OF SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

3.1

General The types of foundation materials encountered at the test boring locations have been visually classified and are described on the Soil Boring Logs. The lines delineating the changes in strata on the logs represent an approximate boundary between the various soil classifications. It must be recognized that the soil descriptions are considered representative for the specific soil boring location, and variations may occur between the sampling intervals and boring locations. A summary of the major soil profile components and groundwater conditions is provided in the following section.

3.2

Soil Conditions In general, topsoil was encountered at both sites and ranged from 2 to 10 inches thick. •

Stratum 1 – (Reddish Brown Sand): Beneath the surficial topsoil layer, reddish brown sand was encountered in SB-1 through SB-7. This layer’s depth ranged from 1.5 to 3 ft bgs. •

Stratum 2 – (Light Brown SAND): Underlying Stratum 1, light brown, fine to medium sand was observed and extended to the boring termination depth. The sand was damp to wet and had a relative density classification of very loose to medium dense. N-values tended to increase with depth and ranged from 4 to 14 blows per foot.

A more detailed description and supporting data for each boring location can be found on the individual Soil Boring Logs in the Appendix.

3.3

Groundwater Observations Groundwater was encountered during drilling in soil boring SB-3 at a depth of 20.5 ft bgs. The exact location of the water table may fluctuate somewhat depending upon variations in precipitation and surface runoff.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 7

4.0

SITE PREPARATION

4.1

General Site Grading Excessively organic topsoil and loose dumped fill materials will generally undergo high volume changes which are detrimental to the behavior of floor slabs, structural fills and foundations placed upon them. Therefore, it is recommended that all topsoil and loose material be stripped from construction areas and wasted or stockpiled for later use. Test borings indicate topsoil layer thickness is from 2 to 10 inches. Existing utilities are present at the Simulation Building location. It is recommended that these utilities be removed in areas where new construction is planned. Voids left by this removal should be backfilled and compacted in accordance with Section 4.2.

4.2

Proofrolling and Backfill Compaction After the excavation and stripping is complete, the site should be compacted with an appropriately sized vibratory roller. A proofroll should be completed on the compacted subgrade with approved equipment (fully loaded tandem axle dump truck). The proofrolling will determine where loose, unsuitable materials are encountered (rutting greater than 3 to 4 inches). If pockets of loose materials are encountered, these soils should be removed and recompacted. It is recommended that a qualified representative of the geotechnical engineer be present for this phase of this project. After the existing subgrade soils are stripped and proofrolled, the placement and compaction of fill for structural applications should be monitored and tested by a qualified representative of the geotechnical engineer. Fill materials should be free of organic matter, rubble, cobbles greater than 3 inches, and other deleterious material. It is recommended that fill or backfill materials used for structural support consist of clean granular soils, meeting MDOT Class II requirements. The light brown sand noted in our soil borings should meet these requirements and can be utilized as engineered fill. The fill material should be placed in layers not to exceed eight inches in loose thickness and should be watered as required to secure specified compaction. Each layer should be uniformly compacted with appropriate compaction methods. The fill should be compacted to the specified percent of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM Density Test D-1557 (95% below all structural areas or structural influenced areas). Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate that the specified compaction limits are not obtained; the areas represented by such tests should be reworked and retested as required until the specified limits are reached. Following these recommendations will minimize volume changes and differential settlements which are detrimental to behavior of shallow foundations and floor slabs.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 8

5.0

FOUNDATION DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

5.1

General Project Description The proposed project consists of constructing two separate buildings; described as the Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings. It is understood that the buildings will be one story and comprised of steel and masonry construction. Preliminary design concepts call for the structure to be supported by a conventional shallow foundation system, consisting of spread and continuous footings. The approximate size and location of the proposed buildings are illustrated on the enclosed Boring Location Plans located in the Appendix of this report. The structures will be constructed as slab-on-grade with finish floor elevations at or above the existing grade. For our analysis, it is assumed that the structures will be lightly loaded with structural loads transferred to the soil by conventional spread footings. JDH Engineering, Inc, the structural engineer, provided maximum column loads for the Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings of 50 kips and 100 kips, respectively. It was reported the perimeter foundation walls will be isolated from the floor slab and may support a 4 ft tall masonry wall façade. In our analysis, it was assumed that the wall load would not exceed 3 k/lf. If design loads exceed these values, the geotechnical engineer should be notified so that changes to the recommendations can be made, if necessary.

5.2

Soil Properties for Design Soil properties were estimated based on the resistance to drilling equipment, prior experience with similar materials and laboratory testing. The following material properties were estimated for the soils influenced by the proposed building foundations. Each boring was analyzed and had specific soil properties assigned to it depending on encountered conditions. Table 1 shows the typical values used for analysis. Table 1: Summary of Soil Properties Material Property

Loose Sand

Engineered Sand Fill

Unit Weight lb/ft3 (moist)

110

125

Friction Angle (degrees)

28

32

Elastic Soil Modulus (psf)

150,000 to 200,000

350,000

Note: The soil properties were either estimated based on published materials or obtained from field testing.

5.3

Foundation Recommendations In view of the subsurface conditions encountered in the test borings, together with the structural loading criteria and development grades anticipated, the use of a conventional foundation system is recommended for support of the proposed buildings. The Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings spread and continuous footings can be designed utilizing a net allowable bearing pressure of 3000 and 2000 lb/ft2, respectively if founded on approved native material or engineered fill. Minimum size spread and continuous footings should be 30 in by 30 in square and

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 9

18 inches wide, respectively. To reduce the effects of frost action, all exterior foundations should be founded a minimum of 3.5 ft below the final grade. 5.3.1

5.4

Foundation Inspection-Testing & Backfill During footing excavation, it is recommended that all foundation excavations be inspected by a representative of the geotechnical engineer to ensure that the materials at the base of the footings are suitable. Once footing trenches are excavated, Housel Penetration tests are recommended to confirm the soils characteristics are similar to those assumed in our analysis. If during footing excavation, unsuitable soil is encountered, undercutting and placement of engineered fill should be in accordance to the Site Preparation section of this report and the appended Excavation for Footings in Unsuitable Soil diagram.

Floor Slabs The floors for the proposed buildings may be constructed as a slab-on-grade supported by the natural sandy soil and/or engineered fill. Prior to the placement of the concrete floor, or before any floor supporting fill is placed; the subgrade should be prepared in accordance with the Site Preparation section of this report. The floor slab should be suitably reinforced and proper joints should be provided at the junctions of the slab and foundation system so that a small amount of independent movement can occur without causing damage. Large floor areas should be provided with joints at frequent intervals to compensate for concrete volume changes.

5.5

Additional Investigation Based on review of the most recent site plan, it appears that the Simulation Building has shifted approximately 60 ft. northerly of where we originally drilled. To verify soils at this location are consistent with our current borings, it is recommended that a qualified representative of the geotechnical engineer be present during the excavation for the foundation.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 10

6.0

CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS

6.1

Excavations All excavations should comply with OSHA’s current requirements for excavations. Reference to this OSHA requirement should be included in the job specifications. Bracing of the trenches and or sloping of the excavations will be necessary for trenches that extend greater than 4 ft below grade. At no time should the excavation spoil material be placed directly adjacent to the excavation.

6.2

Groundwater Control Groundwater was encountered during drilling in soil boring SB-3 at a depth of 20.5 ft bgs. Therefore, difficulties due to groundwater during footing excavation or cutting and filling operations are not anticipated. Site runoff and discharge water should be diverted away from the foundation and directed towards on-site retention areas, natural drainage ways or sewer systems.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 11

7.0

SUMMARY A subsurface investigation and evaluation of the foundation conditions has been conducted for the proposed Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings at Camp Grayling near Grayling, Michigan. Foundation design criteria have been recommended and possible design and construction problems have been discussed. The exploration and analysis of the foundation conditions reported herein is considered sufficient in detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for final design. The recommendations submitted are based on the available soil information and conceptual design details furnished by the designers for this project. Any revisions in the plans for the proposed building from those enumerated in this report should be brought to the attention of the geotechnical engineer. It is recommended that earthwork and foundation operations are monitored by the geotechnical engineer, to test and evaluate the soils allowable bearing pressure, and the selection, placement and compaction of controlled fills. This geotechnical study has been conducted in a manner consistent with the level of care ordinarily exercised by members of the profession currently practicing in the same locality under similar conditions. The findings, recommendations, and opinions contained herein have been promulgated in accordance with generally accepted practice in the fields of foundation engineering, soils mechanics, and engineering geology. No other representations, expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended in this report.

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Page 12

APPENDIX Site Location Map Boring Location Plan Excavation for Footings in Unsuitable Soils General Notes Soil Boring Logs

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC

SITE LOCATION MAP

Project Location

Prepared For: Tower Pinkster Titus Associates, Inc. Kalamazoo, Michigan

Prepared By: Wilcox Professional Services, LLC Cadillac, Michigan

Project Name: Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings Grayling, Michigan

Project No: 51098.00003

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Date: July, 2008

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC

DATE

AUGUST 1, 2008

PROJECT TITLE

CAMP GRAYLING SIMULATION BUILDING

ISSUED FOR

DATE

ISSUED FOR

DATE

SHEET TITLE

BORING LOCATION PLAN

SHEET NUMBER

C 001 08-124.00

DATE

AUGUST 1, 2008

SB-9 PROJECT TITLE

CAMP GRAYLING TARGET STORAGE MAINTENANCE BUILDING

ISSUED FOR

DATE

DATE

ISSUED FOR

BID DOCUMENTS

AUGUST 1, 2008

SHEET TITLE

BORING LOCATION PLAN

SHEET NUMBER

C 001 08-123.00

EXCAVATION FOR FOOTINGS IN UNSUITABLE SOILS

Prepared For: Tower Pinkster Titus Associates, Inc. Kalamazoo, Michigan

Prepared By: Wilcox Professional Services LLC Cadillac, Michigan

Project Name: Simulation and Target Maintenance Buildings Grayling, Michigan

Project No: 51098.00003

ISO 9001:2000 Certified Company P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\Geotech Report.doc

Date: July, 2008

Wilcox Professional Services, LLC

GENERAL NOTES FOR SOIL CHARACTERIZATION Soil Property Symbols N: Standard Penetration Resistance (ASTM D-1586). Blows of a 140-lb hammer falling 30 inches required to drive a 2 inch O.D. split-spoon sampler (except where otherwise noted) 1 foot into the soil. Qu :

Controlled strain unconfined compressive strength, tsf (ASTM D-2166)

w:

Water Content, % (ASTM D-2216)

LL:

Liquid Limit, % (ASTM D-4318)

Qp :

Calibrated hand penetrometer unconfined compressive strength, tsf

PL:

Plastic Limit, % (ASTM D-4318)

Pl:

Plasticity Index, % (ASTM D-4318)

St:

Calibrated Torvane shear strength, tsf

PID:

Photoionization detection values, ppm

γ:

Natural Unit Weight, pcf

LOI:

Loss on Ignition, %

Drilling and Sampling Symbols B-#:

Boring

#-PS: Probe Sample

MW-#: Monitoring Well

#-RC: Rock Core Sample

#-SS: Split-spoon Sample

#-GS: Grab Sample

#-ST:

#-PMT Pressuremeter Test

Shelby Tube Sample

#-AS: Auger Sample

NR:

No Recovery

#-GW: Groundwater Sample

DS:

Disturbed Sample

#-WS: Wash Sample

DR:

Drove Rock

Sample Classification Samples visually classified based upon guidance provided by ASTM Standard D-2488 and the Unified Soil Classification System. Particle Size

Constituent Terms (Structures/Minor Constituents)

Boulders: Greater than 12” (305 mm) Cobbles: 3” to 12” (76 mm to 305 mm) Coarse Gravel: 3/4” to 3” (19 mm to 76 mm) Fine Gravel: #4 to 3/4” (4.76 mm to 19 mm) Coarse Sand: #10 to #4 (2.00 mm to 4.76 mm) Medium Sand: #40 to #10 (0.425 mm to 2.00 mm) Fine Sand: #200 to #40 (0.075 mm to 0.425 mm) Silt: 0.005 mm to 0.075 mm Clay: Less than 0.005 mm

Relative Density and Consistency GRANULAR SOILS

Trace: 0 - 5% (Clay) 0 – 15% (Sand) With: >5% to 15% (Clay) >15% – 30% (Sand) >15% (clay) & >30% (sand): Move descriptor to front of major constituent (i.e. Clayey SAND, Sandy CLAY) Parting: Less than 3/8” thick Lens: 3/8” to 4” thick Layer: Greater than 4” thick Occasional: Occurs once or less per 12” thickness Frequent: Occurs more than once per 12” thickness STANDARD PENETRATION (N) VALUE, BLOWS/FOOT

Very Loose ..................................................................................................0- 4 Loose ....................................................................................................... 5 - 10 Medium Dense ......................................................................................... 11 - 29 Dense....................................................................................................... 30 - 49 Very Dense ........................................................................................50 and Greater

COHESIVE SOILS

UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (Qu or Qp), tsf

Very Soft ............................................................................................ Less than 0.25 Soft........................................................................................................ 0.25 - 0.49 Medium Stiff .......................................................................................... 0.50 - 0.99 Stiff........................................................................................................ 1.00 - 1.99 Very Stiff ............................................................................................... 2.00 - 3.99 Hard ......................................................................................................4.00 – 8.00 Very Hard.........................................................................................Greater than 8.00 P:\projects\51098\00003\Design\GeoTech\Report\General Notes.DOC

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/20/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-1 (#209) JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

(0.00, 0.33) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics (0.33, 2.50) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel (2.50, 21.50) Loose to Medium Dense, Light Brown, Damp to Moist, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel

1165.0

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1169.0

5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 3-4-4 (8) 80% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 7-3-4 (7) 80% 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 9-3-5 (8) 60%

1160.0 10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 4-4-4 (8) 80%

1155.0 15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 10-4-3 (7) 70%

1150.0 20

6SS 20 - 21.5 ft. 11-4-7 (11) 90%

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/20/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-2 (#208) JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

(0.00, 0.33) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics and Silt (0.33, 1.50) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel (1.50, 16.50) Loose, Light Brown, Damp, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel

1160.0

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1164.4

5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 2-2-4 (6) 70% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 11-4-5 (9) 70% 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 10-3-5 (8) 80%

1155.0 10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 6-4-5 (9) 60%

1150.0 15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 11-3-3 (6) 90%

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/20/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-3 (#207) JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

(0.00, 0.58) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics and Silt (0.58, 1.50) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel (1.50, 21.50) Loose to Medium Dense, Light Brown, Damp to Moist, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel

1160.0

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1164.5

5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 3-3-4 (7) 90% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 12-3-6 (9) 70% 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 10-3-5 (8) 70%

1155.0 10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 13-4-6 (10) 60%

1150.0 15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 12-5-6 (11) 90%

1145.0 20

6SS 20 - 21.5 ft. 12-4-6 (10) 80%

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: 20.5 ft. AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/20/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-4 (#210) JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

(0.00, 0.67) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics (0.67, 3.00) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt and fine Gravel (3.00, 16.50) Loose, Light Brown, Damp, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt

1165.0

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1169.2

5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 8-3-4 (7) 60% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 8-2-4 (6) 80% 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 9-3-4 (7) 70%

1160.0 10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 9-4-4 (8) 80%

1155.0 15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 10-3-3 (6) 80%

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/19/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-5 (#201) JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0

1190.0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1192.0

(0.00, 0.50) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics (0.50, 1.50) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt (1.50, 16.50) Loose to Medium Dense, Light Brown, Damp, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt

5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 3-3-5 (8) 80% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 4-4-5 (9) 90%

1185.0 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 6-6-6 (12) 80%

10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 9-5-5 (10) 80%

1180.0

15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 11-5-5 (10) 70%

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/19/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-6 (#204) JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1189.4

(0.00, 0.83) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics and Silt (0.83, 1.50) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt (1.50, 16.50) Loose, Light Brown, Damp, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 6-3-5 (8) 80%

1185.0 5

2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 8-4-6 (10) 90% 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 12-4-5 (9) 70%

1180.0 10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 11-4-5 (9) 90%

1175.0 15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 13-4-5 (9) 70%

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 6/19/08 BORING NO.: SB-7 (50' SE of #202)Page 1 of 1 JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: At staked location

0 1190.0

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1191.0

(0.00, 0.67) Very Dark Brown, Damp SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics and Silt (0.67, 1.50) Reddish Brown, Damp, fine SAND; Trace Silt (1.50, 16.50) Loose to Medium Dense, Light Brown, Damp, fine to medium SAND; Trace Silt and Organics

5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 7-2-4 (6) 70% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 10-5-10 (15) 80%

1185.0

3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 14-4-7 (11) 80%

10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 11-4-4 (8) 80%

1180.0

15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 9-7-7 (14) 60%

1175.0

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 7/17/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-9 JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: 18' E'ly & 15'' N'ly of staked NE Bldg. Corner

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1193.6

0

(0.00, 0.17) Grayish Brown, Dry SANDY TOPSOIL; Trace Organics and Silt (0.17, 21.50) Loose, Light Brown, Dry to Moist, fine SAND 1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 4-2-2 (4) 90%

1190.0 5

2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 3-3-2 (5) 90% 3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 6-4-5 (9) 80%

1185.0 10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 8-3-5 (8) 70%

1180.0 15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 8-3-4 (7) 90%

1175.0 6SS 20 - 21.5 ft. 7-3-4 (7) 80%

20

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

One Madison Ave Cadillac, MI 49601 231-775-7755 231-775-3135 fax

SOIL BORING LOG

CLIENT & PROJECT: Tower Pinkster - Camp Grayling Target Maintenance and Simulation Buildings DATE DRILLED: 7/17/08 Page 1 of 1 BORING NO.: SB-10 JOB NUMBER: 51098.00003 BORING LOCATION: 19' E'ly & 56' N'ly of staked NW Bldg. Corner

Unconfined Comp. Strength* (tsf)

Natural Unit Weight (pcf)

Material Description

Sample No. Sample Type Sample Depth SPT Results (N-Value)

Moisture %

LOGGED BY: Mark Dupuis CITY: Grayling COUNTY: Crawford Soil Type

NOTES:

Depth (ft)

DRILLER/HELPER: Bob Clark/Mark Dupuis DRILL RIG: Diedrich D-90, ATV

Elevation

METHOD OF DRILLING: 3.25" HSA - Automatic Hammer GROUND ELEVATION: 1190.8

0

(0.00, 3.00) Brown, Dry to Moist, fine SAND; Trace Silt

1190.0

(3.00, 21.50) Loose to Medium Dense, Brown, Moist, fine SAND; Trace fine Gravel 5

1SS 2.5 - 4 ft. 6-3-4 (7) 70% 2SS 5 - 6.5 ft. 5-3-3 (6) 80%

1185.0

3SS 7.5 - 9 ft. 5-4-6 (10) 70%

10

4SS 10 - 11.5 ft. 7-6-7 (13) 20%

1180.0

15

5SS 15 - 16.5 ft. 7-5-6 (11) 80%

1175.0

6SS 20 - 21.5 ft. 5-7-7 (14) 20%

20 1170.0

GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS

HOLE COLLAPSE

DURING DRILLING: NE AT COMPLETION OF DRILLING: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR NE - Not Encountered NR - Not Recorded

AT COMPLETION: NR AFTER NR HOURS: NR

BACKFILL: Soil Cuttings *LL = Liquid Limt - PI = Plasticity Index *St = Hand Torvane Shear Strength *Qp = Pocket Penetrometer *Qu = Unconfined Compression Machine

*Test Data Comments

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.

DEFINITIONS A.

Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B.

Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. Verify with Owner which items, if any, are to be salvaged.

C.

Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D.

Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

E.

Rebate: Remove existing items and save for reinstallation.

1.4

MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.

Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and shall be removed from project site.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SUBMITTALS A.

Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

B.

Predemolition: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations.

B.

Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1.

Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Owner assumes no responsibility for conditions of areas to be selectively demolished.

D.

Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

E.

Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F.

Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.

Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

WARRANTY A.

Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

REPAIR MATERIALS A.

Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. 2.

B.

If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.

Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B.

Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C.

Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D.

When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E.

Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

F.

Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A.

Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B.

Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

C.

Provide at least 72 hours’ notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a.

D.

3.3

Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.

Utility Requirements: Refer to Civil, Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical Divisions-Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. PREPARATION

A.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.

B.

Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. 2.

Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3. 4. 5. C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1.

Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material is drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

D.

Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

E.

Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1.

3.4

Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

POLLUTION CONTROLS A.

Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. 2.

B.

3.5

Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.

Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A.

General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

2.

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

B.

Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager’s requirement for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.

C.

Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

D.

Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

E.

Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

Removed and Reinstalled and/or Rebated Items: 1. 2. 3.

Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. equipment to match new equipment. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

Paint

02 4119 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

4.

F.

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A.

Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B.

Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C.

Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

D.

Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1.

E.

Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI.

Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Section "07 5419" for new roofing requirements. 1. 2.

Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.

F.

Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

G.

Hazardous Materials: Comply with all State and Federal regulations for containment, removal, and disposal. 1. Workers removing these materials are to be properly trained and certified.

3.7

PATCHING AND REPAIRS A.

General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1.

Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer’s written recommendations.

C.

Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

D.

Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 1. 2.

3. E.

3.8

Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A.

General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B.

Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C.

Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

CLEANING A.

Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

1.3

Footings. Foundation walls. Slabs-on-grade.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for Testing and Inspecting Services.

2. 3.

Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for concrete slab sealants. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.

C.

Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 318, MCP-3(06) and SP-66(04)

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

“Detailing Manual”. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D.

Welding certificates.

E.

Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

F.

Field quality-control test reports.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.

B.

Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. 2.

Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.

C.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

D.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

E.

ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2.

F.

ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FORM-FACING MATERIALS A.

Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B.

Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

C.

Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1.

D.

2.2

Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B.

Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C.

Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D.

Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.

E.

Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.

F.

Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3

REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A.

Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B.

Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

wire, plastic, or precast concrete , or fiber reinforced concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete. 2.4

CONCRETE MATERIALS A.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1.

Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

B.

Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C.

Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class: severe weathering region, but not less than 3S coarse aggregate or better, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. 2.

D. 2.5

Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. ADMIXTURES

A.

Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. (concrete mixes exposed to exterior on one or both sides – refer to Sitework Section – Concrete Paving)

B.

Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1.

High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

2.6

PERIMETER INSULATION: See Division 07 Insulation.

2.7

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. 1.

Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils thick.

2.

Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils thick

3.

Available Products:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. b. 2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Plus. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-65.

FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A.

Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

B.

Available Products: subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: a. b. c.

2.9

ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.

CURING MATERIALS A.

Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

B.

Moisture-Retaining Cover: sheet.

C.

Water: Potable.

D.

Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

E.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: a. b. c. d. e.

2.10 A.

ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

Spray-cure & Seal Plus: Chem Masters. UV Super Seal; Lambert Corporation. Lumiseal Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. CS-309/30; W. R. Meadows, Inc. Seal N Kure 30; Metalcrete Industries.

RELATED MATERIALS Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

B.

Zip Strip Control Joint Cover: Plastic two piece concrete joint cover with removable cap leave joint open for sealant installation. 1. Oscoda Plastics: Zip Strip expansion joint EXP J-007 2. W R Meadows: Snap Cap Expansion Joint Cap

C.

Bonding Agent: butadiene.

D.

Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

2.11 A.

ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

CONCRETE MIXTURES Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data basis, or both as follows: 1.

Proportional normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.

B.

Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

C.

Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

D.

Footings, Foundation Walls and Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

2.12 A.

Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.52. Exterior Concrete Only: Maximum water cement ratio of 0.48 for air-entrained concrete (refer to Sitework Section – Cement Concrete Pavement). Do not entrain air in mixes for interior slab-on-grade and other concrete not exposed to weather. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range waterreducing admixture or plasticizing admixture.

FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

FORMWORK A.

Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 318 and ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

B.

Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

3.2

EMBEDDED ITEMS A.

Anchor Rod for the pre-engineered metal building will by supplied by the building manufacturer.

B.

Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. 2.

3. 3.3

Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations and positions required. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

B. 3.4

Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

Install Vapor Retarder directly below floor slab. STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A.

General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1.

B.

Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

C.

Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D.

Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E.

Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5

JOINTS A.

General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B.

Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1.

2.

3.

Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. Form keyed joints from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. a.

4. 5. C.

Locate joints at thirty feet on center unless noted otherwise on drawings.

Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. 2.

Located joints at 15 feet on center unless noted otherwise on drawings. Grooved Joints: Contractor option of formed or grooved joints a. Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. Fill joint with sealant as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." b. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Fill joint with sealant as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.," D.

Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. 2.

3. 4. E.

3.6

Extend joint-filler strips and Zip Strip joint covers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. After curing, remove Zip Strip covers for installation of sealant.

Doweled Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A.

Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B.

Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C.

Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

D.

Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceeding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. 2.

Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete according to ACI 301. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

E.

2. 3. 4. 5.

2. 3.

When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below 40 deg F uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg Fat point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1.

2. 3.

3.7

Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.

G.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1.

F.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A.

Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1.

Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A.

General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B.

Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1.

C.

Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1.

2.

Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a.

3.

D.

Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch

Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1.

3.9

Floors with improved flatness/levelness requirements (Thin-set flooring, resilient floor covering): Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A.

Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 11

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

3.10

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A.

General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.

B.

Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

C.

Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1.

3.11 A.

LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

B.

3.12

Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven (7) days' old. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A.

Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B.

Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 12

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1.

2.

3.

Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brushcoat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance.

D.

Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

E.

Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F.

Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.13

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests and inspections and to submit reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B.

Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

Steel reinforcement placement. Steel reinforcement welding. Headed bolts and studs. Verification of use of required design mixture. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 13

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

3.

4.

5.

b.

b.

8.

9.

10.

Cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Cast and field cure set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a.

7.

When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a.

6.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a.

2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 14

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

11.

12. 13.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 15

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

1.3

Concrete masonry units (CMUs). Mortar and grout. Reinforcing steel. Masonry joint reinforcement. Ties and anchors. Embedded flashing. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of backup wythes of cavity walls. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” 2. Aluminum frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 08 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.” 3. Overhead doors in unit masonry opening, furnished under Division 08 Section “Sectional Doors.” DEFINITIONS

A.

Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.

B.

Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, or determine net-area compressive strength (f’m) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1.

1.5

For Concrete Unit Masonry: As indicated.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.

B.

Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1.

Decorative CMU, two or more concrete masonry units.

D.

Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E.

Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1.

Masonry units. a. b. c. d. e.

2. 3.

Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. For surface-coated brick, include material test report for durability of surface appearance after 50-cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. Reinforcing bars.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

4. 5. F.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Joint reinforcement. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. 2.

Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

G.

Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, or determined by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

H.

Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B.

Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

C.

Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B.

Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

D.

Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

E.

Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

B.

Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads and concentrated loads until after building masonry walls or columns are fully capable of sustaining the required loads.

C.

Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.

E.

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. At the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt from the scaffold boards near the wall onto completed masonry.

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1.

When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F or 80 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A.

2.2

Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. DECORATIVE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A.

B.

Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1.

Provide special shapes for corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2.

Provide cut shape for sill on top of wainscot. Color to match concrete sill on existing building.

Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units, multi-width walls, and where indicated. 1.

Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3)

C.

Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; DryBlock. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel.

Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Weight Classification: Lightweight Provide Type II, non-moisture controlled units. Unit sizes to be indicated in construction documents, manufactured to referenced industry standard dimensions, 3/8 inches less than nominal dimensions, unless otherwise indicated. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description matching color, pattern, and texture of Architect’s samples. Pattern and Texture:

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. 6. 7.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Standard pattern, split-face finish.

Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range. Products: a.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Consumers Concrete.

MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or tinted mortar as required to match existing mortar color.

B.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C.

Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.

D.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

E.

Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

F.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1.

For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

G.

Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H.

Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1.

Products: a. b. c.

I. 2.4

Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheomix Rheopel.

Water: Potable. REINFORCEMENT

A.

Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951 and as follows. 1.

Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods, and cross-rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. TIES AND ANCHORS

A.

Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.

B.

Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

2.6

Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A.

General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 1.

B.

Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section, complying with the following requirements: 1.

2.

Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 2-3/4 inches wide by 3 inches high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for inserting continuous wire. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. b. c. 3.

2.7

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.067-inchthick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.188-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.188-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire.

Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117.

MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A.

2.8

Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A.

Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Fabricate metal drip edge and through-wall flashing with drip edge from sheet metal material indicated above, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. For drips at masonry veneer, extend drip to back of veneer cavity and turn back edge up minimum ½ inch to receive overlapping material from above.

B.

Flexible Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

C.

Dampcoursing: For dampcoursing at masonry walls, use the following:: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC-ES AC209 or ICC-ES AC212. 1. STOguard with Gold Coat system. 2. Use STOguard Joint treatment to bridge all joints and cracks

D.

Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Dampcoursings and Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.

Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

B.

Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C.

Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

3.

Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a.

Products: 1)

4.

Vinyl Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, offset, T-shaped units made from flexible, injectionmolded PVC, designed to fit into a head joint and consisting of a louvered vertical leg, flexible wings to seal against ends of masonry units, and a top flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; in color approved by Architect to match that of mortar. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3)

D.

A.

Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #343 Louvered Weep Hole. Williams Products, Inc.; Williams-Goodco Brick Vent. Wire-Bond; Louvered Weepholes.

Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1.

2.10

Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.

Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings. a. Products: Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

CAVITY-WALL INSULATION Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type X: ASTM C 578, Type X, 15-psi (104-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. B. 2.11

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

3” Total Thickness: either one layer or two layers with offset joints.

Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. MASONRY CLEANERS

A.

Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of ½-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and ½-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.

B.

Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.12 A.

MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

B.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 BIA Technical Notes 8A, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. 2. 3.

C.

For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.

Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1.

2. D.

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.

Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Match existing mortar color.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. 2.

Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B.

Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B.

Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C.

Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D.

Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E.

Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

F.

Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

G.

Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:

3.3

LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 11

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in one-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

B.

Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

C.

Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

3.4

Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A.

Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B.

Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

3.5

CAVITIES A.

Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. 1.

Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 12

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

B.

Coat cavity face of backup wythe with STOguard with Gold Coat system. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. Use STOguard Joint treatment to bridge all joints and cracks.

C.

Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 1.

3.6

Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.

MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A.

General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1.

Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

B.

Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E.

Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7

ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A.

Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Fasten anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 13

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A.

General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry and built-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B.

Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1.

2. 3. C.

Form expansion joints in concrete masonry veneer or brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1.

D.

Form open joint full depth of masonry wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1.

3.9

Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.

Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer, and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.

FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A.

General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B.

Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1.

2.

Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face, unless otherwise indicated.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 14

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.

4.

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. 2.

Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

E.

Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1.

3.10

Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A.

Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B.

Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1.

3.11

Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A.

Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B.

Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 15

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

D.

2.

3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

A.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1.

3.12

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. Using job-mixed detergent solution. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

END OF SECTION 04 2000

UNIT MASONRY

04 2000 - 16

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 05 4000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. Interior and exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board applications on metal-studframed assemblies.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.

Design Loads: As indicated.

B.

Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

C.

Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. 2.

1.4

Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for strength contribution of sheathing materials.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1.

For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C.

Welding certificates.

D.

Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

B.

AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B.

Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Dale/Incor. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. United Metal Products, Inc.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

MATERIALS A.

Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. 2.

2.3

Grade: ST33H (ST230H) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inches and less. Grade: ST50H (ST340H) Class 1 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inches and greater. Coating: G90 (Z275),

Grade: As required by structural performance. Coating: G90 (Z275).

NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A.

Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.

B.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs, unless otherwise required. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. Coordinate clip size with deflection of primary structure to ensure that structure does not bear on framing.

D.

Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as indicated. Coordinate flange width with deflection of primary structure to ensure that structure does not bear on framing.

E.

Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

FRAMING ACCESSORIES A.

Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise required.

B.

Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, whether or not shown on drawings, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

C.

2.5

Supplementary framing. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. Anchor clips. End clips. Foundation clips. Gusset plates. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. Hole reinforcing plates. Backer plates.

Provide all supplementary framing necessary to attach deflection track to pre-engineered building frame and secure top of metal stud walls. ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A.

Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B.

Column Clips: Clamp on clips used to attach drywall to structural steel columns. 1. Product: “The Claw” beam clips manufactured by Claw International, Apple Valley MN www.clawintl.com.

C.

Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D.

Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E.

Mechanical Fasteners: steel drill screws. 1.

F.

ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping

Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 or ASTM A 780.

B.

Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

C.

Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.7

FABRICATION A.

Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. 2. 3.

Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. b.

4.

Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B.

Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C.

Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1.

2. D.

Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

Marking and Identification: Individual members shall be marked as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Rollformer’s identification. Minimum steel thickness. Minimum yield strength.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1.

3.2

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

B.

Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.3

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B.

Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C.

Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1.

D.

Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. 2.

Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. b.

Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration of joined members by not less than three (3) exposed screw heads.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

E.

Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F.

Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G.

Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H.

Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I.

Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J.

Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1.

3.4

Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

WALL INSTALLATION A.

Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

B.

Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with no gap. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1.

Stud Spacing: 16”.

C.

Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D.

Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E.

Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F.

Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

G.

2.

I.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1.

H.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1.

If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

2.

Install all supplementary framing necessary to attach deflection track to pre-engineered building frame and secure top of metal stud walls

Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 36 inches apart. intersection. 1.

Fasten at each stud

Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

J.

Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

K.

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.

Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing. Paint framing surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

C.

Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30 days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

D.

Provide cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.

E.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 05 4000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Loose bearing and leveling plates. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. Pipe bollards (Bump Posts)

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for metal framing anchors.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. 2.

C.

Paint products. Grout.

Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

Welding certificates.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.

1.5

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes in involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

1.6

Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicated measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

METALS, GENERAL A.

2.2

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, exposed pitting or blemishes. FERROUS METALS

A.

W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).

B.

Steel Plates, Channels, M and S-Shapes, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C.

Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D.

Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

E.

Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

F.

Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

G.

Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

H.

Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.

I.

Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 569/A569M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.

J.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

K.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.

L.

Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.3

FASTENERS A.

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Grade A, with hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

C.

Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

D.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1.

Provide hot-dip mechanically deposited, zinc coating anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E.

Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

F.

Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

G.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

H.

Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

I.

Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

J.

Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

K.

Cast-In-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.

L.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM D 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. 2.

M. 2.4

Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.

Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-whip type, class and style as needed. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B.

Shop Primers for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modifiedalkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 1.

Use primer with VOC content of 420g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

FABRICATION, GENERAL A.

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D.

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G.

Fabricate all seams, joints, and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H.

Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.

I.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

J.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1.

Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B.

Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hanger, and similar items.

C.

Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7

LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.

2.8

Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A.

2.9

Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two (2) integrally welded steel strap anchors fro embedding in concrete. PIPE BOLLARDS (BUMP POSTS)

A.

Fabricate pipe bollards from 6” diameter, Schedule 40 steel pipe.

B.

Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch (6.4mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 1/2 inch (12 mm) steel machine bolt.

C.

Bollard Cover: Yellow polyurethane molded cover with rounded top. 1. Type BOL Bollard cover manufactured by the Pawling Corp, Wassaic, NY, www.pawling.com.

2.10

MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A.

Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B.

Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

C.

Provide with integrally welded strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

2.11

FINISHES, GENERAL

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.12 A.

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. 2.

B.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. 2.

C.

ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

Exterior (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2

INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any.

B.

Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C.

Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1.

D.

Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1.

Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B.

Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. 2.

3.4

Use nonshrink metallic nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS (BUMP POSTS) A.

Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured.

B.

Fill pipe with grout. Round top to fit bollard cover.

C.

Trim bollard cover to length and install over pipe. Fasten with clamp band and screw.

3.5

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1.

B.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 05 5000

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1513080

08/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 05 5313 - BAR GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes metal bar gratings and metal frames and supports for gratings.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system components.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.

B. 1.5

Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. Paint products.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1513080

08/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Welding certificates.

C.

Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1.

1.7

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

2.2

McNichols PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design gratings.

B.

Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 250 lbf/sq. ft. (11.97 kN/sq. m) or concentrated load of 3000 lbf (13.40 kN), whichever produces the greater stress.

2.3

METAL BAR GRATINGS A.

Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual” and NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual."

B.

Welded Steel Grating: 1. Grating Mark W-19-4 (1-1/4 x 3/16) STEEL: 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch (32-by-4.8-mm) bearing bars at 1-3/16 inches (30 mm) o.c., and crossbars at 4 inches (102 mm) o.c. 2. Traffic Surface: Plain. 3. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. (550 g/sq. m) of coated surface.

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1513080 2.4

08/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

FERROUS METALS A.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B.

Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

C.

Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

D.

Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205).

E.

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating.

2.5

FASTENERS A.

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. 2.

B.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M,) and, where indicated, flat washers. 1.

2.6

Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

2.7

FABRICATION A.

Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1513080

08/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B.

Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C.

Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

D.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

E.

Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately.

F.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

G.

Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. 1. Provide no fewer than four saddle clips for each grating section containing rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch (24 mm) or more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over two bearing bars.

2.8

GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A.

Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. 2.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long.

Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1.

Exterior.

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1513080 2.9

08/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

STEEL FINISHES A.

Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

B.

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1.

Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1.

Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E.

Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3.

G.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately.

Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B1513080 3.2

08/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A.

General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B.

Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

C.

Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.

3.3

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 05 5313

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

1.3

This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 3. Sheathing. DEFINITIONS

A.

Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

C.

Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

D.

Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.4

NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.

Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B.

Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

C.

Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. 2.

1.5

Wood-preservative-treated wood. Metal framing anchors.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.6

Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

Metal Framing Anchors: a. b. c.

2.2

Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. United Steel Products Company, Inc.

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.

Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2.

3. 4.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content (KD19) for exterior lumber and 15 percent maximum moisture content (KD15) for interior lumber at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS AND SHEATHING A.

Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

C.

Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

D.

Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.4

WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A.

Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1.

Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C.

Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1.

D.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. 2. 3.

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

4. 5. 2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A.

General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.

C.

Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: following species: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

D.

grade and any of the

Hem-fir (north); NLGA. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Northern species; NLGA. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: and any of the following species: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

2.6

Construction, Stud, or No. 3

Construction or No. 2

grade

Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A.

General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Blocking. Nailers. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Cants. Furring. Grounds.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at exterior locations of any of the following species. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Hem-fir (north); NLGA. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.

C.

For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D.

For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E.

For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.7

FASTENERS A.

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1.

Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C.

Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D.

Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E.

Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1.

For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

F.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G.

Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1.

2.8

Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.

General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows:

B.

Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.

C.

Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

D.

Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 1.

E.

steel

sheet

complying

with

Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1.

Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B.

Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

D.

Metal Framing Anchors: instructions.

E.

Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

G.

Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

H.

Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. 2.

I.

Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written

Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2.

NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

J.

Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. Predrill as required.

K.

For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

3.2

WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A.

Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B.

Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

END OF SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 06 6400 – FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples for Verification: For plastic paneling, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling from single manufacturer.

B.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. 3.

1.5

Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Testing Agency: UL.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PLASTIC PANELING

06 6400 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A.

General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by one of the following: a. b.

2. 3.

4. 2.2

Crane Composites - Kemlite. Marlite.

Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. Surface Finish: Scored finish to resemble ceramic tile. a. Crane “Tile Look” b. Marlite “Symmetrix” Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors.

ACCESSORIES A.

Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1.

Color: Match panels.

B.

Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

C.

Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PLASTIC PANELING

06 6400 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PREPARATION A.

Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.

B.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

C.

Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

D.

Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 1. 2.

3.3

Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.

INSTALLATION A.

Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C.

Install trim accessories with adhesive and staples. Do not fasten through panels.

D.

Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

E.

Fill butt joints in panels with sealant. Match joint width to the score width of panels. Do not use “H” strips.

F.

Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

G.

Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

H.

Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.

END OF SECTION 06 6400

PLASTIC PANELING

06 6400 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 07 2100 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

1.3

Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). Concealed building insulation. Fiberglass batt insulation.

Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 2. Division 13 Section “Metal Buildng Systems” for pre-engineered building insulation. 3. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 4. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." DEFINITIONS

A.

1.4

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

BUILDING INSULATION

07 2100 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2. 3.

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B.

Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A.

Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.

2.

DiversiFoam Products. Dow Chemical Company. Owens Corning. Pactiv Building Products Division.

Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated.

BUILDING INSULATION

07 2100 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A.

Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. Johns Manville. Knauf Fiber Glass. Owens Corning.

B.

Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C.

Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1.

2.3

6 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A.

2.4

Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. INSULATION FASTENERS

A.

Acoustical Liner Insulation Anchors: Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1.

Products: a. b. c.

2. 3. B.

AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. Gemco; Spindle Type.

Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1.

Products:

BUILDING INSULATION

07 2100 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. 2. 3. C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.

Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. Gemco; Dome-Cap. Gemco; R-150. Gemco; S-150.

Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap with black finish and in the following locations: a. b. c. d.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Crawlspaces. Ceiling plenums. Attic spaces. Where indicated.

Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1.

Products: a. b. c.

AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

BUILDING INSULATION

07 2100 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PREPARATION A.

3.3

Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B.

Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C.

Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D.

Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E.

For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4

INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION A.

On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1.

Extend insulation from underside of concrete slab to top of concrete footing. Lay boards horizontally. Where more than one row of boards is required, stagger vertical joints.

B.

On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

C.

Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5

INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A.

Use fiberglass batt insulation to fill all voids in exterior walls and roof not covered by the preengineered building insulation system.

BUILDING INSULATION

07 2100 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN METAL STUD FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A.

Install batt insulation in drywall partitions at Mens and Womens Toilets 102 and 103.

B.

Blanket InIsulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Install batt insulation to a height of 10’-0” above floor slab. 3. Support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

3.7

PROTECTION A.

Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION 07 2100

BUILDING INSULATION

07 2100 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Silicone joint sealants. Non staining silicone joint sealants. Urethane joint sealants. Latex joint sealants. Acoustical joint sealants.

Section 08 8000 “Glazing” for glazing sealants. Section 09 2900 “Gypsum Board” for sealing perimeter joints. Section 09 5113 “Acoustical Panel Ceilings” for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustic sealant.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B.

Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C.

Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. Joint-sealant formulation. Joint-sealant color.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B.

Source Limitations: manufacturer

1.5

Obtain each kind of joint sealant from a single source and single

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.6

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

WARRANTY A.

Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.

B.

Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.

C.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A.

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B.

VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. 2. 3.

C. 2.2

Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent finish color if not indicated on drawings. SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A.

2.3

Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A.

Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.

B.

Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

2.4

MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A.

Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B.

Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.

2.6

Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT. LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. 2.7

Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A.

2.8

Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90. BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS

A. 2.9

Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A.

Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.10

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B.

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.

2.

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. b.

3. 4.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c.

B.

Concrete. Masonry.

Metal. Glass. FRP Panels.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C.

3.3

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A.

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials.

D.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.

F.

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint profile at according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. 3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

CLEANING A.

3.5

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION

A.

3.6

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A.

B.

Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. 3.

Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 100/50, T, NT. Joint-Sealant Color: Match adjacent surfaces.

Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. b. c. d. e. f.

C.

Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. Joints between different materials listed above. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a.

JOINT SEALANTS

Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

079200 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

b. c. 2. 3. D.

2. 3.

Joint Locations: Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. Tile control and expansion joints. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry concrete walls and partitions. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT or Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on drawings or match adjacent surfaces.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1.

Joint Locations: a. b. c.

2. 3.

Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and elevator entrances. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on drawings or match adjacent surfaces.

Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.

Joint Locations: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. G.

Control and expansion joints in concrete flooring. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 100/50, T. Joint-Sealant Color: Match adjacent surfaces.

a. b. c. d.

F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. Tile control and expansion joints in toilet rooms. Joints in FRP panels. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. Joint-Sealant Color: As indicated on drawings or match adjacent surfaces.

Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics. 1.

Joint Locations:

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. b. c. 2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Aluminum thresholds. Sill plates. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. Joint-Sealant Color: Manufacturer’s standard color.

END OF SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

1.3

Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 2. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 3. Division 08 Section “Glazing” for glass in steel doors and sidelights. 4. Division 13 Section “Metal Building Systems” for hollow metal frames in pre-engineered frames. DEFINITIONS

A.

Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B.

Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, provide product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Include sound ratings, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B.

Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

Elevations of each door design. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4.

Locations of and type reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

5. 6. 7. 8. C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

Other Action Submittals: 1.

Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. a.

Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

D.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

E.

Warranty: Provide Warranty documents specified herein.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.6

Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1.

Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B.

Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C.

Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. 1.

Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.2

Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. Mesker Door Inc. Pioneer Industries, Inc. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. Windsor Republic Doors. Amweld Building Products

MATERIALS A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B.

Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C.

Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D.

Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.

For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E.

Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F.

Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

H.

Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

I.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A.

General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. 2.

Design: Flush panel. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Fabricate exterior doors with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. 4.

Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

5. B.

Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1.

C.

Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1.

Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

D.

Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

E.

Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A.

General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B.

Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3. C.

2.5

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. FRAME ANCHORS

A.

Jamb Anchors: 1.

2. 3. 4.

B.

Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1.

2.6

Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

STOPS AND MOLDINGS A.

2.7

Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. FABRICATION

A.

Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B.

Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Hollow Metal Doors: 1. 2. 3.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows, unless fire-ratings require more: a.

Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b.

Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

c. d. 5.

Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

E.

Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F.

Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. 2. 3. 4.

G.

Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.8

Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

STEEL FINISHES A.

Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1.

Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

B.

Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B.

Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

3.3

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1.

Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b.

c. d. e.

At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

f. g.

Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. 4.

Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

6.

a. b. c. d.

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.

Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. b. c. d.

D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

2.

5.

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.

Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B.

Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C.

Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D.

Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 08 3613 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.

B.

Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C.

1.

Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2.

Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width.

Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. 2.

D.

The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1.

2. B.

Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.

2.

C.

Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 1.

Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

E.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F.

Seismic Qualification Certificates: For sectional doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

G.

Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.

H.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer.

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.

C.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D.

Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.

2. B.

Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Faulty operation of hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A.

Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1.

2. B.

Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches (610 mm) high and of 2” (52 mm) thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door.

Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) nominal coated

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart. C.

Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal.

D.

Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.

E.

Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

F.

Board Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard polystyrene or polyurethane board insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84; or with glass-fiberboard insulation. Secure insulation to exterior face sheet. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1.

G.

2.2

Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, and deformation. TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A.

Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel, 3” track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 (Z180) zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt track supports.

B.

Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. 2.

3.

Vertical Track Assembly: Track with wall jamb brackets attached to track and attached to wall. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members. Track Supports: Provide all miscellaneous supports and framing required to support track from pre-engineered building primary structure.

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. HARDWARE

A.

General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainlesssteel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B.

Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- (2.01-mm-) nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet (4.88 m) wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.

C.

Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.

D.

Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door.

2.4

LOCKING DEVICES A.

Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.

B.

Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1.

C.

2.5

Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" and keyed to building keying system.

Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A.

Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.

B.

Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet (4.88 m) long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet (4.88 m) long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. C.

Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 7 to 1.

D.

Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.

E.

Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

F.

Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.

2.6

ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A.

General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. 2.

Comply with NFPA 70. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B.

Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C.

Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall on right or left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain.

D.

Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Electrical Characteristics: a.

Size: ¾ hp

b. c. d.

Phase: Single phase. Volts: 120 V. Hertz: 60.

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. Motor Size: 3/4 hp. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators.

E.

Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F.

Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1.

Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a.

2.

Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a.

G.

Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1.

Interior unit, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

H.

Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 35 lbf (155 N).

I.

Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J.

Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

K.

2.7

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. DOOR ASSEMBLY

A.

Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Haas Door; a Nofziger company. b. Overhead Door Corporation. c. Raynor. d. Wayne-Dalton Corp. e. Windsor Republic Doors.

B.

Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.

C.

R-Value: 7.35.

D.

Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 (Z180). 1. 2.

Section Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 24 ga. nominal coated thickness. a.

3. 4.

Surface: Flat.

Insulation: Board or foamed in place. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of 26 ga. nominal coated thickness.

E.

Track Configuration: High-lift track.

F.

Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door

G.

Roller-Tire Material: Case-hardened steel.

H.

Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 1.

Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides, locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn.

I.

Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.

J.

Electric Door Operator: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. Operator Type: Jackshaft, side mounted. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

5. K.

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor.

Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected from manufacturer's full range. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected from manufacturer's full range. GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.9

STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A.

Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Examine locations of electrical connections.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B.

Tracks: 1. 2.

Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing,

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3. C.

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and dooroperating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.

Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. STARTUP SERVICES

A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2.

3.4

Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B.

Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

D.

Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.

END OF SECTION 08 3613

SECTIONAL DOORS

08 3613 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.

B.

Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazing."

1.3

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria, permanent deformation or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. 2. 3.

Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. Failure includes the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

Deflection exceeding specified limits. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. Glazing-to-glazing contact. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. Sealant failure. Failure of operating units.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

B.

Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C.

Structural Loads:

D.

1.

Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. 3.

Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Blast Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

Deflection of Framing Members: 1.

2. E.

Structural-Test Performance: ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. 2.

3. F.

Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to

When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506. 1. 2.

Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade.

G.

Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference

H.

Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

I.

Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 1.

J.

Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.

Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. 2.

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, reduction of performance or other detrimental effects when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. b.

3.

High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C). Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C).

Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C).

K.

Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.

L.

Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminumframed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. 2.

M.

1.5

Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi (138 kPa). SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminumframed systems.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2.

Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D.

Other Action Submittals: 1.

E.

Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. 2.

Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. Include design calculations.

F.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G.

Welding certificates.

H.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

I.

Source quality-control reports.

J.

Field quality-control reports.

K.

Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

L.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

C.

Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D.

Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

E.

Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

F.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

1.8

Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. WARRANTY

A.

General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall in a addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. C.

Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. Failure of operating components.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

EFCO Corporation: D500 Standard Wide Stile Entrance Door, Series 433 Triple Set framing. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company: 500 Standard Entrance wide stile door, 451T framing. Tubelite: Standard Series wide stile door, 14000 I/O Series framing. The Vistawall Group; a divisin of Old Castle Glazing: WS-500 wide stile door, Series 3000 framing.

MATERIALS A.

Aluminum: indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. 2. 3.

2.3

Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

FRAMING SYSTEMS A.

Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1.

Size: 2” x 4 ½”

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Construction: Thermally broken. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. Glazing Plane: Front.

B.

Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C.

Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. 2. 3.

Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. Do not use exposed fasteners except for hardware application; Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from stainless steel.

D.

Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E.

Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.

F.

Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: manufacturer for joint type.

2.4

thick

stainless

steel,

Manufacturer's standard, recommended by

GLAZING SYSTEMS A.

Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B.

Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C.

Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

2.5

ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A.

Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1.

2.

Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. 3.

2.6

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane.

Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer’s standard snap-on, extrudedaluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A.

Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.7

FABRICATION A.

Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B.

Weld before finishing and in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C.

Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

D.

Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E.

Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

F.

Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

G.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1.

H.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. 2.

At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

I.

Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

J.

Provide frames, subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8

ALUMINUM FINISHES A.

General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B.

Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assemble or installed to minimize contrast.

C.

Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1.

Color: Dark bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

INSTALLATION A.

General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

Metal Protection: 1.

2.

Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C.

Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to exterior.

D.

Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E.

Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F.

Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 1.

Structural-Sealant Glazing: a.

b.

G.

Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. 2.

H.

Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

ERECTION TOLERANCES A.

Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. 2.

Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. Alignment: a. b.

B. 3.4

Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). ADJUSTING

A.

Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1.

For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.

END OF SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4113 - 11

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 08 7100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

Refer to "General and Special Conditions", and "Instructions to Bidders", Division 1 of Specifications. Requirements of these Sections and the project drawings shall govern work in this section.

1.2

Work Included:

A.

Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3 A.

Quality Assurance Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1.

2.

B.

Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry: Installation of Finish Hardware Section 08 11 01 – Standard Steel Doors Section 08 11 02 – Standard Steel Frames

Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.

Hardware Supplier: 1.

Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 200 miles of the project. Only domestic manufacturers are acceptable and the distributor must be a factoryauthorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant. (AHC)

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

2.

A.

Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

Submittals: Hardware Schedule 1.

2.

Submit proper number of Hardware Schedules to allow the Architect to retain two copies for his use, plus the number of copies required by the Contractor for his distribution and use. In any event, do not submit more than six copies. Include the following: a. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as follows: CATEGORY Hinges Lock sets Kick Plates

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Manufacturer: 1.

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

SPECIFIED Manufacturer A Manufacturer X Open

SCHEDULED Manufacturer B Manufacturer X Manufacturer Z

Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions and specialty hardware. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved." Typed Copy. Double-Spacing. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols. Generally, follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule. Modified as above. Prior to ordering Hardware, verify all lock functions with Owner.

Product Data: 1. 2.

Submit, in booklet form using supplier's schedule covers as binders. Product data of items of hardware listed in supplier's schedule. Submit product data concurrently with hardware schedule.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

1.5 A.

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor. Warranties

A.

Grade 1 locksets shall carry manufacturer’s 10-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

B.

Closers shall carry manufacturer's 10-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

C.

Balance of items shall carry a manufacturer's 1-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

D.

During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work. Inspect the work within 24 hours after receipt of notice from the Owner. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1

Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.

2.2

Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, "no substitution" is implied.

A.

Hinges and Continuous Hinges: Ives 1. 2.

B.

Furnish as listed in Hdwe Sets Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager, McKinney, Select, Stanley

Locksets and Latchsets: 1.

Mortise Locksets: Schlage L9000, Stanley 45H, Sargent 8200 Series, CR ML2000

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

All Lock functions to be verified with owner prior to ordering

Exit Devices: 1.

Exit Devices shall be Falcon 24/25 Series or Sargent 80, Corbin Russwin ED5000 or Stanley 2100 Series

D.

Pulls: 1. Provide 1” round 8” C to C pulls. Ives shown. Equivalent by Rockwood or Trimco is acceptable.

E.

Closers: Falcon SC70 Series 1. Acceptable Equivalents: Norton 7500, Yale 4400 2. Provide all brackets, spacers and Drop Plates as required to mount to Detailed Frame and Door conditions.

F.

Kick Plates: 1.

2. 3. G.

Bumpers: 1. 2.

H.

Furnish .050 inches thick 10" high x door width less 2" at single doors and less 1" at pairs. Where glass or louvers prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2”. Kickplates shall be drilled and counter sunk for oval head, counter sunk screws. Pan head not acceptable. Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable.

Ives WS407CVX BHMA L02101. Wrought, forged, or cast, approximately 2-1/2 inch diameter, convex rubber center, concealed fasteners.

Thresholds: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1/2" high - 5" wide. Minimum .244 Wall thickness. Cope at jambs. Furnish full wall opening width when frames are recessed. Cope in front of mullions if thresholds project beyond door faces. Furnish with non-ferrous Stainless Steel Screws and Lead Anchors. a. b. c.

I.

Pemko Reese National Guard

425HD

Weatherstrip shall be solid stock aluminum with Silicone insert. Install prior to closer to avoid notching. Continuous seal required. 1. Provide 700SA by National Guard or equivalent by Pemko

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

J.

Surface Sweeps: a. Reese b. Pemko c. National Guard

354 3452_NB C627

Miscellaneous: 1.

L.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Door Sweeps: 1.

K.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in Hardware Sets.

Fasteners:

2.3

Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames.

2.4

Finishes:

A.

Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626 except Aluminum Door Hardware to be Dark Bronze (Verify finish with Architect and coordinate with Aluminum Door supplier prior to ordering.) 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.5

Hinges, Stainless Steel US32D / BHMA 630 Locksets: Brushed Chrome US26D BHMA/626 Closers: Sprayed Enamel, color Aluminum BHMA 689 Thresholds: Mill finish Aluminum

Templates and Hardware Location:

A.

Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers.

B.

Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates.

2.6

Cylinders Key Control and Keying: Owner to supply final masterkeyed cores. Provide housings that accept Best SFIC system. Provide temporary plastic cores for construction.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.

Examination A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.

Installation A.

General: 1.

2. B.

Install hardware according to manufacturers installations and to manufacturers template dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture of the item. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames: drilled and tapped machine screws.

Locations: 1. 2.

Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.

CATEGORY Hinges Flush Bolt Levers Levers SpeXtra: 126150

DIMENSION Door Manufacturer's Standard 72" and 12" Door Manufacturer's Standard

Hardware Group No. 04 - Install Weatherseal at Header prior to installing closer and exit Device. Special template required. For use on mark/door #(s): 101A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-NL-OP 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-116

DOOR HARDWARE

Finish 628 626 626

Mfr IVE FAL SCH

08 7100 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1

EA

PERMANENT CORE

1 1 1 1 1 1

EA EA EA SET EA EA

90 DEG OFFSET PULL SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE SEALS DOOR SWEEP THRESHOLD

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

OWNER TO SUPPLY FINAL MKD CORE 8190HD 8" O SC71 SS 8400 10" X 2" LDW 700SA C627A 425HD

626

BES

630 689 630 CL CL AL

IVE FAL IVE NGP NGP NGP

Finish 613 613

Mfr SCH BES

Hardware Group No. 05 For use on mark/door #(s): 101B Provide each RU door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-116 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER TO SUPPLY FINAL MKD CORE 1 EA NOTE ALL OTHER HDWE BY DR SUPPLIER

UNK

Hardware Group No. 06 For use on mark/door #(s): 101C Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-R-NL-OP-1439 1 EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER 80-116 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER TO SUPPLY FINAL MKD CORE 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 8" O 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 1 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A 1 EA THRESHOLD 425HD 1 EA NOTE WEATHERSTRIP BY DR SUPPLIER

DOOR HARDWARE

Finish 628 313 613 613

Mfr IVE FAL SCH BES

613 689 DKB DKB

IVE FAL NGP NGP UNK

08 7100 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Hardware Group No. 07 For use on mark/door #(s): 102A 103A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 3.5" X 15" 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64

Finish 652 630 630 689 630 630 GRY

Mfr IVE IVE IVE FAL IVE IVE IVE

Finish 652 626 626 689 630 630 GRY

Mfr IVE SCH SCH FAL IVE IVE IVE

Hardware Group No. 08 For use on mark/door #(s): 104A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080BDC 17A 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64

Hardware Group No. 09 required.

Install Weatherseal at Header prior to installing closer. Special template

For use on mark/door #(s): 105A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Catalog Number 224HD L9080BDC LLL 17A L283-150 OWNER SUPPLIED VR900 SC71 SS 700SA C627A 425HD

EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA

Description CONT. HINGE STOREROOM LOCK PERMANENT CORE DOOR PULL SURFACE CLOSER SEALS DOOR SWEEP THRESHOLD

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Finish 628 626 626 630 695 CL CL AL

Mfr IVE SCH BES IVE FAL NGP NGP NGP

END OF SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1.

B.

1.3

Exterior hollow metal doors and aluminum doors.

Related Sections: 1.

Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.”

2.

Division 08 Section “Aluminum Entrances and Storefront.”

DEFINITIONS A.

Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B.

Glass Thicknesses: ASTM C 1036.

C.

Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4

Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

GLAZING

08 8000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B.

Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association’s Certified Glass Installer Program.

B.

Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C.

Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D.

Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

E.

Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

F.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.8

Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

GLAZING

08 8000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.

Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B.

Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heattreated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C.

Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1.

2.2

Provide glass lites in

For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.

GLASS PRODUCTS A.

Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

GLAZING

08 8000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

INSULATING GLASS A.

Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. 2. 3.

B.

2.4

Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article and in "Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article. GLAZING GASKETS

A.

Dense Compression Gaskets: To be used with drive-in wedges or for use with pressurized stops. Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following, except that neoprene is not to be considered compatible with silicone glazing sealants: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene or EPDM or silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1.

C.

2.5

Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. GLAZING SEALANTS

A.

General: 1.

Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

GLAZING

08 8000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.

3. B.

Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions as well as glass framing system manufacturer’s requirements for selecting and applying glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.6

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1.

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Dow Corning Corporation; 790. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. Pecora Corporation; 890. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1 (base curing).

Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B.

Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C.

Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D.

Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E.

Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.7

FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A.

Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

GLAZING

08 8000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A.

Glass Type 2: Clear insulating glass. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. Outdoor Lite: Float glass, fully tempered float glass. Interspace Content: Argon. Indoor Lite: Float glass, fully tempered float glass. Provide safety glazing labeling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B. 3.2

Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. Presence and functioning of weep systems. Minimum required face and edge clearances. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION

A.

Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B.

Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3

GLAZING, GENERAL A.

Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B.

Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or

GLAZING

08 8000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. C. 3.4

Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A.

Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B.

Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C.

Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.5

LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A.

3.6

Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.

Provide

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C.

Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D.

Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E.

Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

GLAZING

08 8000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

END OF SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING

08 8000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

Division 05 Section “Cold Formed Metal Framing”

2.

Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to interior or exterior gypsum board surfaces, and sheen of paint topcoats effecting gypsum board finishing level.

3. 4.

1.3

Interior gypsum board.

SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

1.5

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B.

Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PANELS, GENERAL A.

2.2

Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A.

General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

B.

Regular Type: 1. 2.

C.

Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Long Edges: Tapered.

High-Impact Type: Manufactured with Type X core, plastic film laminated to back side for greater resistance to through-penetration (impact resistance). 1. 2.

D.

American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum. National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation.

Core: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Plastic-Film Thickness: 0.030 inch.

Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. 2.

Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

TRIM ACCESSORIES A.

Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2.

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. Shapes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.4

Cornerbead. Bullnose bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B.

Joint Tape: 1.

C.

Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. 2.

Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a.

3. 4. 5.

2.5

Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.

Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. For fastening cementitious backer units, use rust resistant screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A.

Comply with ASTM C 840. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum’s “Gypsum Construction Handbook.”

B.

Install Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Tile Backing Board in accordance with ASTM C840, manufacturer’s recommendations and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

C.

Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D.

Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E.

Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F.

Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

G.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H.

Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.

B.

Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1.

Hi-Impact Type: Install on lower 4’-0” of all walls.

2.

Regular Type: Vertical surfaces above 4’-0”, unless otherwise indicated.

3.

Glass Matt Board: Behind concrete block veneer.

Single-Layer Application: 1.

On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a.

C.

3.4

Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer’s written recommendations, unless otherwise noted. INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A.

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 1. 2. 3.

C.

Partition Walls: 30’ maximum in either direction. Interior ceiling with perimeter relief: 50’ maximum in either direction. Interior ceilings without perimeter relief: 30’ maximum in either direction.

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1.

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Bullnose Bead: Only where indicated. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated. L-Bead: Use where indicated. U-Bead: Use where indicated. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A.

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B.

Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D.

Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1.

Level 5: Finish must be equal to Level 4 (embedding coat and three finish coats) plus a skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a.

3.6

Typical for all surfaces to be painted with topcoats with stain, semi-gloss, or gloss sheens (MPI Gloss Levels 4, 5, or 6) and where indicated on drawings.

PROTECTION A.

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Divisions 21, 23, and 26 for light fixtures, sprinklers, and air distribution components.

DEFINITIONS A.

AC: Articulation Class.

B.

CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C.

LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D.

NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2.

C.

Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color.

Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Source Limitations: 1. 2.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1.

2.

1.6

Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B.

Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C.

Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

1.8

Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.

Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A.

Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

C.

Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.2

ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A.

2.3

Armstrong #1830, White, Fine Fissured, Square Edge panels. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A.

Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B.

Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C.

Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D.

Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

E.

Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F.

Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

2.4

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A.

2.5

As indicated on drawings, or equal. METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) from one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1.

2.

3.

2.6

Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 15/16” Prelude Exposed Tee grid system. BPB USA. Chicago Metalic Corporation. Fry Reglet Corporation. Gordon, Inc. USG Interiors, Inc.

Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. b. c.

B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. b.

2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1.

3.2

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

3.3

Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B.

Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, movement, or elevated temperatures. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C.

Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D.

Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. 2.

3.

Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E.

Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F.

Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1.

Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. 2. 3.

4.

5. 6.

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly.

CLEANING A.

Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5113 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

1.3

Resilient base.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

B.

Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 6513 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3.

48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.

B.

Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C.

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

B.

Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

Deliver extra materials to Owner unless directed otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

RESILIENT BASE, VINYL 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) from one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Johnsonite. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. Roppe Corporation, USA. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 6513 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Resilient Base Standard, Vinyl: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2. 3.

Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). Style: Cove (base with toe).

C.

Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D.

Height: 4 inches.

E.

Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F.

Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G.

Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H.

Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

2.2

RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY, VINYL As indicated on drawings.

2.3

INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with material manufacturer’s and adhesive manufacturer’s requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 6513 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PREPARATION A.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C.

Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.

D.

3.3

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B.

Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C.

Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D.

Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E.

Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F.

On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G.

Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H.

Job-Formed Corners: 1. 2.

3.4

Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 6513 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B.

Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 09 6513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 6513 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal.

B.

Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, notify Architect for clarification. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

C.

Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1.

Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. b. c. d.

2.

Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. b.

3.

Aluminum framing and glass. Decorative architectural metals. Mechanical and electrical equipment, unless noted otherwise. Light fixtures.

Ceiling or canopy plenums. Utility tunnels.

Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze and brass.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

4.

Valve and damper operators. Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts. Gas, electric, and water meters.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. b. c. d. e.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2.

1.4

Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application area.

Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

MPI Standards: 1. 2.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Source Limitations: Obtain all filler, primer, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coat, unless finish coat manufacturer recommends, in writing, alternate products. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2. 3.

1.6

Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content.

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Protect from freezing.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B.

Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.

1.7

Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature and humidity limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material color and sheen applied.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.2

Benjamin Moore & Co. Duron, Inc. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

PAINT, GENERAL A.

Material Compatibility: 1.

2. B. 2.3

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. PRODUCTS LIST

A.

Refer to painting schedule in Part 3 for all product specification relating all selective conditions and paint systems to MPI standards and VOC content.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1.

Concrete: 12 percent.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4. 5.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Plaster: 12 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.

3.2

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

PREPARATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B.

Thoroughly examine all surfaces to be painted prior to any application and notify Architect immediately if any are unacceptable to receive product, color, and sheen specified.

C.

Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. 2.

D.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

E.

Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

APPLICATION A.

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. Finish exterior doors on top, bottom, and side edges the same as the exterior face, unless noted otherwise.

B.

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E.

Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

3.4

Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1.

2. 3.

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6

EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.

Colors: All colors are to be selected at later date. 1.

B.

Contractors to qualify on bid any premium associated with future selection of unknown dark colors effecting pricing on tinted or specialty primers.

Steel Substrates: 1.

Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. b. c.

C.

Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer: MPI #79, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel Semigloss: MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1 or E2.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.

Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B. a. b. c.

Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer: MPI #26, VOC Content Range of E1. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel Semigloss: MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1 or E2.

END OF SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

EXTERIOR PAINTING

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

09 9113 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Wood. 4. Gypsum board (and skim coat surfaces).

B.

Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, notify Architect for clarification. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1.

C.

Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1.

Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment, unless noted otherwise. b. Light fixtures. c. Distribution cabinets.

2.

Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Foundation spaces. Furred areas. Ceiling plenums. Utility tunnels. Pipe spaces. Duct shafts.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.

D.

Valve and damper operators. Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts.

Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze and brass.

Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. b. c. d.

5.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C.

Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2.

1.4

Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

MPI Standards: 1.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. B.

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

Source Limitations: Obtain all filler, primer, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coat, unless finish coat manufacturer recommends, in writing, alternate products. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2. 3.

1.6

Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content.

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Protect from freezing.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B.

Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material, color, and sheen applied.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.2

Benjamin Moore & Co. Duron, Inc. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

PAINT, GENERAL A.

Material Compatibility: 1.

2. B.

VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. Dry-Fog/Dry-Fall (Flat) Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.

Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

2.

2.3

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Acrolein. Acrylonitrile. Antimony. Benzene. Butyl benzyl phthalate. Cadmium. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. Di-n-butyl phthalate. Di-n-octyl phthalate. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. Diethyl phthalate. Dimethyl phthalate. Ethylbenzene. Formaldehyde. Hexavalent chromium. Isophorone. Lead. Mercury. Methyl ethyl ketone. Methyl isobutyl ketone. Methylene chloride. Naphthalene. Toluene (methylbenzene). 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Vinyl chloride.

Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. 1. The bottom 4’-0” of each wall will be one color, the remainder of wall will be a second color. 2. Paint exposed steel structure to match adjacent paint or finished material color, such as vinyl scrim on exposed ceilings. PRODUCTS LIST

A.

Refer to Painting Schedule in Part 3 for all product specifications relating selevtive conditions and paint systems to MPI standards and VOC Content.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Plaster: 12 percent.

C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.

3.2

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

PREPARATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B.

Thoroughly examine all surfaces to be painted prior to any application and notify Architect immediately if any are unacceptable to receive product, color, and sheen specified.

C.

Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. 2.

D.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

E.

Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F.

Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

G.

Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

H.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I.

Wood Substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4.

J.

3.3

Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

Gypsum Board Substrates and other Skim Coated Surfaces: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. Verify finish level of drywall required for paint sheen specified APPLICATION

A.

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.

3.

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

D.

Mechanical Work: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2.

Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Insulated ducts having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

Electrical Work: a. b. c. d.

Switchgear. Panelboards. Electrical equipment that is indicated to be field painted. Conduits, junction boxes, and fittings.

Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

3.4

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1.

2.

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.

Colors: All colors are to be selected at a later date. 1.

B.

Contractors to qualify on bid any premium associated with future selection of unknown dark colors effecting pricing on tinted or specialty primers.

Steel Substrates: Including but not limited to exposed steel structure. 1.

Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S. a. b. c.

C.

Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based): MPI #107, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex Semigloss: MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E3.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S. a. b.

Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based): MPI #107, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

c. D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex Semigloss: MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E3.

Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood and medium-density fiberboard. 1.

Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. a. b. c.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer: MPI #39, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex Semigloss: MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3.

Gypsum Board Substrates: 1.

Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. b. c. d.

Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer: MPI #50, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex Semigloss: MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Colors: The bottom 4’-0” of each wall will be one color, the remainder of wall will be a second color.

END OF SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 10 1400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.3

Panel signs.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. 2.

Show sign mounting heights. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available.

D.

Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1.

Submit one full size sample sign of type, style and color specified, including method of attachment. If approved, the sample will become part of the job.

E.

Qualification Data: For fabricator.

F.

Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

SIGNAGE

10 1400 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

G. 1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.

B.

Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

C.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.

2.

Deterioration of graphic elements, tactile characters and Braille, colors and sign lamination.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PANEL SIGNS A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Best Sign Systems, Inc.; Economy ADA Signs or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

ACE Sign Systems, Inc. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. APCO Graphics, Inc. ASI-Modulex, Inc. InPro Corporation Mohawk Sign Systems. Seton Identification Products.

Laminated Interior Signs: Solid phenolic panel core with graphic image covered with thermosetting resin face layer.

SIGNAGE

10 1400 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3. 4. C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Surface Finish: Mat. Edge Condition: Square cut. Corner Condition: Square. Thickness: 1/8 inch.

Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.

Panel Sign Schedule: 1.

Sign Type: Restroom Sign. a. b. c. d. e.

f. g.

h.

Sign Size: 6-inches wide by 8-inches high minimum. Background Finish/Color: Mat finish and in color as selected from manufacturer’s standard available colors. Character Size: 5/8 inch Helvetica Medium copy with Grade 2 Braille. Character Finish/Color: Mat finish and in contrasting color from background color, as selected from manufacturer’s standard available colors. Text/Message: At accessible toilets, 4-inch minimum accessibility symbol and gender symbol with verbal description placed directly below and followed by Grade 2 Braille. At non-accessible locker rooms/toilets, gender symbol with verbal description only. Location: On wall at latch side of door. Room and Text: and 1) Toilet 102 “WOMEN” no accessibility symbol 2) Toilet 103 “MEN” no accessibility symbol Quantity: One for each room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

SIGNAGE

10 1400 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2.

B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1.

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE

10 1400 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 10 2113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

B.

Section Includes: 1.

Solid-polymer toilet compartments.

2.

Urinal Shields

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B.

Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. Show overhead support or bracing locations.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.

D.

Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Each type of hardware and accessory.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 2113 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

E.

Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.

F.

Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.5

Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS A.

Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

C.

Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.

D.

Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.

E.

Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1. 2.

Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.

F.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

G.

Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

H.

Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.2

SOLID-POLYMER UNITS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B.

Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 2113 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

C.

Urinal Shield Style: Wall attached with floor mounted pilasters.

D.

Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. 2. 3.

Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E.

Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design.

F.

Brackets (Fittings): 1.

2.3

Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum.

ACCESSORIES A.

Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Material: Stainless steel. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B.

Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C.

Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistanttype heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 2113 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

FABRICATION A.

Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B.

Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

C.

Wall and Floor mounted Urinal Screens: 18” deep x 42” high, 12” above floor, with vertical pilaster.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1.

Maximum Clearances: a. b.

B.

3.2

Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. ADJUSTING

A.

Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 10 2113

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10 2113 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 10 2800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. Men's and Women's Toilets accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Division 10 Section “Toilet Compartments” for compartments and screens

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Construction details and dimensions. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. Material and finish descriptions. Features that will be included for Project. Manufacturer's warranty.

Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. 2.

Identify locations using room designations indicated. Identify products using designations indicated.

C.

Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

D.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.5

Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B.

Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS A.

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C.

Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036inch minimum nominal thickness.

D.

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

E.

Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: fabrication.

F.

Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G.

Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

10 2800 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

H.

Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I.

ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2

PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

D.

Basis-of-Design Product: Kimberly-Clark Professional; Everyday Best Value Single Roll Tissue Dispensor; Model #09021. Description: Double-roll dispenser. Mounting: Surface mounted. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- diameter tissue rolls. Material and Finish: ABS plastic, smoke gray.

Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

E.

A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. Kimberly-Clark Professional.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick; B-4262. Mounting: Surface mounted. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Lockset: Tumbler type. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.

Liquid-Soap Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – 4112. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. Capacity: 40 oz. Materials: Corrosion Resistant Valve, Stainless Steel, No. 4 Finish (Satin) Container. Lockset: Tumbler type.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

7. F.

4. 5.

Refill Indicator: Window type.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B270. Mounting: Surface mounted. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. Receptacle: Removable. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

Mirror Unit: 1. 2.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B290. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick. a.

3.

4.

Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

Size: As indicated on Drawings for multiple occupancy toilet rooms. 18” x 36” for single occupancy toilet rooms.

Robe Hook: 1. 2. 3.

2.3

Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a.

H.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: 1. 2. 3.

G.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B76717. Mounting: Single-prong unit. Dispenser Face: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2.

C.

Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

Underlavatory Guard:

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2.

3. 2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro; Lavguard 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

FABRICATION A.

General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B.

Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B.

Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.

3.2

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B.

Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C.

Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION 10 2800

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 10 4416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

1.3

Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

C.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B.

Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4416 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.

Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.

Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2. 3. 4. B.

Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. Potter Roemer LLC.

Valves: Manufacturer's standard. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container (Mark F.E.): UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1.

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4416 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B. 3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 10 4416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4416 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 13 3419 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

1.3

Structural-steel framing. Metal roof panels. Metal wall panels. Metal fascia and soffit panels. Thermal insulation. Accessories.

Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 1113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for personnel doors in metal building systems. 2. Section 08 3613 "Sectional Doors" for sectional vehicular doors in metal building systems. 3. Section 08 4113 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront" for personnel doors in metal building systems. 4. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100 “Door Hardware.” DEFINITIONS

A.

1.4

Terminology Standard: See MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in standards referenced by this Section. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-rod inserts into foundation walls and footings. Anchor rod installation, concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.

Review methods and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

3.

Compliance with requirements for purlin and rafter conditions, including flatness and attachment to structural members. Structural limitations of purlins and rafters during and after roofing. Flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels. Temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after installation. Roof observation and repair after metal roof panel installation.

Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

1.6

Condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. Structural load limitations. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials and erector's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Required tests, inspections, and certifications. Unfavorable weather and forecasted weather conditions and impact on construction schedule.

Compliance with requirements for support conditions, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. Structural limitations of girts and columns during and after wall panel installation. Flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels. Temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after installation. Wall observation and repair after metal wall panel installation.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of metal building system component.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Metal roof panels. Metal wall panels. Foamed-insulation-core metal panels. Metal soffit panels. Thermal insulation and vapor-retarder facings. Personnel doors and frames. Windows. Translucent roof panels. Roof ventilators. Louvers.

Shop Drawings: Indicate components by others. Include full building plan, elevations, sections, details and the following: 1.

2.

3.

Anchor-Rod Plans: Submit anchor-rod plans and templates before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and minimum required projection of anchor rods required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, clip spacing, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factoryand field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners. a. b.

4.

Show roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, and items mounted on roof curbs. Show wall-mounted items including personnel doors, vehicular doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.

Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than [11/2 inches per 12 inches: a.

Flashing and trim.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

D.

Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. 2.

Roof and Wall Panels: Nominal 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories. Flashing and Trim: Nominal 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3. 4. E.

2.

Vapor-Retarder Facings: Nominal 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples. Accessories: Nominal 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.

Door Hardware Schedule: Include details of fabrication and assembly of door hardware. Organize schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal building systems. 1.

1.7

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Include details of reinforcement. 1.

F.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Include analysis data indicating compliance with performance requirements and design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For erector manufacturer.

B.

Welding certificates.

C.

Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10.

Name and location of Project. Order number. Name of manufacturer. Name of Contractor. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for coldrolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. Governing building code and year of edition. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors.

D.

Erector Certificates: For qualified erector, from manufacturer.

E.

Material Test Reports: For each of the following products:

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. Shop primers. Nonshrink grout.

F.

Source quality-control reports.

G.

Field quality-control reports.

H.

Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.8

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.

1.9

Maintenance Data: For metal panel finishes. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. 1.

2.

Accreditation: Manufacturer's facility accredited according to the International Accreditation Service's AC472, "Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems." Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis and Shop Drawings by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B.

Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

C.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.

1.10

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B.

Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

1.11 A.

1.12 A.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. FIELD CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with panel installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. WARRANTY Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.

Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

2. B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Alliance Steel, Inc.

B.

Behlen Manufacturing Co.

C.

Ceco Building Systems

D.

Nucor Building Systems

E.

Varco-Pruden Buildings

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

F.

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Source Limitations: Obtain metal building system components, including primary and secondary framing and metal panel assemblies, from single source from single manufacturer. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A.

Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior.

B.

Primary-Frame Type: 1.

Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns.

C.

End-Wall Framing for West wall: Manufacturer's standard for buildings not required to be expandable, consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a bay design load, and end-wall columns.

D.

Expandable End-Wall Framing for East wall: Engineer east end wall to be expandable. Provide primary frame, capable of supporting full-bay design loads, and end-wall columns.

E.

Secondary-Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior-framed (bypass) girts.

F.

Eave Height: As indicated by nominal height on Drawings.

G.

Bay Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

A.

Roof Slope: 5 inches per 12.

B.

Canopy Roof Slope: 5 inches per 12.

C.

Roof System: Match existing roof profile as close as possible, using Manufacturer's standard standing-seam, trapezoidal-rib metal roof panels.

D.

Exterior Wall System: Match existing wall profile as close as possible, using Manufacturer's standard exposed-fastener, reverse-rib metal wall panels.

2.3

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design metal building system.

B.

Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2.

3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Deflection and Drift Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand serviceability design loads without exceeding deflections and drift limits recommended in AISC Steel Design Guide No. 3 "Serviceability Design Considerations for Steel Buildings." Deflection and Drift Limits: No greater than the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the span. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the span. Design secondary-framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings. Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/400 of the building height.

C.

Seismic Performance: Metal building system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

D.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.

E.

Structural Performance for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1.

F.

Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1.

H.

Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 1680 or ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1.

G.

Temperature Change: 120 dg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 or ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1.

Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

I.

Uplift Rating: UL 90.

FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. 1. 2.

2.4

Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1.

K.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1.

J.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. Hail Resistance: SH.

STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING A.

Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."

B.

Bolted Connections: Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using HighStrength Bolts."

C.

Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses.

D.

Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafters, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1.

General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. a.

2. 3. 4. 5. E.

Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to comply with manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect.

Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. Frame Configuration: Double pitched. Exterior Column: Tapered. Rafter: Tapered.

End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for fieldbolted assembly to comply with the following:

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3. F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. East wall framing to allow for future expansion.

Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, prepainted with coil coating, to comply with the following: 1.

2.

Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges. a. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees from flange, with minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges. a.

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

10.

G.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (51-by-51-by-3-mm) structural-steel angles or 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primaryframe flanges. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch (25-by-25-by-3-mm) structural-steel angles. Base or Sill Angles: Manufacturer's standard base angle, minimum 3-by-2-inch (76-by51-mm), fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. Purlin and Girt Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips fabricated from steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings. Door Frames: Provide head and jamb members of sufficient strength to support doors. a. Overhead Door Frame: Provide frame members of special depth to align back side of door frame with interior face of drywall. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.

Canopy Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural-framing system, designed to withstand required loads; fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide frames with attachment plates and splice members, factory drilled for field-bolted assembly. 1.

Type: Purlin and beam, below-eave type.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. H.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Provide steel beams and columns, base plates and anchor bolts for complete frame assembly.

Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing using the following, allow for future expansion on east wall: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345); minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) at each end. Cable: ASTM A 475, minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B, zinc-coated, seven-strand steel; with threaded end anchors. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels.

I.

Anchor Rods and Bolts: Provide anchor rods and bolts as required for attachment of metal building to foundation.

J.

Materials: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

8.

W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS) or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel with Improved Formability (HSLAS-F), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or HSLAS, Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480). Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS, Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), or HSLAS or HSLAS-F, Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60 (Z180) coating designation; mill phosphatized. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 11

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

a.

9.

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS, Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), or HSLAS or HSLAS-F, Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G90 (Z275) coating designation. b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, SS, Grade 50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150) coating. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hexhead bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. a.

10.

Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. a.

Finish: Plain.

11.

High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavyhex steel structural bolts[ or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with spline ends]; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.

12.

Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345). a. b. c. d. e.

13.

14.

Configuration: Straight. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain.

Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A. a. b. c. d. e.

Configuration: Straight. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain.

Threaded Rods: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345). a. b. c.

K.

Finish: Plain

Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain.

Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1.

Clean and prepare in accordance with SSPC-SP2.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 12

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Coat with manufacturer's standard primer. Apply primer to primary and secondary framing to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). a.

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Prime secondary framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) on each side.

METAL ROOF PANELS A.

Standing-Seam, Trapezoidal-Rib, Metal Roof Panels: Match profile of adjacent existing building roof panels using Manufacturer’s nearest standard profile. Formed with raised trapezoidal ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1.

Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) 24 ga. nominal uncoated steel thickness. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. b.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B.

Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed. Panel Coverage: Match existing. Panel Height: Match existing. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

Finishes: 1.

Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.

2.

2.6

Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

METAL WALL PANELS A.

Exposed-Fastener, Reverse-Rib, Metal Wall Panels: Match profile of adjacent existing building wall panels using Manufacturer’s nearest standard profile. Formed with recessed, trapezoidal major valleys and intermediate stiffening valleys symmetrically spaced between major valleys;

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 13

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1.

Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) 24 ga. nominal uncoated steel thickness. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. b.

2. 3. 4. B.

Major-Rib Spacing: Match existing. Panel Coverage: Match existing. Panel Height: Match existing.

Finishes: 1.

Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.

2.

2.7

Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

METAL SOFFIT PANELS A.

General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B.

Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile of adjacent existing building soffit panels using Manufacturer’s nearest standard profile. 1.

C.

Finish: Match finish and color of metal wall panels.

Concealed-Fastener, Flush-Profile, Metal Soffit Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and a single wide recess, centered between panel edges; with flush joint between panels; with flange for attaching interior finish; designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 14

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

2.8

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) 24 ga. nominal uncoated steel thickness. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. b.

2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Panel Coverage: Match existing. Panel Height: Match existing.

THERMAL INSULATION A.

General: “Simple Saver System” of 1 or 2 layer fiberglass batt insulation, manufactured by Thermal Design, Madison, NE, www.thermaldesign.com. 1. Obtain prior approval of other insulation systems before bidding.

B.

Unfaced Roof Insulation: 4” and 8” thick ASTM C 991, Type I, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m) density. 1. 1 layer of 4” batt over 1 layer of 8” batt insulation on roof. Pre-installed R Value of 38 (R13 + R25) 2. 1 layer of 8” batt on walls. Pre-installed R Value of 25.

C.

Insulation Hangers: “Fast-R” 32”x1” wide 20 ga. Steel pre-slotted and punched insulation hangers.

D.

Vapor Retarder: “Syseal Fabric FP” Reinforced high density polyethylene fabric 1. Perm rating of less than 0.02grains per hour per square foot based on ASTM E96. 2. ASTM E84 Class A with flame spread index of 25 or less. 3. Color: White 4. Joint Sealants: Simple Saver G524 solvent based sealant and Syseal double sided bonding tape

E.

Thermal Breaks: “Snap-R” 1” thick polystyrene snap on blocks, 24” long by 4” wide.

F.

Steel Retainer Straps: 0.02”x 1”, 100ksi yield high strength galvanized steel straps’ 1. Painted to match Vapor Retarder color. 2. Strap Pattern: Traverse strap 6” from each purlin flange and then maximum 5’-0 O.C. Longitudinal straps maximum 2’-6” O.C.

G.

Fasteners: #12 x ¾” or 312 x 1 1/4” plated self drilling screws

2.9

DOORS AND FRAMES A.

Swinging Personnel Doors and Frames: As specified in Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" and Section 08 4113 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront."

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 15

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

B.

Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100 “Door Hardware.”

C.

Overhead Door: As specified in Section 08 3613 "Sectional Doors" for sectional vehicular doors in metal building systems.

2.10 A.

ACCESSORIES General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1.

Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B.

Snow Guards: Single bar or tube clamp on system 1. Clamp on Brackets: mill finish aluminum with stainless steel fasteners. 2. Bars: Square or round, aluminum, stainless steel, or pre-finished metal to match roof color. 3. Products and Manufacturers: a. “Single Pipe Snow Fence” by Rocky Mountain Snow Guards, Inc.: www.rockymountainsnowguards.com. b. “Snobar” system by Snobox: www.snoblox-snojax.com. c. Pre-engineered building manufacturer’s continuous bar snow guard.

C.

Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negativeload requirements. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1-inch (25-mm) standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 16

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

D.

2. 3.

2.

G.

Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

Flashing and Trim: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.024inch (0.61-mm) 24 ga. nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. 1.

F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless otherwise indicated. 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Opening Trim: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) 24 ga. nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

Gutters: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.018-inch (0.46mm) nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2438-mm-) long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1.

Size: 6”x6” rectangular

2.

Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.

3. 4.

Color: Match fascia color. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.

Downspouts: Zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. 1.

Size: 5” x 5” rectangular

2.

Color: Match wall panel color.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 17

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

3.

Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.

4.

Base Cap: Provide metal base to cover top of round storm pipe at base of downspouts. Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.

H.

Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.

I.

Materials: 1.

Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. a.

b.

c. d. 2.

3.

4.

Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Metal Panel Sealants: a.

b.

2.11 A.

Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hexhead carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM sealing washer. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hexhead carbon-steel screws, with EPDM sealing washers bearing on weather side of metal panels. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylenecompound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer's standard size. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one part elastomeric polyurethane or polysulfide; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer.

FABRICATION General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly. 1.

Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 18

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.

B.

Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances.

C.

Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. D.

Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll forming or break forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. 1. 2.

E.

A.

Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary framing with specified primer after fabrication.

Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1.

2.12

Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous, submerged arc-welding process. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin web or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing if applicable, or punch for bolts. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary framing with specified primer after fabrication.

Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Special Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform source quality control inspections and to submit reports. 1.

Accredited Manufacturers: Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by an IAS AC472-accredited manufacturer approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such Work without special inspection.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 19

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

After fabrication, submit copy of certificate of compliance to authorities having jurisdiction, certifying that Work was performed according to Contract requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. 1.

C. 3.2

Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.

Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION

A.

Furnish anchor rods and bolts to concrete contractor for installation.

B.

Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition.

C.

Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3

ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING A.

Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written instructions and drawings.

B.

Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.

C.

Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

D.

Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 20

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2.

3.

E.

Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.

Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with doublenutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1.

Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified. a.

G.

Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned as required by manufacturer.

Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing. 1. 2. 3.

H.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. 2.

F.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. 2.

Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.

I.

Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

J.

Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 21

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B.

On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C.

Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural-panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. 1.

D.

Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation.

General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1.

Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E.

Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Locate metal panel splices over structural supports with end laps in alignment. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 1.

F.

Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.

Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 22

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. G.

Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. 2.

3.5

Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A.

General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. 1. 2.

B.

Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so that clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. Provide metal closures at ridge, eave and rake edges, and roof wall connections.

C.

Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or selfdrilling or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

D.

Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 23

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A.

General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11.

Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping screws. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B.

Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), noncumulative; level, plumb, and on location lines; and within 1/8inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 1. 2. Seal intermediate end laps and side laps of translucent panels with translucent mastic.

3.7

METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION A.

Provide metal soffit panels the full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

B.

Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 24

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A.

General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

B.

C.

Set vapor-retarder toward warm side of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths.

“Simple Saver System” Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1.

Install roof insulation before installation of metal roof panels.

2.

Retainer Straps: Install retainer straps in tension at the bottom plane of the purlins. a. Strap Pattern: Traverse strap 6” from each purlin flange and then maximum 5’-0 O.C. Longitudinal straps maximum 2’-6” O.C.

3.

Vapor Retarder: Install vapor retarder in tension on retainer straps. Fasten at each corner and retainer strap intersection. Trim and seal edges to each purlin and penetration to create a continuous vapor retarder.

4.

Thermal blocks:Install on purlins in pattern shown on shop drawings. Comply with UL90 wind uplift requirements.

5.

Insulation: a. Install lower 8” layer parallel to purlins. Fill all voids. b. Install upper 4” layer perpendicular and up over purlins. Fill all voids

“Simple Saver System” Wall Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1.

Thermal blocks: Install on girts in pattern shown on shop drawings. Comply with UL-90 wind uplift requirements.

2.

Install wall insulation after installation of metal wall panels.

3.

Insulation Hangers: Install on sides of metal studs as required to hold insulation in place.

4.

Insulation: Install 8” layer vertically. Fill all voids.

5.

Vapor Retarder: Install vapor retarder in tension on retainer straps. Fasten at each corner and retainer strap intersection. Trim and seal edges to each purlin and penetration to create a continuous vapor retarder.

6.

Retainer Straps: Install retainer straps in tension at the interior plane of the girts to hold vapor retarder in place.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 25

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION A.

Swinging Personnel Doors and Frames: As specified in Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" and Section 08 4113 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront."

B.

Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100 “Door Hardware.”

C.

Overhead Door: As specified in Section 08 3613 "Sectional Doors" for sectional vehicular doors in metal building systems.

3.10 A.

ACCESSORY INSTALLATION General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1.

2. 3.

Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

B.

Snow Guards: 1. Install 48” up slope from eaves. 2. Clamp to roof panel seams. Do not drill through roof panels.

C.

Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1.

2.

D.

Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

Gutters: Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches (914

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 26

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

mm) o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. E.

Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1524 mm) o.c. in between. 1. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system. Install prefinished metal base over storm pipe.

F.

Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.

3.11

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform field quality control special inspections and to submit reports.

B.

Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

C.

Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories. 1. 2.

Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

D.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

E.

Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1.

Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 27

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

F.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Doors and Frames: Immediately after installation, sand rusted or damaged areas of prime coat until smooth and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. 1.

Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.

END OF SECTION 13 3419

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

13 3419 - 28

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 0500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

1.3

Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Sleeves. Escutcheons. Grout. Mechanical demolition. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Painting and finishing. Supports and anchorages. Mechanical Identification Pipe curbs and equipment supports.

DEFINITIONS A.

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B.

Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C.

Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D.

Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

E.

Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F.

The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. 2. 3. 4.

G.

The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.

1.4

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. PE: Polyethylene plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.

B.

Welding certificates.

C.

Operation and Maintenance Data: At the end of the project the contractor shall submit two paper copies of the Operation and Maintenance Data to the owner in three ring binders with the project title and contractor’s contact information.

D.

Project Record Documents: Throughout the project the contractor shall keep a running record of as-builts showing deviations from the plans. At the end of the project the contractor shall submit one clean hand sketch set of documents to the owner.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B.

Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1.

Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. C.

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B.

Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C.

Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D.

Drawings are diagrammatical and do not necessarily show all fittings required to meet field conditions and coordination requirements with other trades. The contractor is responsible for making adjustments in the routing and elevations to meet the job requirements and maintaining required slopes as required for each system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A.

Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B.

Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B.

Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. b.

2.

Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H.

Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. 2. 3. 4.

I.

ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

TRANSITION FITTINGS A.

AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. 3. 4. B.

Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solventcement-joint end. 1.

Manufacturers: a.

C.

Manufacturers: a.

Thompson Plastics, Inc.

Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b.

E.

Eslon Thermoplastics.

Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1.

D.

Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. JCM Industries. Smith-Blair, Inc. Viking Johnson.

NIBCO INC. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.

Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1.

Manufacturers:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a. b. c. d. 2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Fernco, Inc. Mission Rubber Company. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.

Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B.

Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C.

Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

D.

Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.

E.

Capitol Manufacturing Co. Central Plastics Company. Epco Sales, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b.

F.

Capitol Manufacturing Co. Central Plastics Company. Eclipse, Inc. Epco Sales, Inc. Hart Industries, International, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

Calpico, Inc. Lochinvar Corp.

Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Perfection Corp. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. Victaulic Co. of America.

MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A.

Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4.

2.7

Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Pressure Plates: Plastic, Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

SLEEVES A.

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C.

Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.

Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E.

Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F.

PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

G.

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. ESCUTCHEONS

A.

Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B.

Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

2.9

GROUT A.

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

noncorrosive,

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.

Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B.

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C.

Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E.

Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

G.

Install piping at indicated slopes.

H.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

I.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J.

Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K.

Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L.

Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

M.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

N.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

O.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.

2. 3.

Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. b. c.

PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsumboard partitions. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1)

4.

Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

P.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. 2. 3.

Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q.

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

R.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S.

Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2

PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E.

Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

G.

Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H.

Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3

PIPING CONNECTIONS A.

Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

3.4

Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.

Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B.

Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D.

Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

E.

Install equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations. If the manufacturer’s recommendations are different than shown on the construction documents or as otherwise specified contact the engineer.

F.

Contractor shall provide all equipment and associated controls required to provide a complete and operable system.

G.

The scope of work for all Division 22 sections includes all miscellaneous work needed (whether or not specified or shown on the documents) to produce a complete and fully operational system.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 11

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PAINTING A.

Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Architectural Section.

B.

Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6

ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.

Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B.

Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.7

ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.

Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B.

Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C.

Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.8

GROUTING A.

Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D.

Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F.

Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G.

Place grout around anchors.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 12

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

H.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 22 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

22 0500 - 13

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 0523 – GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B. 1.2

Copper-alloy ball valves. Bronze check valves. Gray-iron swing check valves. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. Gate valves. Bronze globe valves.

See other Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping. SUBMITTALS

A.

1.3

Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

B.

ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

C.

NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D.

ANSI Compliance: ANSI 372

E.

Senate Bills 3874: All valves 2 inches and smaller shall be lead free with lead content less than 0.25%.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.

2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

VALVES, GENERAL A.

Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

B.

Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Brass Valves: NPS 2 and Smaller: Victaulic VIP Press 304™ ends, unless otherwise indicated

D.

Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E.

Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Valve Actuators: 1.

G. 2.3

Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.

Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A.

Manufacturers: 1.

Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. Crane Valves. Jenkins Valves. Stockham Valves. Grinnell Corporation. Hammond Valve. Jamesbury, Inc. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Victaulic Company of America Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Plumbing 1.

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Ball Valves – 2” and Smaller: Ball valves shall be 300 or 600# WOG, 150# SWP, 2 piece body style, full port, CP solid brass tunneled ball, reinforced Teflon seats, hex gland follower, bronze body of ASTM B584, blowout proof stem, lever handle.

BRONZE CHECK VALVES A.

Manufacturers: 1.

Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. b. c.

2.

Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

B.

Cincinnati Valve Co. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. Grinnell Corporation. Hammond Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell, Wm. Co. Victaulic Company of America Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

Plumbing 1.

2.

3.

2.5

Cincinnati Valve Co. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.

Check Valves – up to 2½”: Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# WOG, horizontal swing check, body and cap shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze, TFE disc, integral bronze seats, MSS SP-80 Check Valves – 3” and Larger: Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# WOG, horizontal swing check, body and cap shall be of ASTM A 126 cast iron, bronze trim, bolted cap, flanged ends, MSS SP-71 Silent Check Valves – 2 1/2” and Larger: Silent Check valves shall be 200# WOG minimum, body shall be of ASTM A 126 class B cast iron, center guided, SS spring and screws, bronze disc, bronze seat.

SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES A.

Manufacturers:

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Lift-Disc Check Valves: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Flomatic Valves. Grinnell Corporation. Hammond Valve. Metraflex Co. Milwaukee Valve Company. Mueller Steam Specialty. NIBCO INC. Victaulic Company of America

Plumbing 1. 2.

Spring Lift Check Valves – up to 2”: Check valves shall be 200# WOG minimum, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, TFE or Buna disc, integral seats. Spring-assisted, Grooved end Check Valves: Ductile Iron body, aluminum bronze disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, synthetic rubber seal suitable for intended service, 300 psi maximum CWP.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. 2.

B.

3.2

Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. Throttling Service: Ball, butterfly, or globe valves.

If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. VALVE INSTALLATION

A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C.

Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D.

Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E.

Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Provide stem extensions for ball valves being installed on insulated lines.

G.

Provide memory stops for all valves to be used for balancing.

H.

Install butterfly valves with stem at the horizontal, and so that the handle points down when closed, and in the direction of flow when in the open position.

I.

Adjust all packing nuts after installation.

J.

Provide lever handles for 6” and smaller butterfly valves.

K.

Provide gear operator for 8” and larger butterfly valves.

L.

Provide chain wheel operator when above 7 feet.

3.3

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction.

B.

Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-freealloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

END OF SECTION 22 0523

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 0529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. DEFINITIONS

A.

1.3

Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B.

Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

1.5

Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermalhanger shield insert indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

MANUFACTURED UNITS A.

Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2. 3. B.

Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2. 3. C.

B-Line Systems, Inc. Anvil International. GS Metals Corp. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. National Pipe Hanger Corp. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. PHS Industries, Inc. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

B-Line Systems, Inc. Anvil International. GS Metals Corp. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. National Pipe Hanger Corp. Thomas & Betts Corp. Unistrut Corp. Wesanco, Inc.

Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. PHS Industries, Inc. Pipe Shields, Inc. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B.

Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

C.

Hanger Rods: Galvanized all-thread, ASTM A 36.

D.

Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATIONS A.

Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

C.

Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3.

Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 . Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 , requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

D.

2.

Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. 2.

F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. b. c.

8. 9.

Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

G.

2. 3.

Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of highdensity, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3.

3.2

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types: 1.

H.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

INSTALLATION A.

Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B.

Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

D.

Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G.

Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

H.

Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

I.

Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1.

Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. b. c.

2. 3. 4.

Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. b.

5. 6. 3.3

Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.

3.4

Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. METAL FABRICATION

A.

Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3. 4.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

ADJUSTING A.

3.6

Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. PAINTING

A.

Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. See Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials and application requirements.

B.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 22 0529

HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

22 0529 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

1.3

Equipment nameplates. Equipment markers. Equipment signs. Access panel and door markers. Pipe markers. Valve tags. Warning tags.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C.

Valve numbering scheme.

D.

Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1.

Data: a. b. c.

2. 3. B.

Location: Accessible and visible. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 1. 2.

Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Data: a.

3. C.

Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. Labels of tested compliances.

Name and plan number.

Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.

Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch-thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment. 1.

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B.

Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

C.

Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. 1. 2.

2.3

Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, and Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch minimum. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

VALVE TAGS A.

Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. 2. 3.

2.4

Material: 0.032-inch-thick brass or aluminum. Material: 3/32-inch-thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

WARNING TAGS A.

Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3. 4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A.

3.2

Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A.

Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible.

B.

Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1.

2. 3.

Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: a. b. c. d.

C.

Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Pumps, compressors and similar motor-driven units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible. 1.

Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: a.

Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

3. D.

2. 3. 4.

3.3

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Pumps, compressors and similar motor-driven units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels. PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A.

Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow. 1.

B.

Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.4

Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

Near each valve and control device. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A.

Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of enduse fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B.

Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1.

Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. b.

2.

Valve-Tag Color: Coordinate colors with owner’s standard color scheme or as follows: a. b.

3.

Cold Water: Green. Hot Water: Yellow.

Letter Color: a. b.

3.5

Cold Water: 2 inches, round Hot Water: 2 inches, round.

Cold Water: White. Hot Water: Black.

WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A.

Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

B.

Provide warning tags on equipment and with wording as directed by the Architect.

3.6

ADJUSTING A.

Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

END OF SECTION 22 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 0700 – PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes mechanical insulation for water heater breeching, equipment and pipe, including the following: 1.

Insulation Materials: a. b.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.3

Flexible elastomeric. Mineral fiber.

Insulating cements. Adhesives. Sealants. Factory-applied jackets. Field-applied jackets. Tapes. Securements. Corner angles.

DEFINITIONS A.

ASJ: All-service jacket.

B.

FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.

C.

FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.

D.

PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.

E.

SSL: Self-sealing lap.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2.

1.6

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C.

National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards: requirements and standards.

Comply with installation

D.

ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2004: Comply with insulation values required by the standard.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.7

Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B.

Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and fieldapplied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SCHEDULING A.

Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B.

Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.

2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

INSULATION MATERIALS A.

Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied.

B.

Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C.

Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D.

Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E.

Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F.

Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1.

Products: a. b. c.

G.

Comply with

Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

2.3

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. Knauf Insulation; 1000 (Pipe Insulation). Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

INSULATING CEMENTS A.

Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1.

Products: a. b.

B.

Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1.

Products: a.

C.

P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.

Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1.

Comply with

Products: a. b. c.

2.4

Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

ADHESIVES A.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1.

Products: a. b.

Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

c. d. C.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2.5

Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

E.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.

SEALANTS A.

Joint Sealants: 1.

Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic-Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

B.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. Color: White or gray.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: Aluminum.

ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2.6

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: a. b. c. d. e.

3. 4. 5. 6.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: White.

FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A.

Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. 2.

ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

Products: 1)

2.7

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a.

8.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

Vinyl Jacket: UL-rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A.

Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C.

Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4.

Johns Manville; Zeston. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. PVC Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a.

Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

5. 2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

TAPES A.

ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.

Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 11.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/ inch in width. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 6.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/ inch in width. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. Compac Corp.; 130. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.

Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/ inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/ inch in width.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. Compac Corp.; 120. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 5 percent. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/ inch in width.

PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1.

Products: a.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.9

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.

Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 4 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/ inch in width.

SECUREMENTS A.

Bands: 1.

Products: a. b. c.

2. 3.

Childers Products; Bands. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4. B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1.

Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch or 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

2.

Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- or 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbonsteel washer. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

3.

AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. GEMCO; CD. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a.

Products: 1) 2) 3)

b. c.

d.

AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. GEMCO; Perforated Base. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, Aluminum, or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4.

Products: 1) 2)

b. c. d.

GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.

Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1½-inches in diameter. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2½-inches. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b.

c. 6.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a.

5.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. GEMCO; Press and Peel. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030-inch thick by 2-inches square.

Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, Aluminum, or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick, galvanized-steel, aluminum, or stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1½-inches in diameter. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b.

AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. GEMCO; R-150. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 11

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

7.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1½-inches in diameter. a.

Manufacturers: 1) 2)

GEMCO. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C.

Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal ¾-inch wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D.

Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel, or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.

2.10

ACS Industries, Inc. C & F Wire. Childers Products. PABCO Metals Corporation. RPR Products, Inc.

CORNER ANGLES

A.

PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B.

Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

C.

Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type [304] [316] [304 or 316].

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2. 3.

Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 12

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PREPARATION A.

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B.

Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1.

2.

C.

3.3

Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Install insulation products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and the National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards.

B.

Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

C.

Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

D.

Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E.

Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F.

Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G.

Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

H.

Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I.

Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 13

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

J.

Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

K.

Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2.

3.

4.

Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L.

Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

M.

Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N.

Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O.

Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P.

For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.4

Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Manholes. Handholes. Cleanouts.

PENETRATIONS A.

Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2.

Install insulation continuously through roof

Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 14

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B.

Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C.

Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1.

D.

Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2.

3.5

Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in other Divisions.

Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to other Divisions.

GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A.

Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B.

Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 15

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

6.

7.

8.

9.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C.

Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D.

Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 16

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A.

Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B.

Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3.

4. C.

Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2.

D.

Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2.

3. 4.

3.7

Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A.

Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 17

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

B.

3. 4.

2.

Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.8

Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1.

D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2.

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.

Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B.

Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. 2.

3.9

Sanitary Piping. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A.

Domestic Cold Water: 1.

NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be any of the following: a.

Pre-formed Fiber with ASJ Jacket: 1inch thick.

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 18

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

b. 2.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick.

NPS 1¼ and Larger: Insulation shall be any of the following: a. b.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Preformed Fiber with ASJ Jacket: 1-inch thick. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick.

Domestic Hot Water: 1.

NPS 1¼ and Smaller: Insulation shall be any of the following: a. b.

2.

Pre-formed Fiber with ASJ Jacket: 1-inch thick. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick.

NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be any of the following: a. b.

Pre-formed Fiber with ASJ Jacket: 1½- inches thick. Flexible Elastomeric: 1½-inches thick.

END OF SECTION 22 0700

PLUMBING INSULATION

22 0700 - 19

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.

B.

Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.

C.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

1.5

Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B.

Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.

C.

Field quality-control test reports.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B.

Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

C.

Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.

2.

2.2

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

PIPING MATERIALS A.

Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

B.

Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.3

COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A.

Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. 2. 3.

B.

Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3. 4.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. a.

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.

VALVES A.

Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B.

Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXCAVATION A.

3.2

Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A.

Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.

D.

Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

E.

Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1.

NPS 1 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper groovedend fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use castiron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B.

Cast-iron, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

C.

Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D.

Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. 2.

E.

3.4

Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." PIPING INSTALLATION

A.

Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B.

Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

C.

Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

D.

Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialities."

E.

Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators are specified in Division 22 Section " Domestic Water Piping Specialities."

F.

Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

G.

Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

3.5

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B.

Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-freealloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

D.

Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

3.6

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.

Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. 2.

Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. b. c.

100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B.

Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C.

Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D.

Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E.

Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4.

NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

F.

Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

G.

Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4.

NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

H.

Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

I.

Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7

CONNECTIONS A.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C.

Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D.

Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following:

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3.

3.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. 2.

Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. b.

3. 4. B.

Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. 2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

ADJUSTING A.

Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. Open throttling valves to proper setting. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. b.

5. 6. 7. 8. 3.10 A.

Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

CLEANING Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. 2.

Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. b.

Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) 2)

c. d.

Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B.

Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C.

Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

END OF SECTION 22 1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1116 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 1119 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following: 1.

1.2

Water distribution systems.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1.

1.3

Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Balancing valves. Strainers. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves. Water hammer arresters. Drain valves.

B.

Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

C.

Test report for reverse pressure backflow preventers.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified standards.

B.

Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C.

Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products, and installation.

D.

Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for electrical components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Water Hammer Arresters: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

2.2

Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. Leonard Valve Co. Powers Process Controls. Symmons Industries, Inc. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

Amtrol, Inc. Josam Co. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. Sparco, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Industries, Inc.; Ancon Drain Div. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES A.

Individual Fixture Tempering Valves: 1. 2.

Comply with ASSE standard 1016. Thermostatic mixing valve with solid bimetal thermostat directly linked to the valve porting controls hot and cold water and compensates for supply temperature and pressure fluctuations.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4. 5. 6. 2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Bronze, brass, nylon, and stainless steel construction; rough bronze finish; 125 psig maximum operating pressure. Adjustable high temperature limit stop for 110 deg F; temperature selector handle with cold-hot scale. Combination check-stops on inlets. Reference Product: Lenard Model TA

STRAINERS A.

Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. 2-inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. 2½-inch NPS and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-approved epoxy coating and flanged ends. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. a. b.

5. 6.

T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access end cap with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle. a. b. c. d.

B.

Simplex Type: Single unit, with one basket. Duplex Type: Double unit, with bronze or stainless-steel diverter valve and 2 baskets. Drain: Pipe plug. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.

Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted flange or clamp cover and drain with plug. 1. 2.

2.4

Drain: Pipe plug. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.

Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16-inch diameter holes and lift-out handle. Female threaded ends for 2-inch NPS and smaller, and flanged ends for 2½-inch NPS and larger.

DRAIN VALVES A.

Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ¾-inch NPS ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3.

B.

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap. Hose-End Drain Valve Option: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 body, with 3/4-inch NPS threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.

Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with 1/8-inch NPS side drain outlet and cap. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.

Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 201, bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units, ASME A112.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.

B.

Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe with galvanized steel boot reinforcement, and counterflashing fitting. 1.

2.6

Vent Cap: Open top, without cap.

FLASHING MATERIALS A.

Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

B.

General Use: 4 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0625-inch thickness. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0469-inch thickness. Burning: 6 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0937-inch thickness.

Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.

C.

Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D.

Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

E.

Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G.

Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H.

Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A.

General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B.

Install Individual fixture type tempering valves on all Barrier Free fixtures and elsewhere as indicated.

C.

Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

D.

Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated.

E.

Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.

F.

Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

G.

Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties.

3.2

FLASHING INSTALLATION A.

Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece.

B.

Burn joints of lead sheets where required.

C.

Solder joints of copper sheets where required.

D.

Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. 2.

E.

Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

G.

Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings.

3.3

COMMISSIONING A.

Before operating systems, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B. 3.4

Close drain valves. Open general-duty valves to fully open position. Remove and clean strainers. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.

Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning. PROTECTION

A.

Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 22 1119

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1119 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 1316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building. SUBMITTALS

A. 1.3

Field quality-control test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B.

Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PIPING MATERIALS A.

Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosionresistant metal band on each end.

B.

Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

C.

Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1.

Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a.

Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. 1)

ASTM A 666, Type 304,

NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2) D.

2. 3.

Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent. 1.

G.

NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands.

Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 1.

F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste and vent patterns.

PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F 409, drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as required for application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PIPING APPLICATIONS A.

Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1.

NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a.

Couplings: Compact, stainless steel.

2.

NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

3.

NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a.

Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. 2.

NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a.

3. 3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

NPS 2 to NPS 4: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

Refer to other Section for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.

B.

Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping installation.

C.

Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D.

Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

E.

Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F.

Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G.

Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

H.

Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

I.

Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

J.

Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction.

B.

Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. 2.

C.

3.4

Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-freealloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A.

Refer to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. 2.

Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a.

3.

MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B.

Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C.

Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D.

Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E.

Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3.

NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2- inch rod. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G.

Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

H.

Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I.

Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4.

NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

J.

Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

K.

Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.5

CONNECTIONS A.

Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B.

Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sized indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sized indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B.

Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C.

Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

3.7

Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

CLEANING A.

Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B.

Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C.

Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION 22 1316

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1316 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 1319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following: 1.

1.2

Soil, waste, and vent systems.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

1.3

Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. Force Main Piping: 100 psig.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: 1. 2. 3.

B.

1.4

Trap seal protection devices. Cleanouts. Floor drains, open receptors, and trench drains.

Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified standards.

B.

Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1.

Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C.

Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products, and installation.

D.

Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for electrical components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: a. b. c. d.

2.

Sanitary Post Hydrants: a.

3.

Josam Co.

Interceptors: a. b. c.

2.2

Brass Craft. Bristol Corp.; J & B Products Div. Moen, Inc.; Dearborn Brass Co. Div. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

Josam. Wade. Zurn.

TRAP SEAL PROTECTION DEVICES A.

Barrier Type Trap Seal Protection Devices: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SureSeal Manufacturing; Inline Floor Drain Trap Sealer, or a comparable product. Standard: ASSE 1072-2007. Body: ASB Plastic Diaphragm & Sealing Gasket: Neoprene Rubber Size: 3 inch. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: Compression fit sealing gasket 80 durometer.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, castiron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and spigot riser section of length to provide depth indicated; and where indicated, increaser fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets. Size P-trap as indicated.

B.

Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated. 1. 2.

C.

2.4

2-inch NPS: 4-inch minimum water seal. 2½-inch NPS and Larger: 5-inch minimum water seal.

Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A 112.1.2, cast-iron or cast-bronze, with fixed air-gap, inlet for drain pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet. CLEANOUTS

A.

Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

2.5

Josam Co. Jay R. Smith Co. Zurn Industries Wade, Division of Tyler Pipe.

Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, cast-iron body with straight threads and gasket seal or taper threads for plug, and a brass closure plug. Provide flashing flange and clamping ring for cleanouts in floors with membrane waterproofing. FLOOR DRAINS

A.

Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Josam Co. Jay R. Smith Co. Wade, Division of Tyler Pipe. Zurn Industries.

Floor Drains: ASME A112.2.1M, cast-iron body, with seepage flange. Floor drains for use as area drains in exterior slab on grade may be furnished with anchor flange instead of seepage flange and clamping device. Provide clamping device on floor drains in floors with membrane waterproofing.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

FLOOR SINKS A.

Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

2.7

Josam Co. Jay R. Smith Co. Wade, Division of Tyler Pipe. Zurn Industries.

Floor Sinks: ASME A112.2.1M, cast-iron body, with seepage flange. For floor drains for installation in floors having membrane waterproofing use seepage flange with clamping device FLASHING MATERIALS

A.

Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

B.

General Use: 4 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0625-inch thickness. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0469-inch thickness. Burning: 6 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0937-inch thickness.

Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.

C.

Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D.

Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

E.

Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F.

Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G.

Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H.

Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A.

General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturer’s written instructions and all applicable codes.

B.

Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Install air-gap fittings on units with atmosphericvent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain.

C.

Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.

D.

Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch NPS. Use 4-inch NPS for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch NPS and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

E.

Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.

F.

Install cleanout wall access covers, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

G.

Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor. Size outlets as indicated.

H.

Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: 1. 2. 3.

Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to one percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to one percent slope. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to one percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch total depression.

I.

Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

J.

Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

K.

Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to control protruding pipe fittings.

L.

Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties.

3.2

FLASHING INSTALLATION A.

Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.

B.

Burn joints of lead sheets where required.

C.

Solder joints of copper sheets where required.

D.

Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. 2.

Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

E.

Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

F.

Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

G.

Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings.

H.

Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having caulking recess.

I.

Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection if indicated.

3.3

COMMISSIONING A.

Before operating systems, perform the following steps: 1.

B.

Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.

Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PROTECTION A.

Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B.

Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.5

CLEANOUT SCHEDULE A.

Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron tee with spigot inlet and outlet, threaded brass countersunk plug drilled and tapped for round stainless steel cover and screw. Reference products: Wade series 8560 with 8480R wall access cover.

B.

Floor Cleanouts (Finished Floor Areas): Threaded adjustable housing and flanged ferrule; light duty scoriated nickel bronze top; round top for concrete or terrazzo floors; round top with carpet flange for carpeted areas; round top for tile floors.

C.

Floor Cleanouts (Unfinished Floors and Mechanical Rooms): Threaded adjustable housing and flanged ferrule; heavy-duty round scoriated cast-iron top. Reference products: Wade series 6000.

3.6

FLOOR DRAINS SCHEDULE A.

General: Size outlets as indicated on drawings.

B.

Floor Drain (FD-1): (Toilet Rooms, Showers, and Finished Floors): 1. 2. 3.

C.

Deep Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connecting piping, cleanout where indicated. Use seal traps for low use floor drains and where indicated. 1. 2.

3.7

Description: Adjustable 5-inch, nickel bronze top; ½-inch plugged primer tap, round top for concrete, terrazzo floors, and tile floors; vandalproof screws. Size: As indicated on plans. Product Reference: Wade #1100STD.

2-inches Size: 4-inches minimum water seal. 2 ½ inches and Larger: 5-inches minimum water seal.

FLOOR SINKS SCHEDULE A.

General: Size outlets as indicated on drawings.

B.

Floor Sink (FS-1): 1.

Description: Cast-iron floor drain with integral clamping collar, plugged 2-inch auxiliary tap, ½-inch plugged primer tap.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3. C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Size: As indicated on plans. Product Reference: Wade #1320.

Deep Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connecting piping, cleanout where indicated. Use seal traps for low use floor drains and where indicated. 1. 2.

2-inches Size: 4-inches minimum water seal. 2 ½ inches and Larger: 5-inches minimum water seal.

END OF SECTION 22 1319

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1319 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 3300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following for domestic water systems: 1.

1.3

Commercial, electric water heaters.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B.

Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

Differentiate between

C.

Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D.

Maintenance Data: Division 1.

E.

Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4

For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

22 3300 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on specific units indicated. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Section in Division 1.

C.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D.

ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

E.

ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following: 1.

1.5

ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2.

Failures include heating elements and storage tanks. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion: a. b.

Heating Elements: Five years. Storage Tanks: 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Commercial, Storage, Electric Water Heaters: a. b. c.

American Water Heater Co. Bock Water Heaters, Inc. Bradford White Corp.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

22 3300 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. 2.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Bryan Steam Corp.; Bryan Boilers Subsidiary. Cemline Corp. HESco Industries, Inc. Lochinvar Corp. Patterson-Kelley Co. Precision Parts Corp. PVI Industries, Inc. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co. State Industries. Vaughn Manufacturing Corp.

Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: a.

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Safety: W. H. Safety Products, Inc.

LIGHT-COMMERCIAL, STORAGE, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A.

Description: Comply with UL 174 or UL 1453, and listed by manufacturer for commercial applications.

B.

Storage Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure rating. 1.

2. 3. 4. C.

Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connections and controls. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.

Heating Elements: Two electric, screw-in, immersion type. 1. 2.

Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element with wiring arrangement for simultaneous operation. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

D.

Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.

E.

Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium.

F.

Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank.

G.

Special Requirement: NSF 5 construction.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

22 3300 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A.

Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. 1. 2.

Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination relief valve. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.

B.

Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.

C.

Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping. 1.

Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.

D.

Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch-high, enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.

E.

Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

F.

Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

CONCRETE BASES A.

3.2

Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A.

Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases. 1.

Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

22 3300 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

C.

Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.

D.

Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.

E.

Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.

F.

Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. 1.

Exception: Omit thermometers for the following: a. b. c. d.

Household, water heater inlet and outlet piping. Commercial, point-of-use, water heater inlet piping. Light-commercial, water heater inlet piping. Water heater with thermometer outlet piping.

G.

Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves and Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

H.

Fill water heaters with water.

I.

Charge compression tanks with air.

3.3

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C.

Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.

D.

Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.

E.

Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 26 Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

Connect hot-water-

22 3300 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Ground equipment. 1.

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B.

In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

3.5

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Verify that piping system tests are complete. Check for piping connection leaks. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping. Check operation of circulators. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices. Energize electric circuits. Adjust operating controls. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping system application requires higher temperature. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION 22 3300

ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

22 3300 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

1.3

This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components. SUBMITTALS

A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

C.

Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.

D.

Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.

Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Michigan Barrier Free Code; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people.

C.

Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

D.

2.

1.5

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.

B.

Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.

1.6

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS A.

Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified. 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

PLUMBING FIXTURE MANUFACTURERS A.

Subject to compliance with specifications, provide plumbing fixtures manufactured by one of the following: 1.

Water Closets: a. b. c. d.

American Standard, Inc. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products Eljer; A Household International Co. Mansfield

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

e. f. 2.

Bemis Mfg. Co. Church Seat Co. Kohler Co. Olsonite Corp.

Coyne & Delany Co. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. Sloan Valve Co. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Flush Valve Operations.

Miscellaneous Fittings (except faucets): a. b. c. d. e. f.

6.

American Standard, Inc. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. Eljer; A Household International Co. Mansfield Kohler Co. Zurn Bradley

Flushometers: a. b. c. d.

5.

Kohler Co. Zurn

Toilet Seats: a. b. c. d.

4.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Lavatories: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Chicago Faucet Co. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. Eljer; A Household International Co. Kohler Co. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Zurn

Supports: a. b. c. d. e.

Josam Co. Mifab. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

LAVATORY/SINK FAUCETS A.

Standards: Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar-type-fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 2.5-gpmmaximum flow rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

Lavatory Faucet - Single Lever (Commercial): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Single lever, 4-inch center set, all metal, deck mount construction, and vandal resistant. Spout integral with body; with vandal resistant 2.0 gpm aerator. 3/8-inch O.D. copper tube inlets. Metal grid strainer and 1-1/4” tail piece. All copper and brass waterway; ceramic disc or stainless steel ball valve. Product references: a. b. c. d.

2.4

Delta 523-HDF. American Standard 2385-402. Kohler K-15198. Zurn Z-7443

MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS A.

Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. Include polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS A.

Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing fixtures, equipment, and appliances. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

2.6

Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2 and ANSI Z124.2a. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

FITTINGS A.

Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Provide all required fittings for fixtures scheduled on the drawings including supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.

B.

Fittings include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7. 8. 2.7

Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, loose-key type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS (DN10) flexible copper tube with knob end. Use chromeplated tube for exposed applications. Supply Risers: 1/2 inch OD x 12 inch long flexible copper tube, knob-end tailpiece. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. Traps (Commercial): Tubular brass with 0.045-inch wall thickness, slip-joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. Traps (Institutional): Cast brass with slip-joint inlet, cleanout pipe nipple to wall, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, with slip-joint inlet, and size to match equipment. Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch wall thickness, and size to match equipment.

TOILET SEATS A.

Commercial Seat: 1.

Description: Open front elongated; injection molded, heavy duty, solid plastic; high stain and chemical resistant; one piece stainless steel hinge posts; integrally molded, color matched bumpers; concealed check hinge; white.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Optional Features: Antimicrobial compound molded-in to control germs. Product Reference: a.

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Olsonite #10CC

LAVATORY CARRIERS A.

Concealed arm type with heavy duty structural steel pipe uprights, welded feet, adjustable cast iron arms.

B.

Product Reference: 1. 2.

2.9

Wade #520 series Zurn Z-12 series.

WATER CLOSETS A.

2.10 A.

Floor Mounted Tank Type Water Closet: Siphon jet, elongated bowl, white vitreous china, close-coupled two piece toilet with shelf top tank, insulated tank, trip lever flushing mechanism, 1.6 gallon flush. 1. Rim Height: 16-3/4-inches for barrier free toilet. LAVATORIES Countertop Lavatories: Refer to drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated.

B.

Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

APPLICATIONS A.

Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following:

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water coolers. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed, box-mounted, electric water coolers. Fabricate reinforcement from 2-by-4-inch or 2-by-6-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking between studs or 1/4-by-6-inch steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs.

Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following: 1.

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall.

PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A.

Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B.

Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.

C.

Install toilet seats on water closets.

D.

Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach.

E.

Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

F.

Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.

G.

Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fixtures to reinforcement built into walls.

H.

Fasten wall-mounted fixtures to reinforcement built into walls.

I.

Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.

J.

Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.

K.

Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.

L.

Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop valve is not specified.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position.

M.

Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.

N.

Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.

O.

Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

P.

Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated.

Q.

Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

R.

Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildewresistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.4

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1.

Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other Division 22 Sections.

B.

Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Provide supplies and stops and traps for all lavatories and sinks.

C.

Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.

D.

Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 26 Sections.

E.

Install all low voltage control wiring including control transformer in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and Division 26 requirements.

3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C.

Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D.

Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.6

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B.

Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. malfunctioning units and controls.

C.

Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream.

D.

Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E.

Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following: 1. 2.

3.7

Replace damaged and

Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

PROTECTION A.

Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B.

Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4000 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 0500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Painting and finishing. Supports and anchorages. Mechanical Identification Pipe curbs and equipment supports.

DEFINITIONS A.

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B.

Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C.

Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D.

Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E.

Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F.

The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. 2. 3. 4.

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. PE: Polyethylene plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

G.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

SUBMITTALS A.

Operation and Maintenance Data: At the end of the project the contractor shall submit two paper copies of the Operation and Maintenance Data to the owner in three ring binders with the project title and contractor’s contact information.

B.

Project Record Documents: Throughout the project the contractor shall keep a running record of as-builts showing deviations from the plans. At the end of the project the contractor shall submit one clean hand sketch set of documents to the owner.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1. 2.

Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

B.

Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

C.

Install all equipment, materials, and accessories per manufacturers written instructions.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B.

Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C.

Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.

2.

2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

PIPE, TUBE AND FITTINGS A.

Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B.

Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3

JOINING MATERIALS A.

2.4

Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. PIPE CURBS AND EQUIPMENT CURBS

A.

Manufacturers 1. 2. 3.

B.

Pate. RPS Corporation. Thy Curb, Thybar Corporation.

Equipment Support Rails

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

2. 3. C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

18 Gauge galvanized steel with integral base plate, continuous welded corner seams, pressure treated wood nailer, counter flashing with leg screws, and internally reinforced for load bearing requirements. Height: Minimum 18 inches high or as specified. Length: As required for equipment and to span structural supports.

Pipe Curb Assemblies 1.

2. 3.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Heavy Gauge galvanized steel with unitized construction and integral base plate, 3 lb density insulation and 2x2 nailer. Furnish acrylic clad thermo plastic cover, fastening screws, & graduated step boots with stainless steel clamps. Height: 18 inches Multiple Pipes: Size and configure cover to accommodate all pipes serving equipment including power conduit and control conduit.

Pipe Seals for Single Roof Penetrations: 1. 2.

One piece spun aluminum base with 5 inch flange, polyvinyl chloride boot with graduated widths and adjustable stainless steel clamps. Reference Product: Pate-Pipe Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.

Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B.

Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D.

Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

E.

Install equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations. If the manufacturer’s recommendations are different than shown on the construction documents or as otherwise specified contact the engineer.

F.

Contractor shall provide all equipment and associated controls required to provide a complete and operable system.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

G.

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

The scope of work for all Division 23 sections includes all miscellaneous work needed (whether or not specified or shown on the documents) to produce a complete and fully operational system. PAINTING

A.

Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Architectural Section.

B.

Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.3

ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.

Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B.

Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.4

ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.

Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B.

Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C.

Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.5

GROUTING A.

Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D.

Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G.

Place grout around anchors.

H.

Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 23 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 0500 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Equipment nameplates. Equipment markers. Equipment signs. Duct markers.

SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

1.5

ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1.

Data: a. b. c.

2. 3. B.

Location: Accessible and visible. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 1. 2.

Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Data: a.

3. C.

Name and plan number.

Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.

Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. Labels of tested compliances.

Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch-thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment. 1.

Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A.

3.2

Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A.

Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment: 1.

B.

Air handling units.

Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1.

2. 3.

Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment: a.

C.

Air handling units, air terminals, and fan coil units.

Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible. 1.

Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: a.

Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

3. D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: 1.

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Air handling units.

DUCT IDENTIFICATION A.

Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

3.4

Green: For cold-air supply ducts. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. ADJUSTING

A.

Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

END OF SECTION 23 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0553 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

The scope of work for this section includes all miscellaneous work needed (whether or not specified or shown on the documents) to produce a complete and fully operational system.

B.

This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1.

Air Systems: a.

2. 3. 4. 1.2

Constant-volume air systems.

HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

SUBMITTALS A.

Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

B.

Warranties specified in this Section.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.

B.

Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. 2.

C.

Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems, NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems, or SMACNA's HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

1.5

Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B.

Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1.

Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B.

Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C.

Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

D.

Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

E.

Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

F.

Examine system and equipment test reports.

G.

Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

H.

Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

I.

Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J.

Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

K.

Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

L.

Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B.

Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.3

Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A.

Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Environmental Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section. B.

Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C.

Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.4

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A.

Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B.

Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C.

Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D.

Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E.

Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F.

Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G.

Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H.

Check for airflow blockages.

I.

Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J.

Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

K.

Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5

PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A.

Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1.

Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a. b. c.

d. 2.

4.

5.

6.

7. B.

Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. Measure the performance of enthalpy wheel including pressure drop, entering and leaving air temperatures and moisture contact.

Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1.

Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a.

2. C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a.

3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1.

2. 3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A.

Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.7

Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. Motor horsepower rating. Motor rpm. Efficiency rating. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A.

Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

B.

Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

C.

Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.8

TOLERANCES A.

Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. 2.

3.9

Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

FINAL REPORT A.

General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.

General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Title page. Name and address of TAB firm. Project name. Project location. Architect's name and address. Engineer's name and address. Contractor's name and address. Report date. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. Summary of contents including the following: a. b.

12. 13. 14. 15.

Indicated versus final performance. Notable characteristics of systems.

Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. b. c. d. e.

D.

Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1.

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. a.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Conditions of filters. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. 2. 3.

Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. Position of balancing devices.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.10

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

ADDITIONAL TESTS

A.

After deficiencies have been corrected, rebalance system and resubmit report.

B.

Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

C.

Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 23 0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0593- 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1.

Insulation Materials: a. b.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B.

Insulating cements. Adhesives. Sealants. Factory-applied jackets. Field-applied jackets. Tapes. Securements. Corner angles.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Flexible elastomeric. Mineral fiber.

Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

DEFINITIONS A.

ASJ: All-service jacket.

B.

FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.

C.

FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.

D.

PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.

E.

SSL: Self-sealing lap.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SUBMITTALS A.

1.5

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2.

Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C.

National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards: Comply with installation standards.

D.

ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2004: Standards.

1.6

Comply with insulation values required by the Energy

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.7

Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B.

Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SCHEDULING A.

Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B.

Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. 2.

2.2

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

INSULATION MATERIALS A.

Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied.

B.

Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C.

Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D.

Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E.

Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F.

Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Paint flexible Elastomeric insulation exposed to sun light with Armaflex WB finish, white. 1.

Products: a. b.

HVAC INSULATION

Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

23 0700 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

c. G.

RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. Johns Manville; Microlite. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation without factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.3

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.

H.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

INSULATING CEMENTS A.

Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1.

Products: a. b.

B.

Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1.

Products: a.

C.

Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.

Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C 449/C 449M.

HVAC INSULATION

Comply with

23 0700 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Products: a. b. c.

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

ADHESIVES A.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

C.

Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

D.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

E.

Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1.

Products: a. b.

HVAC INSULATION

Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.

23 0700 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

c. d. e. 2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.

SEALANTS A.

Joint Sealants: 1.

Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic-Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.

Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: a. b. c. d. e.

3. 4. 5. 6. B.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. Color: White or gray.

FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2. 3. 4. 5. C.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: Aluminum.

ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Products: a. b. c. d. e.

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: White.

FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A.

Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a.

Products: 1)

8.

2.7

Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

Vinyl Jacket: UL-rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A.

Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4.

5.

Johns Manville; Zeston. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

Metal Jacket: 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2.

Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.

Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. a. b. c. d. e.

Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing Factory cut and rolled to size. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

HVAC INSULATION

Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. Tee covers. Flange and union covers. End caps. Beveled collars.

23 0700 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

7) 8) E.

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Valve covers. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.

PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. TAPES

A.

ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.

Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 11.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/ inch in width. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 6.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/ inch in width. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1.

Products:

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. Compac Corp.; 130. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/ inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/ inch in width.

Products: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. Compac Corp.; 120. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 5 percent. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/ inch in width.

PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1.

Products: a.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.

Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 4 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/ inch in width.

PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1.

Products: a.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape.

Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

6. 2.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/ inch in width.

SECUREMENTS A.

Bands: 1.

Products: a. b. c.

2. 3. 4. B.

Childers Products; Bands. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1.

Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

2.

Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

3.

AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. GEMCO; CD. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 11

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a.

c.

d.

4.

AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. GEMCO; Perforated Base. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, Aluminum, or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a.

Products: 1) 2)

b. c. d.

5.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Products: 1) 2) 3)

b.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.

Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b.

c.

HVAC INSULATION

AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. GEMCO; Press and Peel. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, Aluminum, or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

23 0700 - 12

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

6.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, aluminum, or stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a.

Products: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b. 7.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. GEMCO; R-150. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a.

Manufacturers: 1) 2)

GEMCO. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C.

Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D.

Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel, or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.

2.10

ACS Industries, Inc. C & F Wire. Childers Products. PABCO Metals Corporation. RPR Products, Inc.

CORNER ANGLES

A.

PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B.

Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

C.

Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 13

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2. 3.

3.2

Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B.

Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1.

2.

C.

3.3

Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Install insulation in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards.

B.

Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

C.

Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 14

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

D.

Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E.

Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F.

Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G.

Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

H.

Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I.

Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J.

Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

K.

Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2.

3.

4.

Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L.

Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

M.

Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2.

3.

Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a.

4.

For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 15

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

5.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

N.

Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

O.

Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

P.

Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

Q.

For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.4

Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Manholes. Handholes. Cleanouts.

PENETRATIONS A.

Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2.

3. 4. B.

3.5

Install insulation continuously through roof

Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION

A.

Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1.

Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 16

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a.

b.

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A.

Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Draw jacket material smooth and tight. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install jacket with 1½-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1.

Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

C.

Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

D.

Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2.

Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1¼ circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 17

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.

4.

5. E.

3.7

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33½-inches or less. The 33½-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

Where rubberized bituminous resin jackets are installed comply with manufacturers installation instructions. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A.

Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Items Not Insulated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.8

Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. Flexible connectors. Vibration-control devices. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. Exposed supply ductwork outside of the mechanical room, in an occupied area being conditioned by the supply ductwork

INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A.

Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

B.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1½-inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Concealed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be any of the following: 1.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick.

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 18

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. C.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1½-inches thick. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1½-inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1½-inches thick. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1½-inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Exposed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

H.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1½-inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

G.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch thick. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1½-inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

F.

Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1½-inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

E.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Flexible Elastomeric: 2-inches thick. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2-inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be any of the following: 1. 2.

Flexible Elastomeric: 1½-inches thick. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1½-inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

END OF SECTION 23 0700

HVAC INSULATION

23 0700 - 19

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

Pipes, tubes, and fittings. Piping specialties. Piping and tubing joining materials. Valves. Mechanical sleeve seals.

DEFINITIONS A.

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B.

Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C.

Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

1.4

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.5

Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. 2.

Piping specialties. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4. 5. 6.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.

B.

Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

C.

Welding certificates.

D.

Field quality-control reports.

1.6

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B.

Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C.

Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D.

Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.

1.8

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B.

Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.9

Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner's written permission.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B.

Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. b. c. d. e. f.

5.

Material Group: 1.1. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

Mechanical Couplings: a.

Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

b.

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode.

PIPING SPECIALTIES A.

Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.3

Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. Maximum Length: 72 inches

JOINING MATERIALS A.

Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B.

Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C.

Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4

MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A.

See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B.

General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

CWP Rating: 125 psig. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

C.

4.

Comply with

CWP Rating: 125 psig. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. E.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38. 1. 2. 3.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Lee Brass Company. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. Plug: Bronze. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. Pressure Class: 125 psig.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

7. 8. 2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.

Dielectric Unions: 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. 3. 4. 5.

2.6

Capitol Manufacturing Company. Central Plastics Company. Hart Industries International, Inc. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

SLEEVES A.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B.

Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7

GROUT A.

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

noncorrosive,

23 1123 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.

Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B.

Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C.

Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3

OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A.

Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B.

Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. 2. 3.

Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

C.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

D.

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1.

Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A.

Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B.

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C.

Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D.

Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F.

Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G.

Locate valves for easy access.

H.

Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

J.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K.

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M.

Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

N.

Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1.

Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. O.

Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

P.

Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

Q.

Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a.

5.

Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

Prohibited Locations: a.

b.

Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

R.

Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

S.

Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

T.

Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

U.

Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

V.

Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

VALVE INSTALLATION A.

3.6

Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector. PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C.

Threaded Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Welded Joints: 1. 2. 3.

3.7

Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.

Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.8

NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

CONNECTIONS A.

Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C.

Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D.

Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E.

Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.9

LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.

3.10

Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. PAINTING

A.

Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B.

Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

C.

Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

D.

Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.

3.11 A.

3.12 A.

DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves. OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1.

Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 11

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3.13 A.

A.

Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following: Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve.

Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following: Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve.

Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. 2.

D.

Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

1. 2. C.

Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. 2. B.

Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. 2. 3.14

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

1. B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve.

Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. 2.

Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve.

END OF SECTION 23 1123

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 1123 - 12

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 3113 – METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Rectangular ducts and fittings. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. Duct liner.

Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

B.

Drawings are diagrammatical and shall not be used as a shop drawing for fabrication. The contractor is responsible to coordinate with other trades and adjustments in elevation and routings as required to meet the project requirements.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports.

B.

NFPA Compliance:

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. C.

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, and the Michigan Department of Public Health Manual of Ventilation Systems for Food Service Establishments. COORDINATION

A.

The contractor is responsible for coordination with other trades and maintaining required clearances for access and servicing of equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.

2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

SHEET METAL MATERIALS A.

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B.

Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C.

Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: galvanized sheet metal ducts.

D.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3

Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

RECTANGULAR FITTING CONSTRUCTION A.

General: Construct fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Use low loss fittings.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Elbows: Use full radius type with inside radius equal to the duct width except where space limits use. Where square elbows are shown or used, provide turning vanes. Use airfoil type vanes where duct velocities exceed 2000 fpm.

C.

Transitions: Construct transitions between duct sizes with tapered fittings. Use 22.5-degree maximum angle per side for diverging transitions and 30-degree maximum angle for converging transitions.

D.

Divided Flow Fittings: Use full radiused tees, square tees with turning vanes, or enlarged branch connections with 45-degree entry equal to ¼ times the duct width. Round branch ducts to rectangular ducts may be conical or enlarged rectangular to round fittings with 45 degree enlarged entry. Round taps serving individual diffusers may be straight taps where branch duct velocities are less then 800 fpm.

2.4

DUCT LINER A.

Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1.

Manufacturers: a.

2.

Materials: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, except for density. a. b. c. d.

2.5

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

Thickness: 3/4 inch. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 at 75 deg F mean temperature. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

SEALANT MATERIALS A.

Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B.

Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C.

Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

D.

Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.

Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2.

B.

Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. 2. 3.

Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer.

C.

Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D.

Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. 2. 3.

2.7

Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are electrolytically separated from ducts.

RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A.

Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. 2.

B.

Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1.

Manufacturers:

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a. b. c. C.

Ductmate Industries, Inc. Nexus Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.

Manufacturers: a. b.

2. 3.

2.8

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Ductmate Industries, Inc. Lockformer.

Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A.

Use 1-inch thick liner on supply and return air ducts for a minimum distance of 10 ft from all air handling equipment or distance as noted on the plans. Increase the duct dimension as required to provide the internal clear dimensions shown on the drawings.

B.

Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

C.

Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

D.

Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

E.

Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

F.

Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

G.

Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

H.

Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

I.

Fan discharges. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500 fpm or where indicated.

Where indicated on the drawings, secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. 1. 2.

2.9

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: 1. 2. 3.

J.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A.

Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B.

Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

C.

Flat-Oval, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Fabricate ducts larger than 72 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 1.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.

D.

McGill AirFlow Corporation. SEMCO Incorporated. Dixie Sheet Metal Products. Foremost. Lindab.

Duct Joints: 1. 2.

Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances. a.

Manufacturers: 1)

Lindab Inc.

E.

90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

F.

Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reducing entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

G.

Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of dieformed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: 1.

2.

Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg: a. b. c. d.

3.

Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg: a. b. c. d.

4.

5.

6.

Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.

Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.

90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for materialhandling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch thick with 2-piece welded construction. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified above. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

DUCT APPLICATIONS A.

Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.2

Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 6-inch wg. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

DUCT INSTALLATION A.

Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

C.

Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D.

Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

E.

Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

F.

Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

G.

Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Offsets and transitions as required to coordinate with other trades and equipment are the responsibility of the contractor.

H.

Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I.

Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.

J.

Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. 1.

Where ducts pass over light fixtures, maintain a minimum elevation of 6-inches above finish ceiling, or more as required by the light fixtures.

K.

Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

L.

Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M.

Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. Provide sheet metal flanges on both sides of walls, exposed or concealed for sound sensitive walls.

N.

Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.

O.

Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles where line of sight permits view of ducts. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

P.

Connections to existing equipment: Duct connections to equipment shall be full size to match the specific equipment used. 1. 2.

3.3

Provide tapered transitions to equipment. Adjust ductwork configuration to match equipment used on project.

SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A.

Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1.

B.

For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

HANGING AND SUPPORTING A.

Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

B.

Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C.

Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

D.

Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 1.

3.5

Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

CONNECTIONS A.

Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."

B.

Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports: 1. 2.

3.

Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section. a. b. c. d.

4.

Allowable Leakage, Supply Duct Systems: 1 percent of design airflow. Allowable Leakage, Return Duct Systems: 2 percent of design airflow. Allowable Leakage, Exhaust Supply Duct Systems: 2 percent of design airflow. Allowable Leakage, Supply Duct Systems, Terminals to Air Outlets: 2 percent of design airflow.

Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

5.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.

END OF SECTION 23 3113

METAL DUCTS

23 3113- 11

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 3300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

1.2

Backdraft dampers. Manual-volume dampers. Turning vanes. Duct-mounted access doors and panels. Flexible connectors. Flexible ducts. Duct accessory hardware.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each manufactured product indicated, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection.

B.

Shop Drawings: 1.

1.3

Backdraft dampers.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B.

NFPA Compliance: 1. 2.

NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS A.

Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 3300- 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2

DAMPERS A.

Backdraft Dampers: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Manual-Volume Dampers: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

2.3

Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum. Blade Seals: Felt, vinyl, or neoprene. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. Return: Counter-weighted, adjustable.

Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, steel-sheet channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inchthick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

TURNING VANES A.

Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 3300- 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

B.

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A.

Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. 1. 2.

2.5

Factory fabricate with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch aluminum sheets. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene. a. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. b. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

FLEXIBLE DUCTS A.

Uninsulated: Comply with UL 181, Class 1, spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing or corrugated aluminum. 1.

B.

Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inchthick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.6

Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.

Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.

ACCESSORY HARDWARE A.

Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B.

Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.

C.

Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 3300- 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B.

Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

C.

Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

D.

Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 1. 2.

Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.

E.

Label access doors.

F.

Install balance dampers on all branch ducts serving diffusers and grilles.

G.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs with general trades.

END OF SECTION 23 3300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 3300- 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.3

Ceiling-mounting ventilators.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B.

Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan sound-power ratings. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C.

Field quality-control test reports.

D.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

23 3423 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B.

AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C.

NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D.

UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

E.

Comply with NFPA 96 for kitchen hood exhaust fans.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B.

Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

American Coolair Corp. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. Breidert Air Products. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

23 3423 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Carnes Company HVAC. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.; a division of W. W. Grainger, Inc. Greenheck. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. Loren Cook Company. NuTone Inc. Penn Ventilation.

B.

Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications.

C.

Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

D.

Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

E.

Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

F.

Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

G.

Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.2

Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel springs, and fusible link. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.

MOTORS A.

Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

B.

Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2.3

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

23 3423 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B.

Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch.

C.

Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D.

Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2

CONNECTIONS A.

Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B.

Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D.

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.

3.

Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

23 3423 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. B.

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B.

Adjust belt tension.

C.

Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D.

Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E.

Lubricate bearings.

END OF SECTION 23 3423

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

23 3423 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 3713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, grilles, and louvers. DEFINITIONS

A.

Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B.

Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C.

Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. 2.

1.4

Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

B.

NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

C.

NEC Compliance: Install electrical devises in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

D.

UL Compliance: Provide electrical components tested and labeled by UL.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

23 3713- 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications, provide products manufactured as follows: 1.

Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: a. b. c. d.

2.2

Krueger. Titus. Nailer. Price.

MANUFACTURED UNITS A.

Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

3.2

Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION

A.

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B.

Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

23 3713- 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

C.

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

D.

Provide dampers on all diffusers and grilles accessible from the face of the unit wherever duct mounted balance dampers are inaccessible.

E.

After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. Adjust all slot diffusers to not blow downward.

F.

After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 23 3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

23 3713- 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 5400 - FURNACES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. Air filters. Refrigeration components. Condensing units.

Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.

C.

Furnace. Thermostat. Air filter. Refrigeration components.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals for each of the following: 1. 2.

FURNACES

Furnace and accessories complete with controls. Air filter. 23 5400 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4. D. 1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Refrigeration components. Condensing units.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B.

ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C.

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: 1.

Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion: a. b. c. d. e.

1.7

Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years. Refrigeration Compressors: Five years. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

FURNACES

23 5400 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp. Lennox Industries Inc. Trane. York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group.

B.

General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Condensing Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54.

C.

Cabinet: Steel. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive. 1.

Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

E.

Type of Gas: Natural.

F.

Heat Exchanger: 1. 2.

G.

Burner: 1.

2. H.

Primary: Aluminized steel. Secondary: Stainless steel.

Gas Valve: 100 percent safety two-stage modulating main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.

Gas-Burner Safety Controls:

FURNACES

23 5400 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.

I.

Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.

J.

Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories.

K.

Accessories: 1.

Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: combustion-air inlet and vent through outside wall.

2.

CPVC Plastic Vent Materials. a. b. c.

CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket type. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493. 1) 2)

3.

Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PVC Plastic Vent Materials: a. b. c.

PVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 1785. PVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 2466, socket type. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1) 2)

2.2

PVC plastic fitting to combine

Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

THERMOSTATS A.

Programmable Thermostat: Wall-mounted, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with the following features: 1. 2.

FURNACES

7 day programming: 2, 4, or 6 events/day. Auto changeover: 1 stage heat / 1 stage cool.

23 5400 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

2.3

Robert Shaw 9901 Honeywell T7300 Carrier P374-2300

Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling. 1.

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

24 volt AC (18-30 VAC). Temperature control range: 45-90 deg F. Accuracy: +/- 1.0 deg F. Auto changeover deadband: Selectable 2 to 8 deg F. Temporary override: 3 hour max or next setpoint. Remote sensor capable: 1 indoor and 1 outdoor. Single stage heat/cool. Programmable fan: Continuous during occupancy intermittent during unoccupied hours. Three level security. Auxiliary dry contacts to activate auxiliary equipment during occupied hours. LED Display. Reference products: a. b. c.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair.

Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Controls." AIR FILTERS

A.

2.4

Disposable Filters: 1-inch- thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher, in sheet metal frame. REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS

A.

General Refrigeration Component Requirements: 1. 2.

B.

Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFCfree refrigerants. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 1.

FURNACES

Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporator coil, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.

23 5400 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections. 1.

Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, ½-inch thick.

D.

Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."

E.

Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Unit: 1.

2.

Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. Compressor: Hermetically sealed reciprocating or scroll type. a. b. c. d. e. f.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. F.

Crankcase heater. Vibration isolation mounts for compressor. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. Two-speed compressor motors shall have manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A. Refrigerant: R-410A.

Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. Low Ambient Kit: Fan speed control device; permits operation down to 0 deg F; with evaporator freeze thermostat. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. Minimum SEER: 13.0. Short cycle protector. Permanent filter dryer.

Refrigerant line sets: Type ACR copper, ASTM B280, with ½-inch thick flexible elastomeric insulation on suction pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

FURNACES

23 5400 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C.

Examine roughing-in for gas and refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

D.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54 and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B.

Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. required by installation conditions.

C.

Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor.

D.

Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.

E.

Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on concrete base.

3.3

Provide optional bottom closure base if

CONNECTIONS A.

Install gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas code. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.

B.

Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C.

Water piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect water piping with union and ball valve.

D.

Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt. 1. 2. 3.

FURNACES

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

23 5400 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a. b. c.

d.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials: 1)

4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal.

E.

Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

F.

Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled, compressorcondenser unit. 1. 2. 3.

4. G.

Install air exchange units in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1.

3.4

Size and install tubing in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flared ends, following procedures in CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

Interlock unit operation with furnace occupied cycle to run continuously during occupancy.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

FURNACES

Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

23 5400 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

B.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. STARTUP SERVICE

A.

Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Inspect for physical damage to unit casings. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

B.

Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's operational checklist.

C.

Measure and record airflows.

D.

Verify proper operation of capacity control device.

E.

After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings.

3.6

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B.

Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.

3.7

CLEANING A.

After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.

3.8

DEMONSTRATION A.

Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

FURNACES

23 5400 - 9

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

END OF SECTION 23 5400

FURNACES

23 5400 - 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 23 6313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; dimensions; required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions for each model indicated.

B.

Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C.

Refrigerant Piping Diagrams: Submit detailed refrigerant piping diagrams approved by the manufacturer and showing all required components, pipe sizes, double suction risers, solenoid valves, etc specific for the project.

D.

Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.

E. 1.2

Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule.

Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Refrigerant Piping: Comply with the manufacturers requirements for configuration sizing and components. The Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative shall review the piping requirements before bidding and advise the Contractor of any deviations or changes required to comply with the manufacturer’s requirements. The Contractor shall include the cost of all piping and wiring requirements for refrigeration components and specialties.

B.

Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is listed and labeled. 1. 2.

The Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C.

Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.”

D.

Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels,” Division 1.

AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

23 6313 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

E.

Comply with NFPA 70.

F.

Comply with UL 303, “Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing and Compressor Units.”

1.3

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by Contractor and signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer’s written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed. 1.

Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide condensing units by one of the following: 1.

Condensing Units, Air Cooled: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group. McQuay. York International Corp.

CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS A.

Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of compressors, condenser coils, fans, motors, refrigerant reservoirs, and operating controls.

B.

Compressor: Hermetically sealed and isolated for vibration. 1.

Motor: Include thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

23 6313 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079 2.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Compressor: Include manual reset, high-pressure switch and automatic reset, lowpressure switch.

C.

Condenser: Copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, with liquid subcooler.

D.

Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated fan motor with thermal-overload protection.

E.

Accessories include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

F.

2.3

Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing. Low ambient kit to permit operation down to 0 deg F as scheduled. Crankcase heater. Automatic reset timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.

Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.

B.

Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels,” Division 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install condensing units according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B.

Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances.

C.

Install ground-mounted units on 4-inch thick, reinforced concrete base, 4 inches larger than condensing unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.

D.

Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports. Anchor unit to supports with removable fasteners. CONNECTIONS

AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

23 6313 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

A.

Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit. Install and wire furnished field-mounted accessories.

B.

Connect refrigerant and condenser water piping to water-cooled condensing units. Maintain clear tube removal space.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.

B.

Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 1.

C. 3.4

Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest. CLEANING

A.

3.5

After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. COMMISSIONING

A.

Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

B.

Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Inspect for physical damage to unit casing. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. Check that all bolts and screws are tight. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

C.

Lubricate bearings on fans.

D.

Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.

E.

Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

F.

Start unit according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

23 6313 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079 1.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Complete manufacturer’s starting checklist.

G.

Check operation of condenser capacity control device.

H.

Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.

I.

After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.

3.6

DEMONSTRATION A.

Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. 2. 3.

Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice.

END OF SECTION 23 6313

AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

23 6313 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.

Work includes all electrical items and systems shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

B.

Unless specifically dimensioned, the work shown on the drawings is diagrammatic, and is intended only to show general arrangement.

C.

Include in the work all accessories and devices necessary for the intended operation of any system, whether or not specifically shown or specified.

1.2

STANDARDS OF QUALITY A.

The specifications establish the standard of quality required, either by description of by references to brand name, name of manufacturers or manufacturer’s model number.

B.

Where one product only is specifically identified by name of manufacturer’s model number, the Contractor shall base his bid on the use of the name product. Where multiple names are used, the Contractor shall base his bid on the use of any of those products named.

C.

The Contractor may submit with his bid, the names of products which are proposed as substitutions for products named in specifications. Each proposed substitution shall be accompanied by a written sum of money to be added or deducted from his bid. The Owner reserves the sole right to accept or reject said substitutions with or without cause.

D.

When equipment and/or materials are proposed to be purchased from a manufacturer other than those specified, the Contractor shall provide complete data adequate for the Engineer’s evaluation of the proposed substitution.

E.

When the equipment other than that specified is used, the Contractor shall be responsible for any extra cost of required revisions such as structural steel, concrete, electrical, piping, etc. Such additional costs shall be identified at the time such substitutions are proposed.

1.3

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. 1. 2.

Submittals Maintenance Manuals

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 0010- 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4. 1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Rough-ins Electrical Installations

SUBMITTALS A.

The Contractor shall review, approve and submit shop drawings, with promptness so as to cause no delay in his work or in that of others. No submissions will be accepted by the Engineer without the signed review and approval of the Contractor.

B.

The Contractor shall check and verify pertinent field measurements, quantities of equipment and materials required.

C.

Submittals shall be identified by reference to the drawings, sections of specifications, or equipment symbols to which they relate.

D.

Shop drawings, when required, shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Verification of information given in Contract Documents such as performance, dimensions, weight, materials, construction, types, models, manufacturer, etc. Equipment layouts drawn to scale as may be required. Wiring diagrams and schematics for equipment. Any special construction conditions. Other information/data as may be requested.

E.

All submittals shall identify the specific details of the product or assembly. All optional features being proposed shall be so noted, or the submittal will be rejected.

F.

Review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specification. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of his work.

G.

For items being resubmitted, clearly identify changes made from the initial submittal requested by the Engineer. The Engineer will review only those changes requested and identified by the Contractor.

1.5

MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

Prepare maintenance manuals including the following information for equipment items: 1.

Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 0010- 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

3. 4. 1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

1.7

Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. PERMITS, FEES, AND CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL

A.

Contractor shall acquire all permits and certificates.

B.

Contractor shall provide all labor and instruments required for tests and cleaning of systems.

C.

Whenever tests are required, three (3) copies of the test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer.

D.

Tests may be observed by the Engineer or his representative. Notify the Engineer a minimum of three weeks in advance of the test dates.

1.8

COMPLIANCE WITH CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A.

In the absence of specific instruction in the technical specifications, equipment and installation shall conform to the following applicable codes, standards and regulations, latest editions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). American National Standard Institute (ANSI). Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL). American Welding Society Code (AWSC). Local Building, Electrical, and Fire Codes. National Electrical Code (NEC). Service Rules and Regulations of Local Electrical Utility Company. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). U.S. Department of Health & Human Services “HRS-M-HF” 84-1. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 0010- 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

ROUGH-IN A.

Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

3.2

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A.

General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

10. 11. 12.

Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in pouredin-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Install systems, material, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. Coordinate all electrical requirements with other trades and their shop drawings prior to installing conduit, wire, switches and breakers. Notify engineer of any discrepancies between document and actual supplied equipment.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 0010- 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

CUTTING AND PATCHING A.

General: Performing cutting and patching in accordance with the following requirements: 1.

Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: a. b. c. d.

Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. Remove and replace defective work. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the contract documents. Upon written instruction from the Engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for Engineer observation of concealed work.

END OF SECTION 26 0010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 0010- 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Electrical equipment coordination and installation. Common electrical installation requirements.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.

To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C.

Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1.

B.

Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

26 0500 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

C.

Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D.

Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E.

Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

END OF SECTION 26 0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

26 0500 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.2

Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.

Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B.

Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN2.

2.2

CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A.

2.3

Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 0519 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A.

Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B.

Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2

CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A.

Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B.

Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C.

Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D.

Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E.

Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F.

Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.

Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C.

Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D.

Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E.

Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 0519 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

F. 3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." CONNECTIONS

A.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B.

Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C.

Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B.

Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6

SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.

3.7

Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." FIRESTOPPING

A.

3.8

Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2. 3.

After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 0519 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a.

b.

B.

Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

Procedures used. Results that comply with requirements. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 0519 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C.

Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B.

Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2

CONDUCTORS A.

Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Bare Copper Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0526 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

7.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

CONNECTORS A.

Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B.

Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATIONS A.

Conductors: Install stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. 2.

3.2

Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A.

Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.3

Feeders and branch circuits. Lighting circuits. Receptacle circuits. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Flexible raceway runs. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

INSTALLATION A.

Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B.

Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0526 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3.

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Perform tests and inspections. 1.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

Tests and Inspections: 1. 2.

3.

After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal.

C.

Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

E.

Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. 2.

F.

Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).

Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0526 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.2

Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

B.

Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.4

Comply with NFPA 70. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A.

Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C.

Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D.

Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E.

Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATION A.

Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B.

Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C.

Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2

SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C.

Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D.

Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8.

E.

To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

END OF SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A.

Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B.

GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C.

EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

D.

FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

E.

LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

F.

Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1.

Fittings for EMT: a. b.

G.

2.2

Material: Steel. Type: Setscrew.

Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A.

General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B.

Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

C.

Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D.

Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

E.

Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F.

Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

G.

Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

H.

Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I.

Gangable boxes are prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

RACEWAY APPLICATION A.

Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Exposed Conduit: GRC. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C.

Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D.

Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

E.

Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F.

Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G.

Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H.

Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B.

Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C.

Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D.

Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E.

Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F.

Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G.

Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H.

Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

I.

Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1.

Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3. 4. 5. J.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. 2.

Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

K.

Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L.

Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M.

Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N.

Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O.

Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P.

Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q.

Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R.

Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S.

Surface Raceways: 1. 2.

Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

T.

Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U.

Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. 2. 3.

V.

Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1.

2.

Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. b. c.

3.

4. 5.

W.

Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. 2.

X.

Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Y.

Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z.

Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. BB.

Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC.

Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3

SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.

3.4

Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." FIRESTOPPING

A. 3.5

Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. PROTECTION

A.

Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1.

Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 26 0533

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. Sleeve-seal systems. Sleeve-seal fittings. Grout. Silicone sealants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SLEEVES A.

Wall Sleeves: 1.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

B.

Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C.

Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.2

SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A.

Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. 2. 3.

Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

26 0544 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A.

2.4

Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. GROUT

A.

Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors.

B.

Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C.

Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D.

Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5

SILICONE SEALANTS A.

Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1.

B.

Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.

Comply with NECA 1.

B.

Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C.

Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a.

Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

26 0544 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

b.

2. 3. 4.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. 2.

Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E.

Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F.

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.2

SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.

Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B.

Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3

SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A.

Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B.

Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C.

Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D.

Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

26 0544 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

END OF SECTION 26 0544

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

26 0544 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.2

Identification for raceways. Identification of power and control cables. Identification for conductors. Warning labels and signs. Equipment identification labels.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70.

C.

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D.

Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E.

Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.3

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B.

Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. 2.

Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C.

Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D.

Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.2

ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B.

Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. 2.

C.

2.3

Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B.

Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C.

Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, selflaminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1.

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B.

Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, selflaminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

C.

Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

D.

Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1.

2.5

Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A.

Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B.

Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1.

2.6

Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A.

Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B.

Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B.

Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C.

Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D.

Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E.

Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F.

Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

G.

System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

H.

Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

3.2

IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A.

Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

B.

Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1.

Power.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1.

Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. b.

Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) 2) 3)

c.

Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue.

Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D.

Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E.

Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

F.

Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor designation.

G.

Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

H.

Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. 2. 3.

I.

Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels. 1. 2. 3.

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

J.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1.

Labeling Instructions: a.

b. c. d.

2.

Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label] [Stenciled legend 4 inches high. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

Equipment to Be Labeled: a.

b. c. d. e.

Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. Enclosed switches. Enclosed circuit breakers. Enclosed controllers.

END OF SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 0923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1.

1.2

Indoor occupancy sensors.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. 2.

1.3

Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. Lightolier Controls. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. Sensor Switch, Inc. Watt Stopper.

General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

26 0923 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2.

3. 4.

5.

c.

7. 8. C.

Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.

PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement. 1. 2. 3.

D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. Mounting: a. b.

6.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10foot- high ceiling.

Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

26 0923 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

E.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. 2.

3.

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. 2. 3.

C.

Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. Lightolier Controls. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. Sensor Switch, Inc. Watt Stopper.

Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

Wall-Switch Sensor Tag OC: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8.

Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off." Voltage: Match the circuit voltage. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

26 0923 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.

Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B.

Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C.

Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

SENSOR INSTALLATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B.

Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2

WIRING INSTALLATION A.

Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

B.

Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpowerlimited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.

Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

26 0923 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

3.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B.

Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. 2.

Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C.

Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5

ADJUSTING A.

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1.

3.6

For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

DEMONSTRATION A.

Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.

END OF SECTION 26 0923

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

26 0923 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.2

Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B.

Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1.

Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C.

Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D.

Field quality-control test reports including the following: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

Panelboard Schedules: balancing.

PANELBOARDS

For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

26 2416 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

F.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

C.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D.

Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.5

Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

PANELBOARDS

26 2416 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. b. c. d.

2.2

Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D.

MANUFACTURED UNITS A.

Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Phase and Ground Buses: 1. 2.

C.

Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door.

Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box.

Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.

PANELBOARDS

26 2416 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3. D.

2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A.

UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-connected short-circuit rating.

B.

Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.4

LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A.

Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

B.

Doors: Full concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.5

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1.

Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2.

Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiterstyle fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.

3.

4. B.

Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. 2.

Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

PANELBOARDS

26 2416 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3. 4.

2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory-assembled to operate as a single unit.

ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A.

Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B.

Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.

D.

Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.

E.

Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F.

Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

G.

Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

3.2

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B.

Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C.

Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

PANELBOARDS

26 2416 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

CONNECTIONS A.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B.

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. 2.

Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.

B.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

C.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.

2. D.

Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. 2.

3. 4. E.

Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scanning of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1.

Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

PANELBOARDS

26 2416 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

CLEANING A.

On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

26 2416 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.2

Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. Twist-locking receptacles. Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units. Weather-resistant receptacles. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

1.3

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A.

Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70.

C.

Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. 2.

Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

WIRING DEVICES

26 2726 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A.

Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.

2.3

Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

GFCI RECEPTACLES A.

General Description: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection.

Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.

2.4

Cooper; VGF20. Hubbell; GFR5352L. Pass & Seymour; 2095. Leviton; 7590.

TOGGLE SWITCHES A.

Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B.

Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1)

Single Pole: a) b) c) d)

2)

WIRING DEVICES

Cooper; AH1221. Hubbell; HBL1221. Leviton; 1221-2. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

Three Way:

26 2726 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a) b) c) d) 3)

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Cooper; AH1223. Hubbell; HBL1223. Leviton; 1223-2. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

Four Way: a) b) c) d)

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Cooper; AH1224. Hubbell; HBL1224. Leviton; 1224-2. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

WALL PLATES A.

Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

2.6

Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. FINISHES

A.

Device Color: 1.

B.

Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Coordination with Other Trades:

WIRING DEVICES

26 2726 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

2.

3. 4. C.

2. 3. 4.

Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Existing Conductors: a. b. c.

Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

Device Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. E.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Conductors: 1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

Receptacle Orientation: 1.

Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

WIRING DEVICES

26 2726 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

F.

Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G.

Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2

GFCI RECEPTACLES A.

3.3

Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. IDENTIFICATION

A.

Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B.

Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2.

B.

Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C.

Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

WIRING DEVICES

26 2726 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

END OF SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

26 2726 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers: 1. 2.

1.2

Nonfusible switches. Enclosures.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Current and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

B.

Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C.

Field quality-control test reports including the following: 1. 2. 3.

Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

D.

Manufacturer's field service report.

E.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.

Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

26 2816 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.

1.5

Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A.

Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D/Group Schneider.

B.

Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C.

Accessories: 1. 2. 3.

Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

26 2816 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

ENCLOSURES A.

NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

B.

Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

C.

Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.3

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B.

Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Prepare for acceptance testing as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. Verify rating of installed fuses.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

26 2816 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.

B.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

C.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.

3.5

Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

CLEANING A.

On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B.

Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 26 2816

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

26 2816 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.2

Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Emergency lighting units. Exit signs. Lighting fixture supports.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. Ballast, including BF. Energy-efficiency data. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. 2.

1.4

Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. Complete schedule at end of specification.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.

Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting unit.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4. 5.

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. LED Modules: 1 for every 25 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6

COORDINATION A.

1.7

Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. WARRANTY

A.

Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

2.

B.

Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

Special Warranty for LEDs and Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

2.2

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A.

Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B.

Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C.

Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D.

Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E.

Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F.

Diffusers and Globes: 1.

Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. b.

G.

Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. UV stabilized.

Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1.

Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. b.

c. d. e.

"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

f. 2.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A.

General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. Sound Rating: Class A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. BF: 0.88 or higher. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B.

Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C.

Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. 2.

D.

Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1.

2.4

Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT A.

Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1.

2. 3.

Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1400 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

a. b. 4. 5.

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay.

LED DRIVER A.

High efficiency.

B.

If installed outside, shall be fully encased in potting for moisture resistance.

2.6

EXIT SIGNS A.

General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Internally Lighted Signs: 1. 2.

Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. b. c.

d. e.

2.7

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A.

General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. 2.

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

2.8

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage.

FLUORESCENT LAMPS A.

2.9

T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. LEDs

A.

High-brightness LEDs mounted to a metal core circuit board.

B.

Provide 4100 K color temperature, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

C.

Provide color accuracy (CRI) 80.

2.10

LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A.

Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B.

Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C.

Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D.

Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E.

Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F.

Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

G.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

Lighting fixtures: 1. 2.

Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B.

Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C.

Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. 2. 3.

4.

D.

3.2

Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." IDENTIFICATION

A.

3.3

Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

C.

Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4

STARTUP SERVICE A.

Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

END OF SECTION 26 5100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5100 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

____________________________________ CONTRACTOR

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

_____________________________________________ PROJECT

________________________ PHONE ________________________ FAX

FIXTURE TYPE

MANUFACTURER

INTERIOR LIGHTING

CATALOG NUMBER

VOLTAGE

REPLACEMENT LENSE

BALLAST MANUFACTURER

26 5100 - 9

REPLACEMENT BALLAST

LAMP MANUFACTURER

LAMP CATALOG NUMBER

LAMPS PER FIXTURE

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

INTERIOR LIGHTING

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

26 5100 - 10

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 27 0500 - VOICE AND DATA ROUGH IN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

1.2

This Section includes empty boxes and conduit for voice and data outlets. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate box and conduit requirements with equipment supplier. (Owner)

PART 2 - PARTS 2.1

RACEWAY A.

2.2

Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

A.

General: System includes supports, mounting brackets, and installation hardware for components. Metal hardware is of corrosion-resistant material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION A.

General: Install system according to NFPA 70, applicable codes, and manufacturer's printed instructions.

B.

Install boxes. Boxes shall be 4-inch square, 3½-inch deep with single gang plaster ring.

C.

Recess mount raceway, except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.

D.

All conduit shall be minimum of 1-inch.

E.

Stub all conduit to above accessible ceilings.

END OF SECTION 27 0500

VOICE AND DATA ROUGH IN

27 0500 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

VOICE AND DATA ROUGH IN

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

27 0500 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

SECTION 28 3111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

1.2

Manual fire-alarm boxes. System smoke detectors. Notification appliances.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

1.3

Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. Provide new devices as shown. Extend existing and wire to new devices. SUBMITTALS

A.

General Submittal Requirements: 1. 2.

Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. b. c. d.

Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide certificate from manufacturer showing contractor is an authorized dealer.

B.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C.

Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. Include battery-size calculations. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 1

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

5.

6.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E.

Field quality-control reports.

F.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in other sections, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. Record copy of site-specific software. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. b. c. d.

5. 6. 7. G.

Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. Copy of NFPA 25.

Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.4

Frequency of testing of installed components. Frequency of inspection of installed components. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

Software operating and upgrade manuals. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. Device address list. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 2

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

B.

Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

C.

Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.6

Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of firealarm service. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Architect's written permission.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A.

1.7

Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service. SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A.

Comply with UL 864.

B.

Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

1.8

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 3

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

2. 3. 4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

FACP and Equipment: a. b. c.

2.

Wire and Cable: a. b. c. d.

3.

Comtran Corporation. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

Audible and Visual Signals: a. b. c. d.

2.2

GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.

Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc. Commercial Products Group. Gentex Corporation. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.

SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A.

Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Manual stations. Heat detectors. Smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 4

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1. 2. 3. C.

Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

Valve supervisory switch.

System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

E.

Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. Break in standby battery circuitry. Failure of battery charging. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit.

2.3

FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT – Existing

2.4

MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A.

General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1.

2. 2.5

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A.

General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. 2. 3.

Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. Detectors shall be four-wire type. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 5

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

4.

5. 6. 7.

b. c.

Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. 2.

Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. b. c. d. e.

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and poweron status. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Primary status. Device type. Present average value. Present sensitivity selected. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. 2.

Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. b. c. d. e.

3. 4. 5.

Primary status. Device type. Present average value. Present sensitivity selected. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 6

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

6. 2.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A.

General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1.

Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B.

Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C.

Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1.

Rated Light Output: a.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.7

15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A.

2.8

Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER – Existing

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 7

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. 2.

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix Ain NFPA 72. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

D.

Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

E.

Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

F.

Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

G.

Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.2

IDENTIFICATION A.

3.3

Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C.

Perform tests and inspections.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 8

CGTS Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA 26B1512079

1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1310110.2

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

Tests and Inspections: 1.

Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a.

b.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E.

Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F.

Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

H.

Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I.

Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION 28 3111

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

28 3111 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass. 2. Clearing and grubbing. 3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 4. Division 23 Section "Turf and Grasses” for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.

1.3

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A.

Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SUBMITTALS A.

Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B.

Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

1.6

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. 2.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

C.

Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D.

Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS[ (Not Applicable)] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B.

Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C.

Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1.

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

UTILITIES A.

Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated public utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 1.

B.

Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. 2.

C.

3.3

Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

D.

Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A.

Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B.

Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.

C.

Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. 2. 3.

3.4

Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.

SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.

Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B.

Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

2. 3. 3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. Concrete Sidewalk and pavement removal by Owner.

DISPOSAL A.

Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1.

Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

2.

Clean spoilt and demolished concrete can be hauled to Three Sisters Pit at Camp Grayling.

END OF SECTION 31 1000

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 31 2000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

1.3

Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks pavements lawns and plantings. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Subbase course for concrete walks & pavements. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Soil Erosion & Sedimentation Control” for erosion control measures and procedures. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 3. Division 33 Section “Storm Utility Drainage Piping” for storm sewer piping. DEFINITIONS

A.

Structure: Shall include manholes, catch basins, etc.

B.

Backfill terminology for underground piping (see detail on drawings). 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Trench Area: From 12” above crown of pipe to finished grade. Bedding Area: From 12” above crown of pipe to 12” below invert of pipe. Special Foundation Area: From 12” below invert of pipe to satisfactory foundation soils. Drainage Area: From 12” below invert of pipe to bottom of pavement section.

Backfill terminology for structures (see detail on drawings).

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Trench Area: From bottom of structure to bottom of pavement section or to bottom of topsoil layer. Bedding Area: From bottom of structure to 12” below bottom of structure. Special Foundation Area: From 12” below bottom of structure to satisfactory foundation soils.

D.

Aggregate Base Course: paving.

E.

Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

F.

Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G.

Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

H.

Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

I.

Earthwork: Includes all work (cut or fill) necessary to adjust the existing site to the proposed grades.

1.4 A.

SUBMITTALS Material Test Reports: The Contractor will employ a qualified testing agency, who will submit reports directly to the Architect, with copies to the Contractor, for items including: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Test reports on borrow material. Suitability of footing sub-grade material. In-place soil density tests. Tests for each layer of placed fills or backfill. a. b. c. d. e.

1.5 A.

Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt

Subbase. Aggregate base. Trench area. Bedding area. Special foundation area.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration.

Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.

Contact utility – locator service for area where project is located before excavating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SOIL MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B.

Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C.

Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these group symbols. 1.

Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D.

Fill: Satisfactory soil materials

E.

Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F.

Subbase Material: 1.

G.

Aggregate Base Course: 1.

H.

MDOT 902.08 Class II or suitable excavated material as approved by Engineer.

MDOT 21AA or suitable excavated material as approved by Engineer.

Trench Area: 1.

Non-pavement areas: a.

EARTH MOVING

Satisfactory soil materials.

31 2000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.

MDOT 902.08, Class II or suitable excavated material as approved by Engineer.

Bedding Area: 1.

MDOT 902.08, Class II or suitable excavated material as approved by the Engineer.

J.

Special Foundation Area: Verify with Engineer.

K.

Drainage Material: 1.

L.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Under pavement: a.

I.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

MDOT 902.07, 34R

Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION

A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B.

Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C.

Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 1 Section "Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control," during earthwork operations.

D.

Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost.

3.2

DEWATERING

A.

Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B.

Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

2.

3.3 A. 3.4 A.

A.

A.

3.7

Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. Install a dewatering system, to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

Explosives: Do not use explosives. EXCAVATION, GENERAL Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1.

3.6

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

EXPLOSIVES

1.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A.

Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B.

Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Clearance: As indicated in the table below.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Internal Pipe Diameter (inches) 4 - 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48

C.

Trench Width (feet) 2.5 3.0 3.25 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.5 6.0 6.5

Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 12 inchesdeeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1.

3.8

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Excavate trenches 12 inchesdeeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A.

Notify Testing Agency when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B.

If Testing Agency determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1.

C.

Proof-roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. 2. 3.

D.

Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to contract provisions for charges in the work. See Bid Alternate Section of this specification.

Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Testing Agency, and replace with specified soil material, compacted according to project specifications, as directed by testing agency.

Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.9 A.

A.

Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

A.

Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3.12

Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

BACKFILL

1.

B.

Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.

STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

1.

3.11

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

1.

3.10

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

Place and compact bedding area to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1.

C.

Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

Backfill voids with specified soil material while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

D. 3.13

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Place and compact final backfill of specified soil material to final subgrade elevation. SOIL FILL

A.

Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B.

Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C. 3.14 A.

Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. 2.

3.15

Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A.

Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inchesin loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inchesin loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B.

Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C.

Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils). 1.

Structures, Building Slab and Step, Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density for cohesive material (modified

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.

3.

3.16 A.

3.17

proctor. ASSHTO T180). In uniform sands for which a proctor curve cannot be established compact at relative density of 80%. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum density for cohesive soils and 75% relative density for cohesionless soils. DO NOT COMPACT TOPSOIL. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 92% maximum density for cohesive material or 80% relative density for cohesionless material.

General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

GRADING

1. 2. B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch

Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-footstraightedge. SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A.

Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.18

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B.

Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C.

Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D.

Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1.

2. 3. E.

3.19

Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feetor less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feetor less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace specified soil material to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. PROTECTION

A.

Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B.

Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.

C.

Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.

Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 10

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.20 A.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 31 2000

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 11

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 31 5000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating and book filling and, and for existing utilities.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.4

Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 2. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 3. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. SUBMITTALS 1.

1.5

Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

31 5000 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. 2.

Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS A.

To be determined by Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1.

B.

Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.

D.

Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.

E.

Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

31 5000 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A.

Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.

B.

Remove excavation support and protection systems to a depth of 4’ below finished grade when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Excavation support and protection systems below 4’ below finished grade may permanently remain in place.

END OF SECTION 31 5000

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

31 5000 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 A.

SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3 A.

Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4

Standard Specification: MDOT: 2012 Edition SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1.

B.

Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.

A.

Hot-mix asphalt paving. Pavement-marking paint. Wheel stops.

Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.

Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

ASPHALT PAVING

32 1216 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for asphalt paving work.

C.

Coring Sample Location Map: Overlay proposed core samples on site plan.

1.6 A.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: MDOT 502.03 I

B.

Pavement-Marking Paint: MDOT: 811.03 D

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

AGGREGATES

A.

General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B.

Comply with referenced DOT standard.

2.2 A.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS Pavement-Marking Paint: MDOT: 811.02 1.

B.

Color: Blue for handicapped requirements, yellow elsewhere.

Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, approximately 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, and 84 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for anchoring to substrate. 1.

Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch minimum length 10 inches.

ASPHALT PAVING

32 1216 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 2.3 A.

2.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

BOND COATS Bond Coat: MDOT: 904.03

MIXES – See Geotechnical Report and Civil detail sheet

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B.

Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Proceed with paving only after these conditions have been corrected.

3.2 A.

Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction . Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.

SURFACE PREPARATION General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1.

3.3

Sweep loose granular particles from surface of inbound aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A.

General: MDOT: 501.03 F

B.

Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. 2.

Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.

ASPHALT PAVING

32 1216 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 3. 4. 5. C.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.

Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1.

D.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.4

JOINTS

A.

General: MDOT: 501.03.F.2

B.

Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.5

Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. COMPACTION

A.

General: MDOT: 501.03 G

B.

General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratoryplate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1.

Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F .

ASPHALT PAVING

32 1216 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

C.

Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

D.

Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. 2.

Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

E.

Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

F.

Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

G.

Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

H.

Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

I.

Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.6 A.

INSTALLATION TOLERANCES Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. 2.

B.

Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straight edge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. 2.

Base Course: 1/4 inch. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.

ASPHALT PAVING

32 1216 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 3.7

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PAVEMENT MARKING

A.

General MDOT: 811.03 B

B.

Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

3.8 A.

WHEEL STOPS Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 1.

3.9 A.

Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stops and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing 1.

Testing Agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B.

Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

C.

Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D.

Testing agency to provide three (3) cores within asphalt pavement, after placement of wearing course. Cores are to extend through bottom of aggregate base layer. Prepare a summary stating thickness of each layer. 1.

Heavy-duty pavement areas: Provide two (2) locations. a. b.

2.

Truck dock area. 200’ (min) from truck dock area.

Standard pavement areas: Provide one (1) core. a.

Within parking space and no closer than 100’ to site driveway.

END OF SECTION 32 1216

ASPHALT PAVING

32 1216 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. 2.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Driveways and roadways. Walkways.

Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for general building applications of concrete. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B.

Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C.

Field quality-control test reports.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B.

ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

C.

Concrete Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.

Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

C.

Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D.

Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

E.

Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

2.2

CONCRETE MATERIALS A.

2.3

General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project. Comply with division 3 section Cast In Place Concrete for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, and curing materials. RELATED MATERIALS

A. 2.4

Expansion and Isolated Joint Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. CONCRETE MIXTURES

A.

Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

B.

Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

C.

Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1. 2. 3.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi . Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. Slump Limit: 3 inches . a.

Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to plant- or site-verified, 2- to 3inch slump.

D.

Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.

E.

Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent: 1. 2. 3.

2.5

Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inchaximum aggregate. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 1-inch maximum aggregate. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate.

CONCRETE MIXING A.

Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1.

When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

B.

Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2

EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A.

Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

B.

3.3

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A.

General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B.

Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C.

Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D.

Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E.

Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.

3.4

JOINTS A.

General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

B.

Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. 2. 3.

C.

When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1.

Locate expansion joints at intervals of 40 feet, unless otherwise indicated.

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D.

Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E.

Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1.

Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. a.

F.

Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1.

3.5

Radius: 1/4 inch.

Radius: 1/4 inch.

CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.

Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B.

Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C.

Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D.

Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

E.

Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

F.

Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.

G.

Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.

H.

Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.

I.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.

2. 3. J.

Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1.

2. 3.

3.6

When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

CONCRETE FINISHING A.

General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.

B.

Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1.

3.7

Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A.

General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B.

Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C.

Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D.

Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1.

Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c.

2.

3.

3.8

Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A.

Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1.

Elevation: 1/4 inch.

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 3.9

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. Surface: Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch . Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

WHEEL STOPS A.

3.10

Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes cast into wheel stops. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stop and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B.

Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. 2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressivestrength specimens. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd. plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

7.

8.

9.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C.

Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

D.

Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

E.

Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

3.11

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A.

Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.

B.

Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C.

Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D.

Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING

32 1313 - 9

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 32 9200 - TURFS AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B.

Related Sections 1. 2.

1.2

Division 31 Section “Site Clearing” for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for excavation, filling and backfilling and rough grading.

SUMMARY A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

1.3

Seeding.

DEFINITIONS A.

Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B.

Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

C.

Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

D.

Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.

B.

Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. 1.

1.6

Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.

B.

Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding."

1.7

SCHEDULING A.

Planting Restrictions: MDOT 816.03.C.4

B.

Weather Limitations: conditions permit.

1.8

Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

LAWN MAINTENANCE A.

Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1.

Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion. a.

B.

Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. 1.

C.

When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch. Anchor as required to prevent displacement.

Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.

2. D.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. Water lawn at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week.

Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1.

E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Mow grass 2 to 3 inches high.

Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1.

Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to lawn area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SEED A.

Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B.

Grass See Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows: 1.

Gaylord Lawn Mix: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.

24.8 percent Penn Lawn Red Fescue. 24.7 percent Creeping Red Fescue. 21.9 percent Kentucky Bluegrass. 12.6 percent Perennial Ryegrass. 11.6 percent Annual Ryegrass. 4.4 percent other.

Ideal Old English Mix: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

24.8 percent Perennial Ryegrass. 21 percent Tall Fescue. 19 percent Annual Ryegrass. 15 percent Creeping Red Fescue. 13 percent Kentucky Bluegrass. 2 percent other or Perennial Ryegrass. 97 percent Pure Seed. 3 percent other.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

TOPSOIL A.

Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1.

Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a.

2.

3.

Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a.

2.3

Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from offsite sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

PLANTING ACCESSORIES A.

2.4

Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application. FERTILIZER

A.

Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1.

Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2. B.

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. 2.

2.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

MULCHES A.

Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B.

Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

C.

Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

D.

Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

2.6

EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A.

Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

B.

Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1.

B.

3.3

Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding overspray.

Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. LAWN PREPARATION

A.

Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B.

Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. 2.

Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. b.

3.

Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a.

b. C.

Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil mix. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. 2.

Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a.

3.

Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.

Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

4.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D.

Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E.

Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F.

Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.4

SEEDING A.

Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1.

Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

B.

Sow seed at the rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.

C.

Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D.

Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:6 with erosion-control fiber mesh and 1:4 with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. 2.

3.5

Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil with suitable mechanical equipment. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at the rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.

HYDROSEEDING A.

Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1.

Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 7

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.

3.

3.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply mulch at a minimum rate of 1500-lb/acre dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two-step process. Apply first slurry application at a minimum rate of 500-lb/acre dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch at a rate of 1000 lb/acre.

SATISFACTORY LAWNS A.

Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

B.

Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.

3.7

CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A.

Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B.

Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established.

C.

Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

END OF SECTION 32 9200

TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9200 - 8

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 33 1100 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A. 1.3

This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building. DEFINITIONS

A.

Fittings: Bend, Offset, Reducer, Cross, Tee, Sleeve, etc.

B.

Witness: Horizontal measurements to three (3) permanent surface features.

C.

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

D.

ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers

E.

MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society

F.

AWWA: American Water Works Association

G.

NPS: Nominal Pipe Size

H.

CDA: Copper Development Association

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Service line witnesses: 1.

1.5

Curb Stop Location: Record on record drawings

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Regulatory Requirements: 1.

Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

33 1100 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 2.

1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. 2.

Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dewpoint temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C.

Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D.

Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E.

Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F.

Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.8

Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Architect’s written permission.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate connection to water main with utility company or local municipality.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

33 1100 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A.

Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, annealed temper. 1.

Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

B.

Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

C.

Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.2

DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, thickness class 52 per AWWA C110 with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. 2.

B.

Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, thickness class 52 with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. 2.

2.3

Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

GATE VALVES, CHECK VALVES, CORPORATION VALVES, CURB VALVES, WATERREGULATING VALVES, RELIEF VALVES, FIRE HYDRANTS AND APPURTENANT MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS. A.

Shall conform to local authority requirements and state plumbing code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EARTHWORK A.

Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

33 1100 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 3.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PIPING APPLICATIONS A.

General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B.

Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D.

Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E.

Underground Water-Service Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. 2.

3.3

NPS 1 to NPS 2: Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. NPS 4 to NPS 8: Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints. a. Use mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints at all fittings and where pipe restraint is required.

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

3.4

General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 4 and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation. PIPING INSTALLATION

A.

Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B.

Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C.

Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

33 1100 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 1.

Install polyethylene corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

F.

Install copper tube and fittings according to Copper Development Association’s “Copper Tube Handbook”.

G.

Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 60 inches.

H.

Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports as required by utility company and municipality having jurisdiction.

I.

See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.

3.5

JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

3.6

Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 2. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals. VALVE INSTALLATION

A.

AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B.

Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Install each

33 1100 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 3.7

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A.

General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.

B.

Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage. Do not connect to any sanitary sewer, storm sewer, or sewer drains.

C.

AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17.

3.8

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

3.9

Testing and Inspection: Per local and state requirements. CLEANING & DISINFECTION

A.

Per local and state requirements.

END OF SECTION 33 1100

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

33 1100 - 6

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 33 3100 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A. 1.3

This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building. DEFINITIONS

A.

Fittings: Wye, tee and adaptor.

B.

Witnesses: Horizontal measurements to 3 permanent surface features.

C.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

D.

EJIW: East Jordan Iron Works

E.

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

F.

ACI: American Concrete Institute

G.

NPS: Nominal Pipe Size

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.5

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of utility company supplying sanitary sewer service. Include tapping of existing main. SUBMITTALS

A.

Service line witnesses 1.

Wye, tee and market at end of service line a. Report on record drawings.

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

33 3100 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 1.6

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B.

Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C.

Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

Notify Architect no fewer than two in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PIPING MATERIALS A.

2.2

PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 26, with bell-and-spigot ends for solventcemented or gasketed joints 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. NONPRESSURE-TYPE SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS

A.

Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B.

Sleeve Materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

33 3100 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EARTHWORK A.

3.2

Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." PIPING APPLICATIONS

A.

General: Include watertight joints.

B.

Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.

C.

Gravity-Flow Sewer Piping: Use the following: 1. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented joints, or gaskets and gasketed joints.

3.3

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C.

Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D.

Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E.

Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, piping according to the following: 1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

F.

Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.4

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

33 3100 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079 B.

3.5

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, piping according to the following: 1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomericseal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints. 2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. 3.6

Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. CONNECTIONS

A.

Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.

B.

Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

C.

Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

D.

Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.7

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Clean interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.

B.

Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2.

Submit separate report for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. b. c. d. e.

3. 4.

Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 95 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

33 3100 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Testing and inspection: per local and state requirements.

END OF SECTION 33 3100

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

33 3100 - 5

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

SECTION 33 4100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY 1.

1.3

This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building..

DEFINITIONS A.

Drainage Structure: Manhole, catch basin, inlet, etc.

B.

Fittings: Wye, tee, bend, end section, etc.

C.

Witnesses: Horizontal measurements to 3 permanent surface features

D.

PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E.

PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic

F.

EJIW: East Jordan Iron Works

G.

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

H.

AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

I.

ACI: American Concrete Institute

J.

NSSGA: National Stone, Sand, and Gravel Association

K.

NPS: Nominal Pipe Size

L.

CPPA: Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association

M.

ACPA: American Concrete Pipe Association

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

33 4100 - 1

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

1.4

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

1.5

Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system test pressure. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

1.6

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for storm drainage piping, including materials, installation and testing. SUBMITTALS

A.

Storm Drainage Witnesses 1.

1.7

Storm sewer and underdrain termini without drainage structures or end sections: Report on record drawings.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B.

Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C.

Handle manholes and structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.8

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

NON-PERFORATED PIPES AND FITTINGS A.

PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034, SDR 26, with bell-and-spigot ends for solventcemented or gasketed joints. 1.

Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

33 4100 - 2

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

2.2

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

CONCRETE A.

General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. 2.

C.

Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable.

Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.

Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. 2.

Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EARTHWORK A.

3.2

Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." PIPING APPLICATIONS

A.

Non-Perforated Gravity-Flow Sewer Piping/Culverts: Use the following: 1.

3.3

NPS 8 to NPS 12 Use PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

33 4100 - 3

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

C.

Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D.

Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2.

3.4

Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to CPPA's "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings." Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Make joints using system manufacturer’s couplings, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Join dissimilar pipe materials with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems’ materials and dimensions.

3.5

CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.

3.6

Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. CONNECTIONS

A.

Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.

B.

Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.7

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Clean interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. 1. 2. 3.

B.

In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2.

Submit separate reports for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following:

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

33 4100 - 4

CG Simulation Building #2 Camp Grayling Grayling, MI DMVA: 26B152079

a. b. c. d. e. 3. 4. C.

08/15/2014 Bids & Construction

Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project# 1310110.2

Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. Submit separate report for each test. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

END OF SECTION 33 4100

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

33 4100 - 5